diff options
Diffstat (limited to '24454.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 24454.txt | 9801 |
1 files changed, 9801 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/24454.txt b/24454.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f7b1b15 --- /dev/null +++ b/24454.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9801 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Across the Spanish Main, by Harry Collingwood + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Across the Spanish Main + A Tale of the Sea in the Days of Queen Bess + +Author: Harry Collingwood + +Illustrator: William Rainey + +Release Date: January 29, 2008 [EBook #24454] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ACROSS THE SPANISH MAIN *** + + + + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + + + + +Across the Spanish Main, by Harry Collingwood. + +________________________________________________________________________ +This book, of average length, is set at the end of the sixteenth +century, when the English were in a state of war against the Spanish. +The heroes of the story are two boys from Devon, a county in the +south-west of England. They set off with a view to repairing the +fortunes of the family of one of them, by chasing and capturing Spanish +treasure ships. + +Their adventures are many and various, and include being captured by a +famous pirate. They are also, later on in the book, condemned to be +burnt to death by the Inquisition. Luckily they are able to escape this +disagreeable outcome. + +They also come across a cryptogram, which is rather difficult to solve, +but which eventually they manage to decypher, and which leads them to +the treasure hoarded by the pirate, who by that time has met his end. + +This is a good book, and one which makes a very nice audiobook. + +________________________________________________________________________ +ACROSS THE SPANISH MAIN, BY HARRY COLLINGWOOD. + + + +CHAPTER ONE. + +HOW ROGER TREVOSE AND HARRY EDGWYTH MADE A CERTAIN COMPACT. + +"Now now, Roger, my lad; what are you thinking of?" These words were +addressed to a tall, fair young man of about eighteen or nineteen years +of age, who was standing on Plymouth Hoe, gazing earnestly at the Sound +and the evolutions of certain vessels which had just entered it round +Penlee Point. + +The speaker was a lad of about the same age, but shorter in height, +sturdier in build, and altogether more robust and healthy-looking than +his companion, who belonged rather to the class of dreamers than that of +workers. + +The time was a bright summer morning in the month of June, in the year +1586; and although the great Armada--which Philip of Spain fondly +believed was to crush England--was as yet undreamed of, war was even +then being carried on in a somewhat desultory manner between England and +Spain, very much to the disadvantage of the latter country. + +English gentlemen, who called themselves "gentlemen adventurers", were +fitting out merchant-vessels as warships, and sailing for the Spanish +Main and the Indies in the hope of securing some of the splendid prizes +that were at that time to be obtained through pluck and audacity, in the +shape of Spanish galleons richly and heavily laden with spices and gold +from Manila, plate from Acapulco, or costly silks and fabrics and +treasure untold from the new Spanish colony of Mexico. + +It was of these stirring deeds and adventures that Roger Trevose of +Pentillie Manor, on the river Tamar, in the county of Devon--fairest and +sweetest of all English counties,--was thinking when his friend Harry +Edgwyth, who had just arrived upon the scene, put his question: "How +now, Roger, my lad; what are you thinking of?" + +"I was thinking, Harry, what a splendid thing it would be if you and I +could join some of these gentlemen adventurers (heroes I call them), and +try our luck in the Spanish seas, fighting for our fortunes, and the +glory of dear old England. Just think of it, lad! That is a life for a +man to lead; is't not so, Harry? Pentillie Castle, as you know well, is +heavily mortgaged; and my poor father and mother are very hardly put to +it to make sufficient money to keep the old place up; and what would be +more fitting, Harry, I ask you, than for the only son, the heir to those +fair estates and that grand old mansion, to sail in some ship going to +the Indies, and endeavour to retrieve the fortunes of his house? Think +for a moment, Harry; who knows but that we might sight some rich Spanish +galleon, laden almost to the water's edge with plate, and, having +sighted her, chase and capture her! Why, a share of one of those +splendid cargoes that the plate galleons carry would probably be +sufficient to enable me to restore the fortunes of the dear old home, +pay off its mortgages, and free my dearly-loved parents from the load of +care that is now oppressing them. And that," continued Roger, becoming +wildly enthusiastic, "need not be the finish of it all. With some of +the money I could and would fit out an expedition of my own, and sail +for the Indies on my own account; and perhaps return with my ship more +richly-laden than any ship has ever been before; and my name would ring +through England; I should be given honours; perhaps be called to court; +and who knows, Harry, where I should stop! Why, lad, it is enough to +fire the most sluggish blood, let alone mine, which is hot enough, God +wot, as is that of all the Trevose family." + +"Ay, Roger," answered Harry, "but have you well weighed the risks; have +you thought of what your parents would feel if you left them all alone +to go to the Spanish Main, whence, perchance, you would never return? +Remember, lad, you are their only son, and heir to the old estate and +manor; and think what they would feel did you never come back." + +"Harry," replied Roger, "never, never have I seen or met your equal for +caution! Why prate, lad, of what might happen? Think rather of what is +certain to befall, and that is that I shall come back a rich man, rich +enough to enable me to realise all my wishes and ambitions. Why, if +everyone thought as you do, where would now be the names of the heroes +who have already made our dear England the mistress of the seas? +`Nothing dare, nothing gain', lad; that's my motto!" + +"You are quite right in what you say," replied Harry, "but only too well +do I know your careless and reckless disposition, Roger; and although +you would surely do daring deeds, and cover yourself with glory, I fear +me greatly that you would not live to bring home that treasure, even if +you did live long enough to gain it." + +"Harry, if I did not know you as I do, lad," retorted Roger, "I should +be inclined to dub you craven; but, as it is, I know full well that you +only suffer from excess of caution, even as you say that I suffer from +lack of the same. But I do not agree with your prophecy that I should +not live to bring home my spoil. No, I feel within myself that I shall +succeed in my venture, if I can bring my father and mother to consent to +my going; and I am also convinced that I shall be able to bring my +riches safely home. Meanwhile, the question is: Can I persuade some +brave captain to take me on his ship?" + +"Have you, then, truly made up your mind to sail for the Indies, Roger, +if you can get one of our adventurers to take you?" cried Harry. +"Methought you were only dreaming, and did not seriously entertain the +idea of leaving England." + +"I was never more serious in my life," replied Roger; "in fact I had +made up my mind some time since, and was but considering how and when I +could best put the matter before my parents, and wondering whether they +would give their consent to my embarking on such an enterprise. And I +would give much, Harry, my friend, if I could persuade you to accompany +me. Has not the prospect of adventure, glory, and perchance great +wealth, any attraction for you?" + +"Ay, that has it," asserted Harry; "but you seem to forget that, if I go +with you, I must leave my sister behind; and what would become of her, +poor maid? I have no other relations to whom she could go, or who would +care for her; and I cannot leave her behind, all alone." + +Roger broke into a peal of merry laughter. + +"Why, lad," said he, "you are forever making difficulties where none +exist! Now list to me, for I have a proposal to make you. If I can +persuade my father and mother to let me go, they will then, as you say, +be alone, seeing that I am their only child; but if your sister were to +go to them, it would in part reconcile them to my absence, while at the +same time the arrangement would provide a home for your sister, and a +way out of your difficulty. What do you say to my idea?" + +"That it is a good one," agreed Harry; "and I thank you, Roger, for the +thought, which truly had occurred to me also, but I did not like to be +the first to mention it. My sister has ever loved your mother, and I +think your mother has some little affection for the maid; and I am sure, +therefore, that she would be happy with your folk." + +"Let us then consider the matter as settled, so far as we are concerned, +Harry," said Roger; "and let us pledge each other to sail together; to +stand by each other through thick and thin, through fair and foul; to +share all dangers; and to divide equally all plunder that we may obtain +from the rascally Dons. Then I will away to consult my folk; and you +shall come too, Harry, and add your persuasions to mine. You shall +entreat them, with me, to let me go, promising them that, if they will +part with me, your sister shall keep them company till we return. And I +am sure that if we both plead hard enough, Harry, lad, we shall in the +end succeed in obtaining from them a promise to let me go at the very +first opportunity." + +"Very well, Roger," assented Harry; "this shall be the first action in +which I will stand by you according to our pledge; and I will come with +you and add my entreaties to yours that your people should let you go. +But when do you intend to ask them, lad?" + +"I am in Plymouth until the morrow after next," said Roger; "and then I +intend to take my boat, which I have left at Sutton Pool, and pull up +the river back to Pentillie; and you will come with me, Harry, will you +not?" + +"Ay, lad, that will I; have I not promised you?" replied the latter. +"But I must now go about my business, else shall I not be in time to +accompany you according to my promise. So until the appointed time, +when I will certainly meet you, farewell, lad! and have a care that that +hare-brain of yours does not get you into some trouble, meanwhile; for I +know what you are when you come into Plymouth on a holiday." + +"Never fear for me, Harry," returned Roger; "I have now something in +view of more importance than street brawls and such follies, and shall +take care that I get into no trouble to prevent my joining you at Sutton +Pool, as we agreed." + +With these words the two lads separated, Harry returning to his home to +break the momentous news to his sister, and elicit her views concerning +the proposed expedition, and Roger proceeding to the house of his uncle, +a worthy mercer of the town, with whom he was staying during the holiday +which he was at that time taking in Plymouth. Little did those two boys +(for they were scarcely more) realise the momentous nature of the step +that they had taken when they pledged one another on Plymouth Hoe! +Could they but have foreseen the wild and terrible days, the awful +sights, the hardships and privations, which lay before them, and through +which they would have to pass ere they might return to their native +country, it is highly probable that they would not have started on their +expedition at all. Or, if they had done so, it would have been with far +heavier hearts and more serious faces than they carried at the time when +they made their compact to stand by one another "through fair and foul, +through thick and thin", as they phrased it, that morning on Plymouth +Hoe. + + + +CHAPTER TWO. + +HOW THEY LEFT PLYMOUTH AT DAWN ON THE TWENTY-FIRST DAY OF JULY, 1586. + +At the time appointed the two friends met as agreed, and, taking the +small boat belonging to Roger, which he had left at the boat-stairs in +Sutton Pool, they pulled up the river Tamar, arriving in due course at +Roger's home, Pentillie Manor--or Castle, as it was called by the +country-folk round about. + +Harry, as Roger's best and dearest friend, was always welcome there; it +was, in fact, almost as much his home as was his house in Plymouth, +where he lived with his only relation, his sister Mary, on whom, be it +whispered, Roger had already begun to look with eyes which had somewhat +more in them than mere friendship. + +After the two lads had had a meal--which they sorely needed after their +long pull--Roger intimated that he desired to speak to his father and +mother in private; so they all three moved to an adjoining room. + +Said Roger: "My dear father and mother, I have for some time been of the +opinion that I am only wasting my days at home here doing nothing, and +have long been wishing to speak to you both about the matter. While I +was on my holiday in Plymouth I heard of nothing but the adventures and +exploits of those men who have gone to the Indies and the South American +coast, and of their success in arms against the Spaniards. To my mind +there is no occupation so befitting an English gentleman as that of +taking up arms against our natural enemies, the Spanish; and also it is +quite clear to me that huge fortunes are to be won in this grand game of +war; while you both know, as well as I, in what great need of money our +house stands at present. So a few mornings ago I finally determined +that, if I could obtain your consent and permission, I would enter into +the profession upon which I have set my heart, without further delay. +And as Cavendish is sailing very shortly for the Indies and the Spanish +Main, I think it would be a good plan for me to sail with him if he can +be persuaded to take me. I have spoken with Harry on the matter, and he +has agreed to sail with me; while, as some compensation for my loss to +you, he will leave his sister Mary--of whom I know you are very fond-- +with you, to be in your safe-keeping until our return, which God grant +may be not only with honour and glory, but also with sufficient money +from prizes to enable us to retrieve the fortunes of our house! You may +perhaps think that I ain too young, and had better wait for a few years; +yet Cavendish himself is only twenty-six, and he is not only joining an +expedition, but is actually captain of it. I think, therefore, that I +am quite old enough to be one of the members of his crew; and if I show +any promise, and work hard, as I fully intend to do, no doubt Cavendish +will soon promote me to some post under him as an officer of rank, +suitable to my age and ability. This, then, is what I have wished to +speak to you about; and now, having told you all my wishes, I beg that +you will let me go." + +It is needless to say that this sudden news of Roger's determination +came as somewhat of a blow to his parents, especially his mother, who +was very much against her son adopting a profession in which there was +so much danger. Roger's father, however, looked at the matter from a +more practical and business point of view, being fully aware that what +Roger had said about the glory honour, and riches to be won by a brave +man at sea at that period was perfectly true; and, although loath to +lose his only son, he saw quite clearly that the lad had fully made up +his mind to go to sea, even before speaking about the matter, and that +if he were forbidden he would take kindly to nothing else. So he +promised Roger that he would talk the matter over with his wife, and +that in due time they would let their son know their decision, possibly +in the course of the day. + +Roger's mother, as might be expected, raised all the opposition she +could to his going away; but her husband pointed out to her so clearly +the advantages to be gained that eventually she gave way, and consented, +with many tears, to part with her boy. She found some slight +consolation, however, in the fact that Mary Edgwyth would be with her +during Roger's absence; for she knew that Mary would be to her even as a +daughter, and would help, in some measure, to fill Roger's place until +he returned. + +His father accordingly communicated to Roger the result of his talk with +his wife, and the latter, being a high-spirited young fellow, was +naturally greatly elated thereat, and plied his father with questions as +to when he might be allowed to leave, and how the adventure was to be +brought about. There was a good deal to be done, however, before Roger +and Harry could get away; clothes had to be bought and packed, and +Roger's father had to make enquiry as to whether Mr Cavendish could +find room in his ship, and, if so, whether he would take the two lads. + +All, however, proved satisfactory in the long run, and Roger and Harry +were ordered to be on board Cavendish's ship, the _Stag Royal_, on or +before the twentieth day of July. This left the two boys about a month +in which to complete their preparations before the day of sailing came +round, and, needless to say, the time lagged most painfully for the +eager young adventurers, although to Roger's parents it seemed all too +short. + +Meanwhile Mary Edgwyth had come up to the Manor, and was safely +installed there; and the last week before the date of sailing soon came +round, both boys being in a perfect fever of enthusiasm and delight at +the prospect of leaving England to fight the Spaniards. + +On the eve of their departure Roger's father presented Harry and Roger +each with a splendid new rapier, the blades of which were made of the +best Toledo steel, of so fine a temper that it was possible, without +injury to the weapon, to bend the point round until it met the hilt, the +blade springing back, when released, to its original position and shape. +This gift naturally delighted the two lads immensely. + +At length their final orders came, bidding them be on board by the 20th +of July, without fail, as the ship and fleet sailed on the 21st at +daybreak. + +Roger and Harry accordingly packed their belongings, and, girding on +their new swords, started down the river early the next day, accompanied +by Roger's parents and Harry's sister, all of whom were anxious to see +as much of the two lads as possible before they left. + +They all arrived in Plymouth in the afternoon, and the lads having +reported themselves, and formally joined their ship, the entire party +proceeded to Harry's house to spend the night. + +They all rose in the early hours of the next morning, and the last +farewells were said upon the quay, while the boat from the _Stag Royal_ +remained alongside to convey them to the ship. Roger's mother wept +copiously, and fervently prayed that her son might return safe and +sound, while his father, less demonstratively, shook hands with him and +gave him his blessing, in the form of a husky "God keep you, boy!" Mary +Edgwyth embraced her brother affectionately, and it must be said that +all the tears she shed were not for Harry alone; it is certain that many +of them were evoked by the thought that she was also parting from Roger. + +At length the two lads stepped down the quay stairs into the boat, each +looking rather fixedly in front of him as he battled with a peculiar +choking sensation in the throat; but they gripped their swords tightly, +striving to gain courage by the touch of them, and managed to keep back +the tears which threatened to overflow; and when half-way to the ship +they were able to turn round and wave farewells to the three people +still watching from the quay. + + + +CHAPTER THREE. + +HOW ROGER AND HARRY TOOK PART IN THEIR FIRST SEA-FIGHT. + +The squadron, headed by the ship of Cavendish himself, the _Stag Royal_, +was well on its way to the Indies across the Atlantic, having taken in +wood, water, and stores at the Western Islands. Roger and Harry, by +this time quite recovered from their first sea-sickness, were fast +asleep in their bunks, it being their watch below, when they were +aroused by a cry on deck of "Sail-ho!" followed by the question in +another voice: "Where away?" + +"Right ahead, sir," came the reply. "She seems to be a large ship, and +Spanish by her rig." + +This was quite enough for the two lads, who, springing out of their +berths, dressed with all possible speed and ran up on deck. + +When they arrived there, however, there was nothing to be seen from that +level; but twenty pairs of eager eyes were looking out from the +forecastle-head, anxious for the first glimpse of the stranger, who was +nearly certain to prove an enemy, and therefore a prospective prize. + +Presently a voice exclaimed: "I see her, I see her; there she is right +ahead of us!" and at the same moment another hail floated down from the +masthead: "Sail-ho, again, and several of them!" + +By this time both Roger and Harry could see the topsails of the ship +first sighted, and their hearts beat fast at the prospect of a coming +engagement. + +"How many sail can you make out?" shouted the officer on deck. + +"I can see four more, besides the one we sighted first, sir," came the +reply; "and the ships look to me like a Spanish fleet sent out to +intercept us, for they seem to be hove-to and waiting for something." + +"That is well," replied the officer, smiling at Roger; "let them only +lie-to until we reach them, and there is not much doubt that they will +get something in the nature of an extremely disagreeable surprise." + +Now the fleet of Cavendish consisted of three ships only--the _Stag +Royal_, on board which were Roger and Harry, with Cavendish himself, she +being the flag-ship of the little squadron. Behind, at a distance of +about half a mile, came the _Elizabeth_ and the _Good Adventure_, close +together. + +Cavendish, having come on deck shortly after the first hail, looked at +the fleet of the enemy, and then cast his eyes over his own small +squadron, as if comparing in his mind the comparative strengths of the +two fleets. + +Then he gave the order: "Prepare the ship for action, men; clear the +decks; get the hammocks rolled up and triced along the bulwarks; open +the powder-magazine and get powder and shot on deck, and see that the +captain of every gun has a plentiful supply of each. Also pass the word +for the yeoman of the signals to signal the _Elizabeth_ and the _Good +Adventure_ to prepare for action forthwith, and to range up one on each +side of me." + +Having given these orders, and seen that the men hastened to carry them +out, Cavendish turned to Harry and Roger, who were standing together +anxiously looking ahead at the five ships, which were growing larger and +more distinctly visible to the eye every moment. + +"Well, young gentlemen," said he, "I mean to engage those five ships +that you see yonder, and so will you get your first taste of the +adventure you have come to seek. See that you bear yourselves bravely; +remember you are fighting for your queen and the honour and glory of +your country. This coming engagement is going to be no child's play, +you may take my word for it. They are five vessels to our three, and +are more heavily armed and of bigger tonnage than are we, by the look of +them. But fear not, young men; faint heart never won fair enterprise; +and if we should beat them--as I am certainly determined that we shall-- +doubtless you will have a handsome booty to handle after the battle. +Yet will it be hard fighting; and I trust that not only you two, but +every man on board these good ships of mine will do his very utmost." + +With these words Cavendish turned away, and went aft to give further +orders. Meanwhile the other two ships of his squadron, in answer to his +signal, had crowded on more sail, and were fast closing up, one on +either side of the flag-ship. + +The hulls of the five Spaniards were now quite plainly to be seen, and +it was observed that they were all prepared and waiting to give battle, +having slightly altered their formation since sighting the English, in +order to secure what they thought was the best position for fighting +their opponents. + +They were by this time about two miles distant, and had formed +themselves into two divisions, in the order now known as "column of line +ahead", and were evidently expecting the English ships to run in between +the two squadrons thus formed, trusting thus to be obliged to use only +one broadside of each ship, while the English would be compelled to use +both; the idea of the Spaniards being that with this formation the +English would pass between them one at a time, and while each English +ship would use both broadsides upon entering the lane between the two +Spanish squadrons, she would be thereafter exposed, with empty guns, to +the fire in succession of the five Spanish ships; that is to say, the +two ships in line ahead on the one side, and the three in the same +formation on the other. + +But if they imagined that the English were going to walk open-eyed into +such a simple trap as that they were vastly mistaken. + +Cavendish saw at once what tactics the enemy anticipated that he would +adopt, and immediately made up his mind to checkmate them by following a +totally different line of action; and accordingly he promptly signalled +for his other two captains to come on board. This they did forthwith, +and, taking them into the cabin of his ship, he briefly and hurriedly +explained to them the manoeuvre he intended to adopt to outwit the +Spaniards. + +This explanation was soon made, and the two skippers immediately +returned to their respective ships. + +The two squadrons had by this time arrived within gunshot of each other, +and Harry and Roger, eager though they were for the fight to commence, +were yet conscious of a peculiar feeling something akin to fright, in +extenuation of which it must be remembered that neither of the boys had +ever been in action before. + +It was now half an hour after mid-day, and one bell sounded on the three +ships of the English fleet. + +At almost the same moment, and before the sound of the bells had died +away, the first shot in the action was fired by the Spaniards. + +Harry, who was watching the starboard line or division of the enemy, saw +a flash, and immediately afterwards heard a whizzing sound, followed +from somewhere over his head by a sharp crash. Then a shower of +splinters fell round him and Roger, who was standing close by; while +immediately following this, down the wind came the dull boom of the +explosion. + +Roger looked aloft to see what damage had been done by the shot; it was +not very much: the fore topmast showed a white mark where a piece had +been neatly gouged out of it, and a few ropes were severed, but nothing +serious had happened. + +In accordance with Cavendish's orders, no shot was fired in return by +the English fleet; and presently, as they were about half a mile from +the foremost Spanish vessels, a very hurricane of smoke and fire burst +from as many of them as could bring their guns to bear on the little +English squadron. + +There was a crashing and crackling all round, and Roger and Harry +involuntarily winced as the round-shot came flying through the bulwarks, +and spars and splinters came tumbling and flying all around them. From +behind them there came a shriek, as some poor wretch met his +death-wound, and from across the water more shrieks were heard, +announcing that theirs was not the only ship that was struck. + +"First blood to the enemy," shouted Harry to Roger through the turmoil +of crashing wood and the shrieks of wounded men. + +"Yes," replied Roger; "but I wish they would give us orders to fire. +This plan of sailing along without making any reply to the enemy's guns +is unnerving me, and it seems to me that if we are fired upon much +longer without replying we shall have no men left in condition to fight +when we get alongside the enemy." + +"Never fear, Roger," replied Harry. "Cavendish knows what he is about; +and I think I see, even now, what manoeuvre he means to execute." + +The three English ships were now heading as though they indeed intended +passing between the two lines of the enemy's squadron, and had so far +fired not a single shot. Suddenly, however, when only separated by a +few hundred yards, the English changed their course two or three points +to port, and headed for the starboard side of the two ships which +constituted the right-hand line of the Spanish fleet. + +Thus the three English vessels were for a few minutes opposed to only +two Spanish ships, the three others being unable to fire except through +their consorts. + +This manoeuvre compelled the other three ships to leave their present +berths and run before the wind, afterwards tacking before they could +range up on the opposite side of the English fleet and so bring their +guns to bear. + +But during the time occupied by this movement, the English ships were by +no means idle. + +Upon ranging up alongside the two Spanish vessels, the sails of the +English ships collapsed as if by magic, the halliards being let go and +the clewlines manned; and, as the craft lost way, grapnels were thrown, +and the ships were secured alongside two of the Spaniards. + +At that period the Spanish war-vessels were built with "flush" decks, +that is, their decks were level fore and aft, and without bulwarks, and +were of much greater length than the English vessels, which were short, +and therefore more easy to manoeuvre than the Spaniards. Likewise there +were raised constructions at bow and stern, something like small forts, +called forecastles and aftercastles; the former word still remaining +under our modern term forecastle. + +The English vessels were then, as mentioned above, shorter by a good +deal than those of their opponents, and so the total length of the three +English ships was covered by that of the two Spanish vessels, which fact +preserved them for the moment from the fire of the other three ships of +the enemy. Roger now saw the reason why Cavendish had reserved his +fire. Immediately his ships came alongside those of the enemy, the +broadsides of all three were simultaneously discharged, with fearful +effect, for amid the crash of falling spars and rending timbers could be +heard the cries and shrieks of the wounded, and the moans of the dying. + +A dense cloud of smoke spread over the decks and concealed the +combatants from one another, but the din was terrific; while orders and +shouts, hoarse words of command, and fierce oaths mingled with the +cheers of the English. + +The sternmost vessel of the enemy, which was the one that had received +the concentrated broadsides of two of the English ships, was now on fire +somewhere on her lower-deck; three or four of her ports were blown into +one big opening, and her decks were a very shambles of dead and wounded. + +The fire below made very rapid headway, and effectually prevented her +men from working the lower-deck guns; it thus happened that with one +discharge from the English guns one of the two Spanish ships engaged was +seriously crippled. + +The two craft, however, responded gallantly from their upper decks with +what cannon they were still able to serve, and a perfect hail of arrows +and arquebus bullets swept the English decks, mowing down men in all +directions. + +The English had quietly reloaded those of their broadside guns that were +on the side of the enemy, the guns of the port broadside being still +undischarged. + +"Now, lads," roared Cavendish above the clamour and din of rending +timber and falling spars, "give them another broadside; and let the +musketeers on the upper decks and the bowmen in the fore and after +castles follow it up with a volley, in order to clear their decks. +Immediately after the discharges the boarders are to follow me!" + +At the commencement of the engagement Roger and Harry, seeing what was +likely to happen, had laid aside their light rapiers and armed +themselves with a pair of pistols apiece and the more formidable English +hanger as used by the ordinary seamen; and shoulder to shoulder they +stood by the starboard bulwarks, ready to spring as soon as Cavendish +should give his order to board. + +Meanwhile the three other Spaniards, seeing the manoeuvre of the English +and the danger of their consorts, had made all sail as quickly as +possible, and were now running away before the wind in order to go about +and stand up on the starboard tack to engage the English vessels and +relieve their companions, which were in a somewhat parlous state. + +The guns of the English ships' starboard broadsides now once more opened +fire with a simultaneous crash, which was immediately followed by a +discharge of musketry and arrows which laid low on the Spaniard's deck +nearly every living soul who had not taken what cover the deck +structures afforded. + +"Now, boarders," roared Cavendish, his voice ringing high above the +turmoil, "away with you, and do not leave their decks until their flag +comes down!" + +With a wild cheer the seamen, headed by Cavendish--who was closely +supported by Roger and Harry, who were respectively second and third on +the enemy's decks,--dashed at the Spaniards. + +One of the two Spanish ships was now blazing fiercely, having been set +on fire by the discharges of the English guns, and her crew were +beginning to think that the time had arrived for them to leave her. In +this opinion they were confirmed by the English, who were gradually +driving them from their own decks to those of their consort. They were +thus, as it were, between two fires, and were badly hampered by the +necessity to climb from the one vessel to the other. Those of them who +could not gain the deck of the other ship were driven overboard, and +very few of them survived to reach their goal. + +"Quickly, lads," shouted Roger; "drive these fellows off the deck, and +let us regain our own ship while we can. The other Spaniards are +drawing up, and will be on us before we are ready for them if we do not +look sharp." + +The seamen, animated by his voice, and seeing the necessity for doing as +he said, redoubled their efforts, and, with hearty cheers, massed +themselves together and charged along the reeking and slippery decks. + +The Spaniards, unable to resist the weight of the charge, scattered, +and, finding no other way of escape, dashed below; but they could not so +easily avoid the victorious English, who followed and hunted them out of +their hiding-places. + +As Roger and Harry, having dashed below in pursuit, were running down +one of the narrow alleyways, searching for hidden Spaniards, a man +sprang from behind a curtain and aimed a heavy blow with his sword at +Roger, who was foremost, cutting him down. + +With a faint groan Roger fell, and Harry stumbled over his body, thus +enabling the Spaniard to effect his escape. + +Half-stunned from the force of his fall, Harry raised himself and bent +over Roger. + +"Roger, Roger," he exclaimed, "are you much hurt? Speak to me, lad." + +But Roger made no reply, lying perfectly still, with a stream of red +slowly spreading from under his head and staining the white planking. +Suddenly, from above sounded a harsh cry. + +"Back, back, every man of you, and cut the ships adrift; the Spaniards +are firing the magazines; back, for your lives!" Loud and imperative +rang out the voice of Cavendish. "Quick, lads, for your lives, or we +shall be all blown up together!" + +"Roger, Roger, wake, lad," cried Harry; "the ship has been set on fire, +and will blow up directly. Heavens, what can I do?" + +But Roger never stirred; so, as there was nothing else to be done, Harry +took his body under the arms and began to drag him along toward the +nearest hatchway. + +At this moment the broadsides of the English again rang out, showing +that the other three Spaniards were drawing up, and were within gunshot. + +Meanwhile, on board the Spanish ship no sound was to be heard save the +roar and crackle of the flames, as Harry, putting out all his strength, +lifted the inanimate body of his friend to his shoulder, and plunged +along the passage through the blinding and suffocating smoke. + +He was dashing forward, holding his breath as much as possible, with his +eyes smarting with smoke, and feeling as though they would burst from +their sockets, when he crashed up against some obstacle, dropping the +body of Roger from the force of the contact. A puff of fresh air now +blew the smoke aside for a moment, and Harry saw what was the cause of +his stoppage. His way was blocked by a stout oaken door, that had +evidently been closed by some seaman when he retreated upon hearing the +alarm that the magazine was in danger of being fired. + +Harry dragged frantically at the handle and turned it wildly, but in +vain; the door was secured on the other side by some kind of spring +latch, and escape seemed impossible. + +The smoke meanwhile was momentarily becoming more and more dense, and it +was now an agony to breathe, while every second of delay meant awful +danger; and Roger seemed to be rapidly bleeding to death for want of +attention to his wound. + +Harry looked round for some instrument with which to force the door, and +his eye fell upon a handspike, probably dropped by some flying foe. +Seizing this, he smashed madly at the door, till at length the panel +splintered under his frantic blows; then, putting his hand through the +opening, he felt for the latch, found it, and the door opened at his +touch. + +Once again raising Roger in his arms, he staggered blindly along; and at +last, bleeding from contact with splinters, and his hands almost raw +with wielding the handspike, he reached the foot of the companion-ladder +and dashed up it with his still inanimate burden in his arms. + +On reaching the deck he saw that the grapnels had been cut, the three +English vessels had drifted some hundreds of yards away, and were even +then engaging the three other Spanish ships which had come up; and the +air was again full of the roar of cannon, the crashing of timbers, +falling of masts, shrieks, groans, cries, orders, and imprecations. + +The Spanish ship which had been in company with the craft that caught +fire had vanished, and only a few timbers and fragments were floating on +the surface; she had evidently been sunk by the terrible fire of the +English guns. + +The ship on which they now were, the _Maria Dolorosa_, was by this time +a spouting fountain of flame, from her bows as far aft as her mainmast. +Her guns were exploding one after another as the fire reached them, and +added their thunder to the already awful din. + +Harry raised his voice, and shouted over the water with all the power of +his lungs to the English ships, but the continued roar of the cannon, +mingled with the rattling crash of musketry volleys, the shouted +commands of the officers, the hoarse outcries of toiling and fighting +men, and the crash of rending wood as the broadsides tore their way into +the vitals of the reeling ships effectually drowned his outcries; while +everybody was far too busily engaged to notice his critical situation. + +"Ah, Roger!" said he, apostrophising the inanimate figure that lay at +his feet as he stood at the extreme edge of the poop, in order to be as +far away from the furnace heat as possible,--"Ah, Roger, I fear, dear +lad, that our lives are coming to an end even before we are fairly +launched on our adventures! Oh, why cannot they--!" + +At this moment there was a roar as if all earth and heaven were +dissolving in chaos, and Harry, feeling as if he were being whirled +downward into everlasting night, knew no more. + +The fire had at last reached the magazine! + + + +CHAPTER FOUR. + +WHAT HAPPENED TO ROGER ON BOARD THE GLORIA DEL MUNDO. + +When Roger next opened his eyes he was at a loss to to recall +immediately to mind the preceding events; nor could he for the moment +imagine where he might be. + +He was in great pain from the wound in his head, received on board the +Spanish ship which he and Harry had boarded together, and this served to +bring his memory back to what had occurred. + +He remembered rushing with Harry down a dark alleyway, with cutlass in +hand, and also that a man had suddenly sprung at him and cut him down; +that he had received so violent a blow on his head that he had felt +certain his skull was cloven asunder; and then his memory ceased +abruptly. But where was Harry, his inseparable companion? + +Roger raised his throbbing head painfully, and tried to look round, but +could nowhere discover the presence of his dear friend. He shouted his +name: "Harry; Harry, where are you?" but there was no reply. Only +somewhere above him he could hear the roar of cannon, hoarse cries of +command, angry shouts, and the trampling feet of many men. + +Looking about him, he perceived that he lay in a cabin of some sort, +very richly furnished, but lit by a light so dim that he could only make +out objects in it very indistinctly. There was no port-hole or +sky-light of any description in the apartment, which led him to the +conclusion that he must be in some room far away below the water-line. +This impression was heightened by the fact that exterior noises came to +his ears muffled, as by distance. + +In the cabin itself there was no sound, save the gnawing of a rat +somewhere on the floor below him. On the walls he could dimly discern +two or three pictures, and just above his bunk was a portrait of a lady. +There were also several star trophies of weapons arranged at intervals; +and at one end of the cabin--which was of unusually spacious +dimensions--stood a large cabinet or escritoire, one of the drawers of +which had apparently been pulled out hastily, as papers were to be seen +protruding from it, and several documents had fallen to the floor. + +Oh, how he wished he might venture to rise from his bunk and make an +investigation of the cabin! But he was afraid to attempt any such +exploit, for his head ached so atrociously, and he felt so deadly sick +and giddy from the anguish of his wound and loss of blood, that he felt +certain if he exerted himself but ever so little he would sink helpless +and insensible to the deck. While thinking thus he abstractedly raised +his hand to his head, and thus discovered that his wound had been +bandaged, evidently by a skilled hand, for the wrappings were all neatly +put on, adjusted, and sewn, instead of being merely tied. This was so +far satisfactory, for it seemed to point to the fact that he had fallen +into friendly hands, although his returning senses, enabled him to come +to the conclusion that he must certainly be aboard a Spanish ship. With +a sigh of relief he was preparing to pull the coverlet over him and lie +down once more, when his ear caught the sound of footsteps approaching. +He was just about to shout to the person or persons, whoever they might +be, and enquire as to where he was, and whether they could afford him +any information as to what had become of Harry, when his quick ear +caught one or two words of the conversation which the unknown persons +were carrying on. It was in Spanish. Then his surmise was a true one, +and he was indeed aboard one of the enemy's ships. With a stifled cry +he flung himself down in the bunk, and pulled the coverlet over him once +again, closing his eyes, and simulating heavy breathing, in the hope of +persuading the new-comers that he was in a deep slumber. + +He was only just in time, for as he composed his limbs into a +comfortable position, in the event of the strangers making a lengthy +stay, two men entered. + +Roger looked at them from between his nearly-closed eyelids and saw that +both were tall men, slender and dark, both wearing long black mustachios +and closely trimmed beards. Roger happened to possess a slight +knowledge of Spanish, and was thus able to gather the meaning of at +least part of their conversation. With one accord they approached +Roger's bunk and leaned over, looking at his face. + +"He sleeps," said the elder of the two men. + +"Well, let him sleep as long as he will," replied his companion +sardonically, "for it is little enough sleep the young heretic will get +when once he is delivered over to the Holy Inquisition." + +Roger shuddered. + +He had heard quite enough of the methods of that institution to +understand the significance of the words. He longed to open his eyes +and take more particular note than he had yet been able to do of the +personality of his two visitors; but he withstood the temptation, and +kept his eyes closed, listening hard to catch all he could of the +ensuing conversation. + +"And what, Alvarez, are the captain's orders with regard to the boy?" +said the elder man, whose name, it transpired, was de Soto. + +"Senor Don Guzman's orders," answered the other, "are that he is to be +kept in this cabin until we have finally disposed of these three +pestilent English ships; and when that is done, and we have captured +them, he is to be locked up in the fore hold, with the other prisoners +we shall take--if the rascals do not in this case fight to the death, as +they often do. Then when we return to Cadiz they are all to be handed +over to the Holy Inquisition." + +Roger felt the cold perspiration start in beads on his forehead. + +"Ah! It seems almost a pity," said de Soto, "that we should have +plucked this lad from the sharks, only to hand him over to those other +fiends of the Holy Office; for he is a handsome and stalwart lad, and +those limbs of his were never meant to be seared with red-hot irons, and +torn asunder on the rack!" + +"Hush, de Soto, my friend!" responded Alvarez; "let no man save myself +hear you speak thus of the Holy Office, or thy limbs, of which thou art +so proud, may perchance make acquaintance with the same torments as are +reserved for this young heretic." + +"Thanks, Alvarez!" returned de Soto; "I should not have spoken thus +before any other than thyself; but thou art my friend, I know. I can +trust thee with my life; as, indeed, I am trusting thee in speaking thus +freely of the so-called Holy Inquisition. Is it not so?" + +"Yes, de Soto, it is so; and I am indeed thy friend," replied Alvarez, +turning his head slightly aside, so that his companion might not catch +the evil glitter that shone in his eyes. He did not know that Roger was +observing him through nearly-closed lids, and that he had caught that +look on Alvarez's face as he turned from de Soto; and possibly if he had +known he would not have greatly cared. But if ever the devil incarnate +looked out of any man's eyes, he did at that moment out of those of the +man whom Roger had heard addressed as Alvarez. + +"But how goes the fight, de Soto?" he continued, after a pause. +"Methinks there is less cannonading now than there was a little time +since." + +"When I left the deck a few minutes ago," answered de Soto, "two of our +ships, alas!--the _Maria Dolorosa_ and the _Buena Vista_--had +disappeared. One was sunk by the fire of these cursed English: and, +unable to hold the other, our brave countrymen fired her magazine. I +expect this young heretic was on board the ship that blew up, for just +before the explosion came I thought I saw two figures on her poop, one +of whom was standing up, while the other was lying on the deck at his +feet. I think the one who was lying down must have been our friend, +here. What became of the other I know not; but he was doubtless either +drowned or swallowed by one of those same sharks from which we only just +rescued this lad in the nick of time. He will live, I fear, to wish +that we had left him to them. As for our other three ships, they were +engaging right valiantly those of the enemy, and beating them down too; +but these cursed islanders seem to know not when they are beaten, and I +doubt me that our victory will be at all an easy one. As for them, +although the ship of Cavendish has lost all her masts, her hull is +almost intact, thanks to our wretched gunnery; and there she now lies on +the water, unable to move, it is true, but, like a wounded lion, all the +more dangerous for being wounded. But the _Gloria del Mundo_ is giving +her all attention, and she will be compelled to strike to our heavier +broadsides ere long. Our other two vessels, _El Capitan_ and +_Salvador_, are engaging the remaining ships of the English squadron, +and the moment cannot be far distant when they will all surrender to the +flag of his most sacred majesty, Philip of Spain, the invincible flag, +the flag of the empire of the Old World and the New," concluded de Soto. +"So," thought Roger to himself, "it would appear that I am on board the +_Gloria del Mundo_, and that the action is as yet undecided. But Senor +de Soto is, I imagine, somewhat mistaken if he seriously believes that +Cavendish will surrender his ships; rather will he let them sink with +colours flying. I will not believe that the flag of England, the +mistress of the seas, is this day destined to dip to the blood and gold +flag of Spain. And the end of the fight, I will wager, is not only +farther off than this good de Soto suspects, but it will also have a +different ending from what he looks forward to, or my name is not Roger +Trevose!" + +"I believe the lad is awake," said Alvarez; "I could almost swear he +moved just now." + +Both men bent over Roger, who had involuntarily stirred upon hearing +that these two anticipated the surrender of the English. + +"No," dissented de Soto, "I think he still sleeps; you must have +imagined it, Alvarez." + +The glitter came again into the eyes of the latter, as he replied: "de +Soto, my imagination is not--" when suddenly the roar of cannonading +again commenced, drowning the remainder of the sentence. Then came a +shock that made the stately vessel reel throughout the whole of her +massive fabric. There was a rending and grinding of timber, and a +frightful crash on deck announced that one of the masts had come down. + +Roger heard distant cheers, and knew that his prognostication that the +end had not yet come was correct. Evidently the English had repeated +the manoeuvre that they had so successfully practised earlier in the +day, and laid their ships alongside once more. Musketry, pistol-shots, +shouts, groans, the clash of steel, a perfect medley of sound floated +down from the deck above and through the open cabin-door. + +"Quick, Alvarez, on deck!" roared de Soto, plunging out of the cabin; +"the English have laid us aboard, and will have the ship if we are not +careful!" + +Alvarez was in nowise behindhand. Snatching his sword from its sheath, +and clutching a pistol from the table as he went, he followed de Soto on +deck. + +Roger attempted to get out of his bunk, with the idea of joining his +friends on deck and taking part in the fight, but he fell back on his +mattress, weak and giddy from the attempt. What would he not give to be +able to go on deck at this moment! but he could not stir for the reeling +giddiness of his head; he felt that to attempt to rise would but result +in his falling insensible to the floor of the cabin; and he could but +lie still and listen to the turmoil raging above his head. + +The din was terrific; now came triumphant shouts in English, and Roger +could picture to himself the bravo fellows rushing the Spaniards +pell-mell across their own decks and into the water, or below; and again +the tide of battle seemed to turn, and the English to be getting the +worst of it. + +Oh, maddening thought, that he was helplessly imprisoned here, unable to +take part in the brave doings that were being wrought above! Little by +little the shouts and fierce cries died away. "Who had won?" +conjectured Roger to himself. + +There was a clatter of running feet in the passage leading to the cabin, +and the man Alvarez, with a hunted look of terror in his face, clashed +into the apartment. He burrowed hastily among the papers in the open +drawer that Roger had noticed at first, and apparently was unable to +find what he was looking for. + +"Carramba!" he ejaculated, "what has de Soto done with those papers?" + +He tore the remainder of them from the drawer with a curse, flung them +on the floor, and, dropping on his knees, hastily turned them over one +after another as they lay there. + +Now for some time Roger had been vaguely conscious of a peculiar +sluggish movement of the ship as she heaved on the swell, and the sight +of Alvarez's haste suddenly brought the ghastly truth home to him. The +ship was sinking! + +"I must wait no longer," muttered Alvarez to himself, "or I shall be +drowned like a rat in a trap, in company with that young heretic there +in the bunk. I wonder whether by any chance de Soto has taken those +papers himself! Carrajo! now I remember. When we came in together to +look at the English whelp the drawer was open. Without doubt de Soto +has them. Well, never mind; I will have them from him before I have +finished with him. I can recall all he has said about the Holy +Inquisition, and, if that is not enough to condemn him, I can easily +enough invent something else; but have those papers from him before he +dies, I will. Perhaps, when he is in the hands of that Inquisition he +hates so much, he will be willing to surrender those documents to his +dear friend Alvarez, if that friend promises to rescue him from further +torment. And now for the English cub," he continued, rising to his feet +and drawing his dagger from its sheath. + +Once again came that sickening lurch, accompanied by the sound of +washing of water close at hand. The ship was fast settling down. + +"No," murmured Alvarez, "I cannot wait. My life is too valuable to me +to risk it even for the pleasure of slaying an Englishman; and the sea +will soon send the youngster to the nether world." And he rushed from +the cabin, leaving the papers and charts strewn on the floor at the foot +of the escritoire. + +By this time Roger was pretty fully awake to a knowledge of his great +and pressing danger. Here he was, weak and dazed to the point of utter +helplessness, on board a fast-sinking ship, with none to render him aid, +and feeling quite unable to move without it. + +"Oh, God help me!" he moaned; "what a miserable death to die! Harry! +Harry! Harry!" he cried distractedly, "come and help me; I am here +below drowning! Help! help!" + +There was no reply. + +But a sound that he had heard before without attaching much importance +to it now forced itself upon his attention; it was the swishing of +water; and, looking over the edge of his bunk he saw that water was +already rising fast over the floor of the cabin. Desperation now lent +him strength, and, pulling himself together with a violent effort, he +slowly and painfully rose upright and put his legs over the edge of the +berth. He felt incapable of making any further effort for the moment. + +Then once more he raised his voice and shouted for help, and this time +he fancied that far away in the distance he heard a reply. He shouted +again and again; then paused, listening. + +The answering voice sounded a little nearer. + +At that moment the ship gave another roll, and to Roger it seemed as +though she must founder immediately. + +There was another sickening lurch, and Roger, convinced that the end had +come, went tumbling off the edge of his bunk, and fell flat on his face +in about two feet of water which was washing over the cabin floor. The +shock of the fall displaced his bandages; his wound began to bleed +afresh; and, confused as he still was, the idea took possession of him +that he was in danger of bleeding to death. + +Would nobody ever come to take him out of this awful hole? "Help, help, +I am drowning!" he shouted. + +But this time there was no answering voice. + +Then Roger once more pulled himself together and began to crawl over the +floor, the water splashing round and over him. Inch by inch he neared +the door, and then he heard a call, so near that it startled him. + +"For Heaven's sake, where are you, Roger? Answer, man, if you are +alive." The voice was Harry's. + +"Harry," groaned Roger, "here I am; help me quickly or you will be too +late; the ship sinks fast!" + +Guided by the voice, Harry soon made his appearance. + +"Roger, man," he cried, "thank God I have found you! I thought you were +gone for ever. Can you help yourself at all, lad?" + +"A little, I think, if you will put your arm round me," replied Roger. + +Harry flung his arm under Roger's arm-pits and raised him to his feet. + +"One moment, Harry," cried Roger, pointing to the papers which Alvarez +had left on the floor, and which were now floating about the cabin; +"secure these papers; I believe they are of value." + +Harry seized the documents with his free hand, and, supporting Roger, +staggered with him to the foot of the companion-ladder. How they +eventually got up into the free air the two never clearly knew, for they +were deep down in the body of the ship, and had two or three ladders to +climb ere they arrived on the upper deck. But reach it they did, after +what seemed an eternity of suspense. Then, as they stepped out once +more into the blessed free air of heaven, the whole of the Atlantic +seemed suddenly to sweep over the ship; they felt her slide from beneath +their feet; and they were drawn down, down, down, until it appeared as +though they would never again see the light. But at last, with lungs +bursting and almost suffocated, they shot up to the heaving surface of +the sea, clinging tightly to each other. + +And there--oh, blessed sight!--not twenty fathoms away, lay their own +ship, dismasted and looking an utter wreck, but more beautiful to their +eyes than any palace. + +From her decks there came a shout: "There they are! there they are! +Lower away a boat! lower quickly, or the sharks will have them!" + +In a few minutes the only remaining boat belonging to the ship was +lowered, and a dozen willing arms were sending her flying over the water +towards the two lads. + +Bearded faces looked over her gunwale, and brawny arms literally +snatched them from an awful death; for as they were dragged out of the +water there was a snap of hungry jaws, and several huge sharks were +baulked of their prey. + +A few minutes later, dripping and exhausted, the two lads found +themselves once more safe and sound on the decks of their beloved ship, +and saw Cavendish himself looking at them with an expression of anxiety +on his face. + +"I hope, lads, you are none the worse for your adventure?" said he. + +"No, sir, we are safe, thank God!" replied Roger; "but we have been +through a good deal, and are somewhat shaken. We should therefore like +to go below for a while. But is all the fighting over?" + +"Yes," replied Cavendish, "and victory is to us." + +The two then went below, and Harry soon had Roger under the care of the +surgeon. The good man pronounced that his wound was not dangerous, and +that he would do, with care. + +Then, sitting by Roger's side, Harry plunged into a recital of his +adventures since the boarding of the Spaniard, a circle of eager +listeners standing or sitting round them. + + + +CHAPTER FIVE. + +THEY ENCOUNTER A STORM AT SEA, AND REACH THE ISLAND OF CUBA. + +What had happened to Roger is already known to the reader, and what +befell Harry after the explosion on board the _Maria Dolorosa_ may be +very shortly recounted. + +The shock of his plunge into the cold water brought him to his senses in +time to prevent him from drowning, and his first thought was to look +after Roger; but his friend was nowhere to be seen. He shouted his name +in vain for some time, and then started to swim towards his own ship, +which lay quite near, in the faint hope that perhaps his friend might +have been seen and rescued by her. + +He made enquiries immediately on reaching the deck of the ship, but +could elicit no information as to Roger's whereabouts, and everybody on +board was much too busy with his own work of fighting the three +remaining Spanish ships to pay any attention to Harry. But he could not +thus easily resign himself to Roger's loss, and he peered over the lee +bulwarks in an endeavour to discover his friend's body, if it were still +afloat. + +He could, however, see nothing of it, and was beginning to fear that he +had indeed lost his dear friend and the companion of his boyhood, when +from the _Gloria del Mundo_, the Spanish ship which was nearest to him, +he saw a boat lowered, which pulled away in the direction of a floating +piece of wreckage which he had not until then noticed. He saw the boat +row up close to this wreckage, and take from it a body which appeared to +be hanging limply across it; and, looking more intently, he felt almost +certain that the body was that of Roger. The boat pulled back to the +_Gloria del Mundo_, and was hoisted on board. + +If the body was indeed that of Roger, then, thank Heaven! he was safe +for the time being; but the poor lad was nevertheless still in a very +precarious situation, being on board a Spanish ship. Harry could see +also that the vessel was in manifest distress, and had apparently not +much longer to float. + +It was some time after this that Cavendish, having at length disposed of +his previous antagonist, ordered his ship to be laid alongside the +_Gloria del Mundo_, with the object of capturing her out of hand, and +making a prize of her before she sank. This was accordingly done, and +the crash which Roger had heard, followed by the cries and musketry, was +indeed, as he believed, the result of the English vessel being laid +alongside and the rush of the English boarders. + +It goes without saying that Harry was among the first to board, and he +immediately commenced his search for Roger, but unluckily began it in a +totally different quarter from that in which Roger had been placed. + +The _Gloria del Mundo_ was soon in the hands of the English, but it was +found that she was sinking too fast for them to save her, and the +boarders were at once recalled. + +Harry, however, determined not to leave without his friend, and he was +therefore left behind when the Englishmen returned to their own vessel. +The grapnels uniting the two ships were cut, and at once the craft began +to drift apart, Harry being left on board the Spanish vessel searching +for Roger. + +How he found him and rescued him, obtaining possession of certain +documents at the very last moment, and hoisted Roger on deck even as the +ship swamped beneath their feet, has already been told. + +Now, as to the result of the action. Of the two ships first engaged by +the English--the _Maria Dolorosa_ and the _Buena Vista_--the latter had +been sunk at the commencement of the action, and the former had blown +up. + +The third ship, the _Gloria del Mundo_, had sunk. The _Salvador_ and +_El Capitan_ were the only two of the Spanish fleet that still remained +afloat, and both were fearfully knocked about. The _Salvador_ had lost +all her masts, every one of her boats had been smashed to pieces by the +gun-fire of the English, and her sides were everywhere perforated with +shot-holes. But a prize crew had been put on board her, and was now +hard at work patching her up and rendering her seaworthy, rigging +jury-masts, cutting away wreckage, and otherwise putting her once more +into sailing trim. _El Capitan_ was in a similar condition. She had +still her mizzenmast standing; but otherwise she was as badly damaged as +her companion, and was undergoing the same repairs and refit. + +The Spaniards who had escaped on board the _Salvador_ and _El Capitan_ +from the other vessels, and the crews of the two ships themselves still +left alive, had been divided into five batches, one being put on board +each ship. This was done by way of precaution, since, thus separated, +there was much less likelihood of their attempting to recapture their +own ships or take those of the English. + +The English squadron had suffered almost as badly, for although none of +the vessels had been sunk, they were all in a very seriously damaged +condition. Cavendish's vessel, the _Stag Royal_, had lost all her +masts, and was in great danger of foundering, her appearance being that +of a huge mass of wreckage rather than a ship; but the carpenters were +hard at work on her, and were making good her defects as quickly as +possible. + +The other two vessels of the English fleet, the _Elizabeth_ and the +_Good Adventure_, were not quite so much cut up as the ship of the +commodore, but stood in need of a good deal of repair before they would +be again serviceable. + +The English had put prize crews on board the two Spanish ships, sadly +depleting the companies of their own ships, and all hands were kept hard +at the work of repair, for Cavendish knew that, in the event of a gale +springing up, none of the ships would weather it in their existing +condition. It was very trying work, too, this patching up of the +vessels at sea, and at the best it could be nothing more than a +temporary repair. But at last, after three days of incessant toil, all +five of the craft were reported as fit to proceed on the voyage. Yet it +was agreed that they ought to run for some place where the ships might +be beached, careened, and overhauled thoroughly; otherwise they could +not be trusted to weather the storms which they would inevitably meet +with on their proposed cruising-ground, which was the Caribbean Sea. + +Cavendish therefore summoned a conclave of the captains of his little +squadron in the cabin of the flag-ship, to decide upon some place where +they might go to execute the necessary repairs. + +The charts were got out and laid upon the table; courses were laid off +to various places, and the distances thereto measured and calculated; +and after some discussion it was decided unanimously that they should +run for the West India Islands, trusting that they might meet with no +Spanish squadron either on the way or at their rendezvous for +overhauling. + +The place they agreed to make for was the eastern end of the island of +Cuba, as this island lay on their direct course for the Caribbean Sea +and the coast of Mexico, where they intended to cruise in the hope of +picking up some plate-laden galleon from Vera Cruz or Tampico. + +This island of Cuba was, it is true, a Spanish possession, but it was at +this time newly discovered and only very sparsely populated. So, by +keeping to the eastern extremity of the island, and maintaining a sharp +lookout whilst the ships were in the process of careening, they hoped to +avoid any encounter with their enemies until, the ships being properly +repaired and once more serviceable, they should find themselves in a +position to resume their cruise with a view to the securing of more +prizes. + +The squadron of five ships which they had just beaten had been sent out +from Cadiz to intercept Cavendish and prevent him from reaching the +Indies, and, being a war fleet, had no treasure on board. The gain to +the English consisted, therefore, solely in the acquisition of two more +ships for their little fleet; but this was not altogether an unmixed +blessing, because, with the obligation to man their extra two vessels, +the whole five were now short-handed. + +Cavendish gave his orders to his captains, which were that the five +vessels should make for the eastern end of Cuba, and, if separated, meet +at a spot the bearings of which he gave them, about a day's sail from +the island, whence they would proceed in company, so as to arrive at +their agreed destination all together. + +It now remained to appoint two captains to the prizes and put prize +crews on board them, and this was soon done. Cavendish appointed the +first and second officers of his flag-ship as captains of the two +captured Spanish ships, replacing his first officer by the third, a man +named Leigh, and appointing Roger to the vacant post of second officer. + +It had been his intention to promote Harry to a position as officer on +one of the captured ships, but the lad begged so hard to be allowed to +remain in the same vessel as Roger that Cavendish at last consented, +adding that he thought Harry was throwing away an opportunity which +might not again occur. So long as he might remain by Roger's side, +however, Harry did not very much care. "Besides," thought he, "we made +a compact to remain always by one another, and I am sure Roger would +have stayed with me had I been appointed instead of him." + +The signal was now made for all sail possible to be carried, so that +they might the sooner reach their rendezvous and begin the work of +overhauling and repairs of which they stood in such urgent need. If +separated by storm or any other mischance they were to meet at the place +agreed upon during the conclave in the cabin of the flag-ship. + +Sail was made accordingly, and the little squadron, now increased by two +ships, but with sadly diminished crews, resumed its voyage. + +For the first three days all went smoothly, the speed of the whole being +regulated by the pace of the slowest vessel in the squadron. On the +evening of the third day, however, the weather showed signs of changing. +They had been sailing along with a good following breeze, the sky +overhead a deep, cloudless, sapphire blue, and the sea smooth enough to +relieve them from all uneasiness. Now, however, the sun was sinking +toward the horizon like a ball of dull red copper, and the western sky, +instead of being clear as previously, was heavy with black clouds that +were banking up and threatening to obscure the sun ere it set. +Overhead, too, deep violet clouds made their appearance, tinged here and +there to lurid red and orange by the rays of the fast-disappearing +luminary. The air, moreover, felt dull and heavy, and carried a +peculiar odour not unlike brimstone. This singular condition of the +atmosphere was not without its effect on the men, who felt listless and +disinclined to work. A sense of impending peril seemed to be hanging +over all. The wind, too, was gradually dying away, and came fitfully +and at intervals in hot, sulphurous puffs. The sea, which had been +sparkling in thousands of tiny wavelets in the rays of the sun, began to +assume a dark and oily appearance; and a long swell was beginning to +make itself felt, causing the sails, as they drooped against the masts, +to flap noisily with a sound like the crack of an arquebuse. + +Gradually the sky grew blacker and more overcast, and the sea assumed +the appearance of ink. The five ships of the squadron were all well +within sight of one another, and lay motionless save for their uneasy +heaving to the swell which was now fast-rising. Having lost +steerage-way, they were "boxing the compass", that is, were heading +first in one direction and then in another, their bows slowly swinging +until they pointed in various directions. Cavendish was on deck, +looking anxiously at the sky, and presently he gave the order to all +hands to shorten sail, and hailed the ship lying nearest to him to do +the same. + +The other vessels were lying too far away for a hail to carry, and there +was no wind to lift the signal flags if hoisted; but the commodore was +relieved to see the remainder of the fleet follow his example. In a few +moments the canvas of the whole squadron was seen coming heavily down or +being rolled up on the yards; and before very long all the ships were +either under bare poles or being snugged down with everything secured +ready for any emergency. + +Cavendish, however, still remained very anxious: and he had cause enough +for his anxiety. For his squadron had only recently come through a +heavy action, and their timbers were strained; masts had been merely +secured in a temporary manner, and the necessary stays and fore and aft +preventers had not yet all been rigged; indeed, the process of bending +new sails, ropes, etcetera, was still being gone on with although the +ships had been got under way at the earliest possible moment. +Shot-holes had been only roughly plugged, and in some of the vessels +pumping was still being carried on day and night. The two prizes had +been knocked about still more badly; in fact the whole squadron was in a +very unfit state to encounter even a strong gale, and the coming storm +threatened something very much worse than this. But everything was +battened down and made as snug as possible, and all that Cavendish could +now do was to trust in Providence and hope his ships would survive the +tempest, since nothing had been left undone that mortal hands could +possibly do. + +A dull moaning sound at length began to make itself heard, and several +hot sulphurous gusts of wind came down out of the north; the blocks +overhead creaked, the cordage rattled, and in the heavy silence weird +noises made themselves perceptible. Roger and Harry were standing on +the poop, exchanging comments on the weather, and Cavendish and his +chief officer, Richard Leigh, were in close conversation on the +main-deck just below them, glancing anxiously from time to time toward +the northward, where the sky had become black almost as midnight. + +"Look there, Harry," observed Roger, pointing to the main-topgallant +yard; and, looking up, Harry perceived two lambent globes of greenish +fire. + +As he continued looking and wondering what they might be, other weird +lights made their appearance on the yard-arms and on the very tops of +the masts, presenting a beautiful, but at the same time a very eerie, +spectacle. The same phenomenon was to be seen on the spars of every +vessel in sight; and as it was by this time very nearly dark (there +being scarcely any twilight in these latitudes), the whole squadron had +the appearance of being illuminated. + +"Whatever can it possibly be?" queried Harry; "I have never seen +anything like it before." + +"I suspect," returned Roger, "that it is in some way connected with the +approaching storm. I have heard sailors speak of those lights as +witch-lights, death-gleams, and corposants, and their appearance is said +always to foretell disaster. I hope, however, that they do not forebode +evil on this occasion, although things are looking decidedly unpleasant +just now." + +Cavendish, hearing their conversation, looked up, and, observing the +apprehension of the two, explained to them that the lights were termed, +by the Portuguese navigators, "Lights of Saint Elmo"; and he assured the +lads that the lights were not the cause of, but the harbingers of, +storm. + +"I fear, however," added he, "that we are in for a bad time of it, and +you youngsters had better beware lest you be swept overboard when the +sea rises; for if anyone is washed over the side during what is coming +he will have no chance of being picked up again. So take care, young +men!" + +Suddenly Roger perceived, far away to the north, a line of white, which +looked like a thin streak of paint drawn across an ebony background, and +the dull moaning noise in the air quickly grew in volume, at the same +time becoming more shrill. Roger shouted down a warning to Leigh, who +was standing near the wheel, and pointed away in the direction from +which the line of white was approaching. Cavendish, who had just walked +forward to make sure that all was as it should be, heard the warning, +and shouted an order for all on deck to prepare for the outfly, and +then, seizing his speaking-trumpet, rushed up on the poop beside the +boys, and roared out a warning to the only ship within hail. Then, +turning, he told the two lads to get down off the poop on to the +main-deck, where they would be sheltered to a certain extent by the high +bulwarks of the ship. In obedience to this command they hurried down +the starboard accommodation ladder, whilst Cavendish made his way down +the one on the port side, and all three reached the deck together. + +Cavendish then shouted some order to Leigh at the wheel, but whatever it +may have been, his words were drowned by the awful shriek and roar of +the hurricane as it burst upon them. + +To Harry and Roger, who had never experienced anything of the kind +before, it seemed as though some mighty invisible hand had smitten the +ship, throwing her over on to her beam-ends. She heeled down before the +blast until it seemed as though she would capsize altogether, while the +two boys were precipitated both together across the streaming decks into +the lee scuppers, whence they found it impossible to escape owing to the +excessive slant of the deck. + +Leigh was hanging on to the wheel for his life, endeavouring to put the +helm hard up, and so turn the ship's stern to the wind to enable her to +run before the gale--the only course possible under the circumstances. + +Cavendish and a few men in the fore-part of the vessel were meanwhile +striving manfully to hoist a staysail and get some way upon the ship, so +as to help her to pay off before the sea, and so save her from being +pooped by the waves, which were rising higher and higher every moment. + +At length the stability of the ship prevailed, and she began to right. +Then, Roger and Harry, rushing to Leigh's assistance, helped him to put +the helm up, and the ship paid off and began to scud before the wind, +while Cavendish, encouraging his little body of men up in the eyes of +the ship, managed to get the foresail set, after having had it nearly +blown out of the bolt-ropes. + +Looking astern, the boys saw the huge seas rushing after them, each one +threatening to engulf the craft and send her to the bottom; and indeed +that would speedily have been her fate had the men not been able to set +the small rag of sail, and thus made it possible for her to keep ahead +of the waves. + +The foaming crests of the sea were ablaze with phosphorescence, and +appeared to tower above the poop as high as the main-topsail-yard, and +the sight of them sweeping along after the ship was positively +appalling. The wind now began to increase in violence, literally +tearing off the summits of the huge waves and sending them in spindrift +hurtling across the deck like showers of shot that cut the face like the +lash of a whip. The uproar was terrific, the shrieking and howling of +the wind blending with the creaking and straining of the timbers of the +labouring ship. Crash succeeded crash aloft, but they could distinguish +nothing of what was happening because of the intense blackness. Yet the +motion of the ship was becoming steadier, for the reason that the wind +was so strong that it was actually beating down the sea. + +Suddenly the two lads heard a rending and tearing sound, followed by a +crash quite close to them, as something weighty smote the deck; and +through the fearful din that raged round them there rang out the scream +of a man in agony. + +"Harry," said Roger, "that is the mizzenmast come down, and it has +injured some poor fellow! Let us endeavour to reach him if we can." + +And, still holding to each other, they began to feel their way carefully +along the deck, which was now encumbered with wreckage. + +Suddenly Harry cried out, and fell over something, which proved to be +the wreck of the fallen mast. + +"Are you hurt, Harry?" queried Roger. + +"No, lad," came the response, "and I think I have found the poor fellow +whose scream we heard just now; he seems to have been crushed by the +mast as it fell. If you will stoop down here, you will be able to feel +his body. Had we but a lever of some kind we might perhaps be able to +raise the mast sufficiently to drag him from underneath it." + +Roger climbed over the mast and, feeling for Harry, knelt down beside +him, where he found the body that Harry had fallen upon when he tripped +over the mast. + +By touch he found that the poor seaman, whoever he was, was pinned down +immovably to the deck, the mast lying right across the middle of his +body. + +Roger put his mouth to the ear of the man, and shouted: "Are you badly +hurt; and can you move with assistance?" + +He caught the reply: "Is that you, Master Trevose? I am pinned down by +this spar, and I believe my leg is broken; but if you could manage to +get the mast raised by ever so little, I believe I could scramble out +from under it." + +"Can we find a lever anywhere?" shouted Roger. + +"There are a couple of handspikes in the rack close to you; if you can +find these, they will do," replied the wounded seaman. + +Roger worked his way to the rack indicated by the man, and fortunately +found the handspikes at once. Taking them both, he quickly scrambled +back again and handed one to Harry, retaining the other himself. + +The two lads then prized the points under the mast, and threw all their +weight on the shafts, using them as levers. They felt the mast quiver +and move slightly. + +"That's the way, Master Trevose; one more lift like that and I'll be out +from under," shouted the man. + +Roger and Harry again exerted all their strength, the mast rose +perceptibly, and they heard a cry of pain from the seaman as he wormed +himself from under the spar. + +"I be out now, Master," came the voice; "if ye can lift me up and get me +below, I'll thank ye." + +One of them supporting him on either side, they raised the unfortunate +fellow upright, and with great difficulty assisted him across the deck, +and so to the companion-hatch, which they found without trouble, as it +was now growing somewhat lighter. The clouds were not quite so thick, +and an occasional gleam came from the moon as she was uncovered. + +They got the man below, Roger taking him on his back down the +companion-ladder, while Harry ran for the surgeon. The latter soon made +his appearance, and attended to the sufferer, who proved to be an +ordinary seaman named Morgan. + +Having seen the patient off their hands and well attended to, the couple +returned to the deck. + +They found that the wind was lessening every moment, and the clouds were +disappearing fast, permitting the moon to shine out fitfully; but the +sea, no longer kept down by the pressure of the wind, was rising +rapidly. + +"I think the squall is past its worst, Harry," said Roger. "What we +have to fear now is the sea, which will get worse, I am afraid, ere it +goes down--but look there! Merciful Heaven! what is that?" he +continued, pointing away over their port quarter with his finger. + +The inky blackness had lifted somewhat, and they could plainly perceive +the hull of one of their own ships, presumably; but her ports were open, +and her interior appeared as a glowing furnace, while, even as they +looked, tongues of fire spurted up from her deck and began to lick round +her masts, and from the hapless vessel a long wail of anguish and +despair came floating down the wind. + +Every eye in the ship was at once turned to the burning vessel, which +they presently made out to be, by her rig, the _Salvador_, one of the +two captured Spanish vessels. + +What seemed to have happened was that the Spanish prisoners confined +below had fired the ship before the squall came down, in the hope of +being able to overpower their captors in the ensuing confusion, trusting +to luck for the opportunity to extinguish the conflagration afterwards. +The storm arising after they had set fire to the vessel, however, the +wind had fanned the flames until she had become a raging fiery furnace +fore-and-aft. And there was no means of affording succour to the +miserable men on board her, for the sea was running tremendously high +and rising every minute. + +She was an awful but gorgeous spectacle, presenting the appearance of a +floating volcano, vomiting flame and smoke as she rushed along before +the wind; but still more awful were the cries and shrieks of agony that +were borne to them across the intervening water. + +Cavendish at once gave orders that his ship should be run as close as +possible, compatible with her safety, and this was done; but it was +impossible to save her wretched crew, and the rest of the fleet endured +the misery of beholding their comrades burn, together with the +panic-stricken Spaniards, the authors of the calamity, as many of whom +as possible had been released as soon as the fire was discovered. + +A speedy end, however, came to the appalling tragedy which was taking +place before their very eyes; for while they still watched, powerless to +save, a terrific explosion occurred, followed by a rain of blazing +pieces of timber and, gruesome sight! of portions of human bodies which +had been whirled aloft, and now came hurtling down on the decks of the +flag-ship. The fire had reached the _Salvador's_ magazine! + +This awful spectacle cast a deep gloom over the entire ship's company. + +Shortly afterwards, none of the other vessels being in sight, and the +sea having moderated somewhat, Cavendish ordered the ship's course to be +altered, and they again bore up for the rendezvous. + +On the tenth day after the storm they reached, without further +adventure, the agreed latitude and longitude, and hove-to, waiting for +the remainder of the squadron to make its appearance. + +Two days later, the first of the other vessels, the _Elizabeth_, made +her appearance, and on the same evening, by the light of the tropic +stars, the other two joined them. + +All four remained hove-to until daybreak. Early on the following +morning they all got under weigh again, and headed for the land, which +now could not be many miles distant. + +Shortly after noon came the ever-welcome cry from the masthead: "Land +ho!" + +"Where away?" demanded the officer of the watch. + +"Dead ahead," answered the lookout. + +"Keep her as she goes," ordered Cavendish; and with an ever-lessening +wind they glided toward the land that climbed higher and higher above +the horizon by imperceptible degrees. + +By the end of the first dog-watch on that same evening they were close +enough to make out the formation of the land; and at length, sighting a +bay that looked promising for their purpose, they bore up for it, +sounding all the way as they went. + +As the land opened up, the bay toward which they were heading appeared +to offer increasingly advantageous facilities for careening and +repairing; and they presently passed in between two low headlands +covered with palms, and dropped anchor in the calm inlet in six fathoms +of water, at which depth they could clearly see the bottom of sand +thickly dotted with shells and broken pieces of coral. + +At last, after many weary and fateful days, they had reached a haven on +the other side of the Atlantic; a haven in one of the islands of those +fabled Indies where, if legend was to be believed, gold was to be found +more plentifully than iron in England! + +All hands gazed longingly at the shore; but leave could not be granted +that night, as the country was unknown, and although it appeared to be +uninhabited, they could not be certain what eventualities might arise. +Cavendish, therefore, deemed it better to wait until morning, and then +send a strong force on shore to reconnoitre and explore. + +Meanwhile Roger and Harry went below to their bunks and slumbered, +dreaming of the coming morn. Those of the crew who were off duty slept +on deck or in their hammocks, as the fancy took them; the anchor watch +was set; and thus all hands, waking or sleeping, waited for the morning +which should disclose to them this garden of Paradise. + + + +CHAPTER SIX. + +HOW THEY INVESTIGATED A CERTAIN CIPHER AND MET WITH SOME ADVENTURES. + +Day had scarcely broken next morning ere Harry and Roger tumbled out of +their bunks, dressed, and went up on deck, so eager were they once more +to be on shore after their many long days at sea. + +As they came on deck the sun rose in all his tropic grandeur, and +transfigured the little inlet--with the ships floating on its bosom, its +environment of green palms and tropical verdure, and its golden sands +running down to the water's edge--into a veritable nook of fairyland. + +For a distance, so far as they could judge, of about three miles the +ground appeared to be fairly level, rising very gradually, and thickly +covered with tropical foliage. Beyond that there was a range of hills, +apparently about a thousand feet high; and beyond these again rose peak +after peak of lofty mountains, the bare summits of the tallest glowing +like jewels in the brilliant tropical light. Close at hand, on the +southern shore of the inlet, lofty cliffs ran sheer down to the water's +edge, where a ledge of rocks ran out some little distance into the bay, +and these rocks seemed to be literally honey-combed with caves. On the +northern side of the inlet the water shoaled gradually, terminating on a +beach of clean yellow sand, which again stretched for some distance +above water mark, and was then lost among the bush foliage. Tall +coco-nut palms graced the margin of the inlet, and, behind them, trees +bearing oranges, guavas, bananas, lemons, mangoes, and various other +kinds of tropical fruits could be discerned close at hand. It was in +truth a lovely scene that the lads gazed upon that bright morning. + +There was a moderately good rise and fall of tide, judging from the +marks on the beach, and the northern shore was undoubtedly the one that +would be chosen by Cavendish for careening his vessels, as the ground +sloped steeply but evenly, the sand was firm and hard, and the trunks of +the palm-trees would be very useful for securing the hawsers, by means +of which they would heave the vessels down on their beam-ends. + +The sun mounted higher in the clear blue of the heavens as they looked, +and all about them rose the sounds of awakening nature. Away back in +the woods they could hear the chattering of monkeys; parrots and birds +of bright plumage screamed and sang and fluttered among the trees near +the beach; and several bright-plumaged flamingoes stalked gravely about +the shallows, seeking their morning meal in the limpid water. + +Presently, too, life on board the vessels was stirring, and the shrill +whistle of the boatswain's pipe roused all hands to their duties. The +men came tumbling up from below, and the business of the day commenced. + +The officers of the ship and the two lads went down presently to +breakfast, after which leave to go on shore was granted to several of +them, including Roger and Harry. + +Those who were going ashore quickly determined to make up a party and +keep together, because as yet they knew nothing of the country, and +there was the chance that it might be inhabited; in which case, if +separated, and any savages were in the neighbourhood, the whites might +find themselves awkwardly situated. + +As many of the crew as could be spared were also allowed to go on shore +for a few hours before the business of careening and refitting +commenced; and, needless to say, they were delighted at the prospect of +having a little more space wherein to walk about than the narrow decks +of their own ships, and also of being able to get some fresh fruit--of +which they stood in great need, scurvy having already appeared among +them. + +After breakfast, therefore, they quickly got the boats over the side, +and soon there was a regular procession of them from the vessels to the +shore. + +Once there, the seamen immediately began to gather the fresh fruit, and, +collecting a pile of what they most fancied, they lay down beside it, +and ate at their ease, their past perils forgotten for the moment, and +all of them supremely happy. + +A few of the more adventurous spirits, however, went off into the woods +on a tour of investigation, taking their muskets and bows with them, in +the hope of procuring a little fresh meat. + +Roger and Harry, who had, of course, gone ashore with the first +boat-load, stood for a while on the beach at the edge of the water, +undecided for the moment what to do first. + +Harry suggested having a bathe in the limpid water of the little bay, +first of all; and indeed it looked so inviting that Roger was not slow +in seconding the proposition. + +Accordingly they soon slipped off their clothes, and were quickly +disporting themselves like young dolphins in the water, when Harry, +glancing up, saw the ships lying, as it seemed, only some quarter of a +mile away, their shapes reflected in the water with such distinctness +that it was difficult to say where the substance ended and the shadow +began. + +This apparent proximity of the ships immediately put an idea into both +their heads at the same moment, and they both shouted together: "Let us +have a race off to the _Stag Royal_." + +They laughed that they should have spoken the same words together, and +they immediately decided that they would have a wager of a noble on the +event. + +"Are you ready, then, Roger? 'tis a race to the _Stag Royal_; and the +first up the ship's side and on her deck will win the noble," exclaimed +Harry. + +"Agreed, lad; away we go!" replied Roger. + +And the two started off, swimming strongly, with a side stroke instead +of the breast; for although the former required more power, yet it was +the faster stroke, and they reckoned their strength to be quite equal to +a much longer distance than that to the ship. + +But, as is invariably the case, distance viewed over water is deceptive, +and by the time that they had done three-quarters of the course both +were feeling pretty well fagged out with their unusual exertions, though +neither would admit it; and the fact remained that they were swimming +much slower than at the start. Suddenly they were startled by a loud +hail from the deck of the _Stag Royal_--the ship for which they were +making,--in the voice of Cavendish. + +"Be not frightened, lads, but pull out as fast as you can for the ship; +there are sharks coming after you!" + +Their hearts leapt in their breasts at this startling news, and, looking +hurriedly round, they perceived, to their horror, that several black +triangular dorsal fins were cleaving the water in their wake, and +closing rapidly in upon them. + +Fortunately the water in the direction in which they were swimming was +as yet clear, to all appearance. + +"Cannot you send a boat, sir? We are nearly exhausted with the swim," +hailed Roger, who was slightly in advance of Harry. + +"Nay, that I cannot, lad, for all the boats are still on shore. You +must swim, and for your lives' sake swim hard," answered Cavendish from +the deck of the ship. + +He was leaning anxiously over the bulwarks, and the rail was lined with +the faces of the few seamen who were left on board, while two of them +had gone down the accommodation ladder and were waiting at the foot, +ready to haul the lads in as soon as they were near enough. + +The men on board now quickly seized whatever missiles they could lay +their hands on, and stood ready to bombard the sharks, in the hope of +driving them off, if they did not seize the lads before they got within +range. + +As for Harry and Roger, they struck out with the energy of terror; but +each felt that he was tiring with every stroke, while the knowledge that +at any moment they might feel themselves in the jaws of one of those +sea-tigers seemed to paralyse their limbs. Their flesh crept with the +horror of the thought. + +Harry, especially, was showing manifest symptoms of increasing distress; +while Roger, resisting the impulse to swim on and reach safety, kept +valiantly at his side, encouraging him. + +"Go on, Roger," at length gasped Harry; "I am done, and cannot reach the +ship. Swim you on and get on board; I will follow if I can." + +"Nay, Harry, lad," answered Roger, "either we both get on board, or--or +not; we did not make our compact to break it at the first sign of +danger. Do your utmost, and we shall yet get on board all right." + +Even in his extremity Harry could not avoid noticing that Roger +hesitated when he came to "or--or not;" the brave lad could not bring +himself to utter the alternative in words. + +Before leaving the shore the boys had stripped down to their pantaloons +and vests, which they had retained as a makeshift bathing-costume. Now, +as luck would have it, Roger invariably wore a belt round his waist, to +which was attached a very fine Venetian dagger, slender of blade, sharp +as a razor, and very strong. + +This had been given him by his father as a parting keepsake, and he +looked upon it almost as a kind of talisman; he therefore never allowed +it to leave his person. + +Merely by force of habit he had buckled this belt and dagger about him +before starting for the swim, and now, in the moment of his deadly +danger, he suddenly recollected that he had it on him, and an idea came +to him like an inspiration. + +"Harry, swim you on and reach the ship," said he. "I am not at all +tired, and I have my dagger with me; swim on, and I will swim after you. +Argue not, lad, you will but waste your breath; do as I say, and make +all haste to the ship." + +Harry, knowing that when Roger spoke thus it was useless to argue, did +as he was ordered, and struck out for the vessel with such energy as he +could muster. + +For his part, Roger drew his dagger, and held it firmly in his hand; and +then, swimming after Harry, began to splash and shout with all his +might. + +The fins, which had by this time come very close to them, paused +suddenly and scattered at the unexpected commotion; and a little time +was thus gained for the fugitives, who made the utmost of it. + +The sharks, however, were not so easily to be denied, and presently they +began to close in again; by which time Harry was approaching the side of +the _Stag Royal_, while Roger was still some distance behind, splashing +and shouting vigorously. + +The fins drew nearer and nearer with deadly determination. + +Abandoning now the splashing, which was greatly exhausting him, Roger +put out all his remaining strength and swam for his life, while, the +splashing having ceased, the sharks were after him again at once. + +It was now a race, not between two boys for a wager of a noble, but +between a boy and a school of sharks, with the boy's life as the stake. + +The sharks were fast gaining upon Roger, and he and they were as yet +quite out of range of the missiles with which the men were ready to pelt +the ravenous monsters. But Harry had meanwhile reached the ship and +been hauled in and deposited on deck, where he immediately sank down +fainting with exhaustion. + +Then, seeing his friend safe, Roger redoubled his efforts, and the +distance between the sharks and him lessened but slightly, while he +decreased the distance between himself and the ship very perceptibly. + +These herculean efforts could not last long, however, and the sharks +once more began to draw in upon him. + +The men on the deck of the ship now shouted, and flung their missiles as +far as they could; but the swimmer and the sharks were still too far off +for the latter to be frightened by the bombardment. + +Inch by inch the ravenous fish closed in on the lad. + +He glanced over his shoulder as he swam, and as he perceived how close +the monsters were, the men on board the ship could see, even at that +distance, that his face turned livid. + +The foremost shark was nearly on him now, and there was yet a +considerable distance to cover ere he could reach safety. + +Suddenly the leading fin disappeared, and the watchers knew that the +shark had dived, in order the better to seize its prey. Their warning +was roared over the water to him, but apparently too late, for with +their shout, Roger's body disappeared! + +A cry of horror at once went up from the ship, and strong men turned +away, unwilling to witness the death of their favourite. + +Those who still watched, however, almost immediately saw a tremendous +disturbance of the water just below the spot where Roger had +disappeared; and presently a broad blotch of red stained the blue water +of the inlet, while a deep groan went up from the assembled crowd on +deck. But the groan quickly changed to a mighty cheer as they saw +Roger's form appear again at some considerable distance nearer the ship, +and evidently safe and sound, for he was still swimming strongly. And +immediately after, in his rear, the body of the shark rose to the +surface, floating on its back, dead! The remainder of the sharks +instantly flung themselves upon the carcass, tearing it to pieces, and +churning up a bloody froth as they struggled and tore and fought for +their share of the spoil. + +Roger had done the only thing possible to save his life. As the shark +dived, so did he, and, swimming below the brute, he had ripped up its +belly with several strong slashing blows from his keen dagger, thus +effectually ridding himself of one adversary, and trusting that the +remainder of the school would wait to devour it--as indeed they had +done,--thus giving him a further chance to escape. + +He was now quite near the ship; but the sharks had quickly disposed of +the carcass of their companion, and were again after him. Roger, +however, was now within range. So, as the sharks came on in pursuit, +they were bombarded with every description of missile upon which the men +could lay their hands, a proceeding which checked them slightly, and +gave Roger a little more grace. + +At length, utterly exhausted, the plucky lad reached the foot of the +accommodation ladder, but just in time, for, as he was pulled clear of +the water, a pair of huge jaws clashed behind him with a sound that made +him nearly faint, so suggestive was it of what he had so narrowly +escaped. + +By the time that he reached the deck Harry had fully recovered, and he +was the first to grasp Roger's hand and wring it convulsively as the +latter stepped inboard. Harry could find no words wherewith to express +his feelings adequately, but the pressure of his hand spoke for him, and +Roger felt amply repaid for all he had done. + +"And now, young gentlemen," said Cavendish sternly, when the young hero +of the adventure had been recovered somewhat by the administration of a +liberal dose of rum, "let this be a warning to you never again to go +bathing in these seas. You have both had a most miraculous escape, and +I for one had given the pair of you up as lost. But, thank Heaven, you +are safe after all. Only never let it occur again. But I suppose you +will take care of that," he added with a twinkle in his eye. "Your +first experience with Johnny Shark has been enough for you, hasn't it?" + +They reassured him on that point, and both then went below to dress. +When they were again clothed, Harry said: + +"And now, how shall we spend the remainder of the day, Roger? I don't +feel like going ashore again to-day, even if we had a boat. The idea of +crossing that sheet of water again does not very greatly appeal to me +just now." + +"I feel pretty much as you do," replied Roger. "I have had quite enough +of the water for to-day. As an alternative, I suggest that we +investigate that sheaf of documents that we took out of the _Gloria del +Mundo_ at the time of the battle. That fellow Alvarez seemed feverishly +anxious to find a certain paper, and bitterly disappointed at his +failure, so perhaps there may be something of value among them." + +So saying, Roger went to his sea-chest, and, having unlocked it, drew +out the bundle of papers to which he had referred, and laid it on the +table. + +They ran through most of them without finding anything of interest, +those examined proving to be merely papers relating to the provisioning +of the ship, and one or two old charts with courses marked off on them. + +On another chart, however, they found something that claimed a moment's +attention. It was one upon which the position of the Spanish +intercepting fleet had been laid down, together with the supposed course +that the English vessels would steer, thus proving that they had +correctly anticipated the movements of the English. This they put +aside, intending to hand it to Cavendish, as it would be of interest to +him. + +"This is probably the document that scoundrel Alvarez was looking for +while the _Gloria del Mundo_ was sinking," said Roger, who had related +to Harry all that had happened while he was awaiting death in the cabin +of the Spanish vessel. + +"Hardly that," demurred Harry. "I should think it would be something of +much more importance; because, you see, this would not be of much value +to him after the action. Let us search further." + +They did so, and presently came upon a sheet of rough parchment, which +had escaped the search of Alvarez through its having worked its way into +a folded chart. + +They spread it open upon the table, and found that they could make +nothing of it, as it appeared to be a mass of figures, and nothing else. + +"I wonder what on earth this can be," said Roger. "It seems to be +nothing but a lot of figures put down anyhow. I expect it is merely a +sheet of scribbling-paper, upon which some rough calculations have been +worked. At any rate it is of no importance, and clearly is not what +Alvarez was looking for." + +"Wait one moment, Roger," said Harry; "be not over-hasty, lad. I +believe this is more important than it looks. May it not be a cipher of +some kind? Let us have another look at it." + +The document presented the following appearance:-- + + 1581. + 2227 1819 1919 2622 1820 1335 1138 1918 + 1717 2020 1618 2727 2722 2222 3811 1819 1816 + 1237 2225 1915 1515 2424 2525 1730 2014 1430 + 1718 2121 1420 1920 3014 1830 1519 2120 1915 + 2018 1030 1440 1614 3019 2017 1028 2226 1930 + 1226 1616 1324 1325 1236 1818 1235 1222 1218 + 3118 2725 3113 1334 3217 1324 1424 1335 3212 + 1817 2019 1321 2824 1420 2021 1434 2121 3212 + 1533 3316 2223 1614 1433 3415 3311 1916 2220 + 2525 1715 1423 2322 3314 2414 1517 1816 3019 + 1416 1822 1618 2122 1120 2826 2022 1321 1424 + 2221 1930 2413 2014 2413 3311 2624 2029 1423 + 2512 1915 1614 2611 2319 1713 2320 2925 1519 + 2418 1816 1433 2218 1922 1320 1126 1721 2920 + 1133 1232 1030 1520 1730 3212 2418 2317 2520 + 3017 2117 2023 1220 1321 3311 2015 2517 1222 + 1821 1721 2012 3014 2616 2426 1220 2413 1818 + 1430 2219 2013 1614 1922 2424 3113 1120 2624 + 1730 1721 2212 1320 1419 2311 2410 2124 1918 + 1331 1922 2113 2426 2320 1914 2014 3017 2523 + 2821 3113 2023 1915 1820 1829 3212 2122 2928 + 1919 2221 1620 1616 1416 2428 1816 2318 3311 + 2320 1717 2417 2826 2018 2419 2516 1618 2920 + 752626 202122 1519 1420 1924 1320 1820 2325 1625 + 1317 2419 2013 2017 2117 2424 2421 1218 1825 + 1721 3311 2615 1317 2523 2029 1133 2518 1816 + 14 2124 1812 1616 1915 2622 2220 3410 2624 2920 + 1720 5 2223 1218 1715 1717 2424 2626 1515 2120 + 2021 2020 1717 1818 1720 1930 1816 2122 3019 + 1618 1822 1816 2221 1917. + +Beyond these figures, the paper, which seemed of considerable age, was +perfectly blank. + +The lads gazed earnestly at the mass of figures for some time, trying to +fathom its meaning. + +That a hidden meaning of some kind was attached to it was almost +certain, as no sane man would put down a long string of figures to no +purpose, or for mere pastime; and if the writer had not intended the +meaning to be hidden, he would certainly have used words in preference +to a number of mystifying figures. + +"Roger," said Harry, "the more I look at this cipher--for cipher I am +convinced it is--the more certain do I feel that it is the key to +something important or of value. Now, friend, do you notice anything +peculiar about these figures?" + +"I cannot say that I do," answered Roger, "unless you mean that they are +arranged in groups of four." + +"Yes, that is certainly so," agreed Harry; "but there is somewhat else +of significance, and that is, that, although they are grouped in fours +for the most part, there are two groups of six figures, one of two, and +one figure stands alone. These being different from the remainder of +the cipher, we may at once set them down as denoting something different +from the rest of the writing. I should say that possibly some +direction, instruction, or it may even be a compass-bearing, is +concealed in these two groups of six figures, while, to my mind, the +figures 14 and 5, are to be read as they really are, that is as figures +only; for I believe that the remainder of the figures stand for words or +letters, as indeed they must, if any sense is to be made of the thing. +Yes, the more I study this, the more certain am I that we have found +something of value, and this, I am convinced, is the document you told +me Alvarez was looking for while you were in the cabin of the sinking +_Gloria del Mundo_." + +"By Saint George," said Roger, "I am inclined to believe you are right, +Harry; only I see not how it will benefit us if we cannot translate the +cipher, and that seems to me impossible without the key thereto." + +"Nothing is impossible, my friend," retorted Harry. "We have no key, it +is true, but by repeated experiments we shall solve the thing +eventually, I am sure." + +"Let us start trying right now, then," suggested Roger. + +"Well, starting from the beginning, let us take the first group of--" + +"Mr Trevose, hie you on deck, if you please; I want you," came +Cavendish's voice down the companion at this moment, putting an abrupt +end to the operations on the cipher. + +Leaving Harry to put away the document in safety, Roger ran up on deck, +and touched his hat to his captain. + +"Mr Trevose," said Cavendish, "one of the boats has just come off from +the shore with a load of fresh fruit and vegetables which the men have +collected. They have now had a short spell ashore, and it is time for +us to be thinking of work again; so I wish you to take this boat and +proceed to the shore in her with instructions to Mr Leigh to collect +all the men forthwith. Let them bring off as much fruit and vegetables +as they can find, but they must not be very long about it. You can take +your friend Edgwyth with you, if you will, and while the men are getting +fresh provisions together you and he have my leave, after you have +delivered my message, to do as you please until all are ready to come +off aboard. + +"And have a care," added the skipper, "that you two lads do not get into +any further scrapes. You had a particularly narrow escape this morning, +both of you, and perchance may not get off quite so easily next time." + +Roger saluted, and forthwith ran down to inform Harry of his errand; +whereupon the two mounted again to the deck and dropped into the boat, +which was waiting for them alongside, and were soon being pulled over +the water to the shore again. + +Arrived at the beach, Roger enquired of the few men who were there where +Mr Leigh was to be found. None of them seemed to know, but one man +said he believed that Mr Leigh had gone in "that" direction--pointing +it out with a stubby and tarry forefinger--and had taken a musket, with +the intention, he thought, of getting some fresh meat for the pot. + +The lads at once set off in the direction indicated, pushing their way +through tangled underwood, and treading down in their passage many +splendid and brilliant flowers, while startled birds, of rainbow +plumage, flew out from the branches over their heads. + +Everywhere stillness reigned supreme, and no sound or sign of any of the +men was to be met with. They pushed resolutely forward, however, trying +to discover some indication of people having passed that way before. So +dense was the undergrowth in many places that Harry and Roger were +obliged to draw their swords to cut a passage through it. + +Presently Roger caught sight of a beautiful orchid on the trunk of a +tree just below the first branch, and put forth his hand to gather it. +As he did so there was a bright green flash, and the lad started back +only just in time. There was a swish of steel, and a snake fell to the +ground severed in half, yet still writhing horribly. + +"A thousand thanks!" said Roger. "I owe you my life again, Harry. He +would surely have bitten me if you had not been so quick with your +sword." + +They examined the reptile, which was about six feet long, and of a +brilliant green above and light yellow underneath, with the heart-shaped +head that betokened an extremely venomous variety. Tossing the two +writhing halves of the body into the bush with the point of his sword, +and giving a shrug of repugnance, Roger passed on, followed by Harry, +with no further desire to pluck orchids, and each taking care to look +well about him. + +Presently they came to a small clearing, and on the opposite side saw an +opening in the bush which seemed to suggest that someone had recently +passed that way. + +They crossed the clearing and pushed through the opening on the other +side, and, after going about half a mile, heard the report of a gun +close to them, followed by a great fluttering of wings, as a host of +startled birds flew away from the branches where they had been roosting. + +A few moments later they came upon Leigh, accompanied by a seaman +carrying a large bag, which seemed to be well filled, and gave promise +of a few savoury meals in the immediate future. + +Roger at once gave him Mr Cavendish's orders to reassemble the men, and +then asked him how far he had succeeded in his hunting. + +"Oh, very well, Roger!" replied Leigh. "I have nearly filled the bag, +as you may see, and some of the birds are fine big fellows, and should +be excellent eating. At any rate we will sample them at mess this +evening. But I must be off and get the men together. As you two have +liberty until we start for the ship, you may take this musket and +ammunition, if you like, and try to shoot something on your own account. +One's own shooting always tastes best, I am told," he added with a +laugh, as he prepared to return. "But I should not wander too far away, +if I were you," he advised. "We do not know the place as yet, and there +may be dangers that we are not aware of; so be careful." + +The lads thanked Mr Leigh for the loan of the musket, and the +lieutenant disappeared to collect the men, telling the lads that he +would sound the trumpet if they were not in sight when it was time to +return to the ships. + +"Now," said Roger, when Leigh had disappeared, "where are we to go, +Harry?" + +"Do you remember that ledge of rocks that we saw this morning?" asked +Harry! "Well, we noticed quite a number of caves among them; what say +you to going and having a look at them?" + +"Agreed, my friend!" said Roger. "But can we get to them, I wonder, +from here, without going back to the beach and walking all the way +round?" + +"Oh, yes! I think so," answered Harry. "I believe I remember how they +lie, and in what direction; and if we bear away to the left here it will +bring us to them, no doubt." + +So the two turned off, and presently found another opening in the brush, +through which they went. + +"It appears to me," said Roger presently, "as though someone had been +along this way before us. See, some of the small branches are broken, +and the growth beneath our feet seems to have been recently trodden. I +expect we shall find that some of our men have been here before us, +perhaps to look at those same caves themselves. If so, we can warn them +to return immediately; and if they are in front of us it will give us a +little longer, as it will take them some considerable time to get back +to the boats from here." + +Thus reassured in their own minds--for there was always the danger of +savages to consider,--they pressed on, but saw no further signs of the +men whom they imagined to be in front of them. + +"It is possible," said Harry, his thoughts still dwelling upon the +matter, "that if they have gone this way they are still at the caves. +Or they may have gone back along the beach; for that, I suppose, is the +nearest way of return. And if so, we shall not meet any of them coming +this way; but we may overtake them." + +They had gone but a little distance farther when Roger looked up +suddenly. + +"Harry, I heard something whistle past my head a moment ago," said he. + +"Nonsense!" responded Harry. "What you heard was one of those small +creatures they call `humming-birds' flying past your ear." + +"I am certain it was not," retorted Roger. "If it had been, I should +have seen as well as heard him, and--why, there it is again!" + +"Yes, you are right, Roger; I heard it myself that time. I wonder what +it can be?" exclaimed Harry. + +"I don't know," said Roger, "but it sounds very queer. Let us push on, +or we shall have no time to explore those caves." + +They pushed forward for some little distance, and again heard, more than +once, the same peculiar sibilant sound, as of something flying past them +with great velocity; but they saw nothing, and could not account for the +occurrence at all. + +Suddenly Harry, who was behind, whispered to Roger: "Do not appear to +take any notice, Roger, at present; but I distinctly saw the head of a +savage peering at us from behind a tree when I turned my head just now, +and I believe that what we heard was the sound of arrows flying past us. +I should not be greatly surprised to find that there is quite a crowd +of natives round us, and the only wonder to me is that we have not yet +been hit. Now, we must press on and endeavour to reach the shelter of +the caves, and there defend ourselves, if necessary, until assistance +comes. It is useless to think of retreating by the way we have come; we +should only be ambushed. Ah! I see two more faces looking at us over +there in the bush. We had better make haste; but we only need walk a +little faster. It will never do to run, or they will see that we have +discovered them, and in that case they will attack us at once, and we +shall have no chance here. By the way, is that musket loaded?" + +"Yes," replied Roger. "It was loaded when Leigh handed it to me; for I +remember that, after the discharge we heard which led us to him, he was +loading as we came up, and he did not fire again." + +"Very well," said Harry, "we had better for the present trust to our +swords; we must reserve the musket until the last. And you had better +drop a few more bullets in, so that it will do as much execution as +possible when we fire. And I trust to Heaven that the report may bring +some of our men up. But it will not do that if we fire now, as they +will merely think we are shooting game. If we fire from the caves they +will know there is no game there to shoot at, and it may attract their +attention." + +The two lads now moved as fast as they thought consistent with safety, +and, to their great relief, at length perceived an opening in the trees, +and got a glimpse of the sea beyond. A few minutes later they emerged +on the beach, and found themselves quite close to the caves. + +Then, having a clear ground, they took to their heels and ran as hard as +they could for the nearest cave. + +As they started to run, a chorus of savage yells broke on their ears, +and what they had quite anticipated happened. The natives had at last +left cover and were pursuing them at the top of their speed. + +Roger and Harry, unaccustomed to running in sand, moved but slowly, and +the savages gradually began to overhaul them. They were not far from +the caves by this time, however, and presently they gained the entrance +to one of them some fifty yards ahead of their pursuers. + +As soon as they were safely inside, Roger turned, and, raising the +musket to his shoulder, discharged the piece point-blank into the midst +of the nearest group of running savages. + +It was a lucky discharge, and the extra bullets that they had put in, +scattering as they flew, had almost the effect of a round of grape-shot, +dropping no fewer than four of the blacks. It did not check their rush, +however, and there was no time to reload before the howling, yelling mob +were upon them. + +Roger and Harry had at once taken up positions, one on each side of the +entrance to the cave, allowing themselves sufficient room to avoid +striking each other with the blades of their long swords, which, with +the now useless musket, were all the weapons they had. + +The savages came at them with a rush, stabbing furiously with their +spears, and forced on by those behind, who feared to use their bows and +arrows at such close quarters lest they should hit their companions. + +The long sword-blades, however, rose and fell untiringly, flashing in +the sunlight, now parrying a spear-thrust, and anon making a sweeping +cut, and with every blow at least one savage had cause to regret his +temerity. + +The natives, however, had numbers on their side, the sound replacing the +fallen until quite a heap of dead and wounded began to grow at the +entrance to the cave. + +They were likewise growing chary of those long blades of steel that +hewed through shield and spear-haft as though they had been paper. + +At length one of the natives stooped down and picked up the dead body of +a fallen comrade, held it before him as a shield, and rushed toward the +defenders of the cave, and as Harry thrust at him he flung the body full +upon the sword's point, where it remained impaled, dragging Harry's +weapon from his grip. The man then lunged savagely with his spear, but +Roger's wary eye was on him, and the fraction of a second before the +spear left the fellow's grasp the sword flashed and fell, and the savage +stood looking stupidly for a moment at the arm still grasping the spear, +that had fallen at his feet, ere he himself sank, groaning, to the +ground. + +Harry shouted his thanks across to Roger, and drew his sword out of the +impaled body with some difficulty, determined not to be so tricked +again, and once more the battle went furiously on, the savages surging +madly about the cave's mouth, and the two lads straining every nerve to +keep their stronghold inviolate. + +"I wonder," gasped Roger, "how long it will be before Leigh collects all +the men, and, missing us, sends out a search-party?" + +"They should all be mustered long before this," replied his companion. +"You must remember that it took us some time to reach this place, and +Leigh started to look for the men directly we left him. Hark! there +goes the trumpet for our recall, unless I am mistaken. Did you not hear +it?" + +"I think I heard something," answered Roger. "If it was indeed the +trumpet, it means that Leigh has collected all the men and only waits +for us; and he will not wait long before sending in search of us, +because of the captain's orders to return on board as quickly as +possible. If we could but find time to reload the musket and discharge +it again, Leigh might possibly hear the report, and it would show him +where to look for us." + +"That is true," agreed Harry. "Now, Roger, leave me to defend the +cave-mouth alone, and try to load the piece; the discharge may bring +down the men, and if you load, as we did last time, with plenty of +bullets, we shall do the enemy some considerable damage at the same +time." + +It was no time for arguing. Roger therefore did as Harry had suggested, +and, leaving the defence of the cave to his friend, grasped the musket +and loaded it with frantic haste. + +Seeing one of the defenders apparently retreating, the natives at once +redoubled their onslaught, and spears came whizzing through the air, +thick as falling autumn leaves. + +The long blade, however, still flashed untiringly hither and thither, +and the cave remained untaken. + +"Hasten, Roger!" cried Harry. "I cannot much longer keep these fellows +off unaided." + +"Coming, lad," shouted Roger in return. + +A huge native at this moment forced himself to the front and engaged +Harry at close quarters, and, tired as he was, the boy knew his strength +must soon fail. He responded gallantly, however, and drove the man back +for an instant; but, with a cry like that of a furious beast, the fellow +again leapt at him, and, beating down the sword-point, bore the lad to +the ground, at once shortening his spear to pin him to the earth. + +Poor Harry closed his eyes, and for a moment experienced all the +bitterness of death. But it was for a moment only. The weight suddenly +rolled from his chest, and, opening his eyes, he saw Roger pulling his +reeking blade from the savage's body. Then, dropping his sword, Roger +raised the musket to his shoulder and fired into the thick of the group +of natives. + +With the report came a hearty English cheer as Leigh and a couple of +dozen well-armed sailors rushed round a bend in the beach. + +"Lie down! lie down!" roared Leigh, and as the two lads flung themselves +to the floor of the cave, a storm of bullets whizzed over them that at +once accounted for ten of the savages. + +Then out came the hangers, and the sailors charged the remaining +assailants, who turned resolutely to meet them, while Harry and Roger, +rising from the floor of the cave, dashed down on the rear, cutting and +slashing and thrusting with right good will, their strength renewed +somewhat by a sight of their own countrymen. + +Thus taken in front and rear, the blacks, seized with sudden panic, +broke and fled, followed by another storm of shot from the sailors. + +"Now," shouted Leigh, "make for the boats ere they return in +overwhelming numbers!" + +In response to this order the English all went off along the beach at +the double, and soon reached the boats, which were not very far away. + +They embarked forthwith, and were soon once more on board their +respective ships. + +"Well, my boys," said Cavendish as the inseparables climbed the ship's +side, "this morning's adventure was not enough for you, it would appear, +so you must needs go and get yourselves into another mess. Now, mark my +words, you will some day get into a scrape, and one or the other of you +will fail to come out again alive!" + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN. + +THEY CAREEN THE SHIPS, ARE ATTACKED, AND DISCOVER THAT THEY ARE NOT THE +FIRST TO VISIT THE INLET. + +It was by this time fast approaching evening, and too late to start +lightening the ships that day, since in the tropics the transition from +broad daylight to total darkness is extremely sudden, the light dying +away after sunset like the drawing of a curtain. The men, therefore, +immediately upon their arrival on board, were piped down to supper, and +ordered by their several officers to turn in early, as the next day +would be a long and arduous one for them. + +There was no moon, and the figures of the various men on watch could be +but dimly discerned in the starlight, while the stars themselves, +reflected in the dark water, made the placid surface of the bay look as +though studded with gems, presenting a most beautiful spectacle. + +Roger and Harry, although they would have to work as hard as any of the +others next morning, did not feel inclined to sleep, their minds being +still in a state of unrest after their two hairbreadth escapes of the +day. They therefore remained on deck, walking so softly up and down as +to disturb nobody. They had taken but a few turns when their attention +was attracted by the sound of low voices, being those of the men +constituting the anchor watch. Roger and his friend strolled up to +them, and, sitting down on the breech of a gun, prepared to listen to +what was evidently a yarn that the old quarter-master, Cary, was +spinning. + +"Yes," they heard him say, "this arn't by no means the furst taime I was +in thaise seas.--Good-even to ye, Mr Trevose and Mr Edgwyth!--No; I +tall 'ee I was 'ere in the zummer of 1582, just after the taime that +that there bloody pirate, Jose Leirya, was sailing of these vury seas. +'E was a fiend in 'uman shape, if there ever was one; nobody was zafe in +anny of the ships 'e tuk. All the men--passengers or zeamen--that 'e +captured 'e did bind and put under 'atches in their own ship, aifter 'e +'ad taken all out 'e wanted. Then 'e zet 'em adrift; but afore 'e zet +'em adrift 'e used to fire the ship in zeveral places, and all they poor +creatures did roast. The childer 'e took aboard his own ship, keepin' +zum on 'em, and the others 'e zold to the plantations. 'E was a reg'ler +devil, 'e was; and they do zay as 'ow 'e be about 'ere even now, +although 'e baint been 'eard of for zum taime. And more; they zay that +zumwheres near this vury plaace 'o 'as buried tons of goold and silver, +precious stones, and all kinds of vallybles; but 'ow far that be true I +doen't knaw. But I do knaw as 'ow I would laike to fall in with 'e with +these 'ere ships; we'd taich 'un a vaine lesson, wouldn't us, laads?" + +"Harry, come here a moment," said Roger, jumping down from the gun at +this point in the old man's narrative, and walking aft. Harry joined +him. + +"What do you want, old fellow?" said he. + +"Well, lad," remarked his friend, "it has just come to me, somehow, as +old Cary mentioned about the treasure of that scoundrel, Jose Leirya, +being buried somewhere about here, that possibly that cipher of ours +which we brought from the _Gloria del Mundo_ may refer to that very +treasure. You see, Cary says that Leirya hasn't been heard of for some +time. That seems to point either to his death or the disbandment of his +crew. + +"Now, Cary says he was here in 1582, in the summer, and mentions that +that date was just after the time when Leirya was committing such +atrocities on the high seas. There is what is presumably a date at the +beginning of our document, and that date--if such it is--is 1581, the +year before Cary came to these parts. People do not write in cipher +save to conceal important information from the eyes of those not in the +secret, do they? Very well. + +"Now, what would any man wish to conceal by cipher save hidden treasure? +There are other things, certainly, he might wish to write about in such +a way that the ordinary run of people should not understand the writing, +but, to my mind, treasure is the most likely, and the dates coincide +very well. Our date is 1581, and Cary says that when he was here in +1582 it was just after the pirate's depredations; and he has not, +apparently, been heard of since. This, I say, points to his death or to +the disbandment of his crew; and what more likely than that, before +either of these occurrences, he should bury his accumulated booty and +locate its position by cipher? I believe most strongly, Harry, that we +have in our possession the key to the hiding-place of all the treasure +of Jose Leirya--and he must have accumulated millions of dollars' worth +in his time--if we can but come upon the translation of it. What do you +think of it, Harry?" + +"Well, Roger, lad," said Harry, "as you put it, certainly it does seem +as though you might be right, and that there may be something in it. We +must make another attempt to find the key to the cipher, and when that +is found I certainly think we shall obtain something valuable for our +trouble, even though it should not be this great treasure of Jose +Leirya. But we had better go below now and try to get some sleep, for +we shall have a hard day before us to-morrow." + +They were roused early next morning by the boatswain's whistle, and, +having dressed, came up on deck to find that the boats were just being +got over the side again to take away the kedge anchors, by which to haul +the ships closer inshore for careening purposes. + +It was decided by Cavendish that, as the beach was very spacious, and +there were four ships to be careened, they should careen two at a time, +instead of one only, as usual. The vessels that most needed overhauling +and repairing were the commander's own ship and the captured Spanish +vessel, _El Capitan_, which had been rechristened the _Tiger_. So it +was determined to careen the _Tiger_ and the _Stag Royal_ first of all, +leaving the other two vessels, the _Good Adventure_ and the _Elizabeth_, +afloat for purposes of defence, should an enemy appear in sight while +the operations were being carried on. + +The _Tiger_ and the _Stag Royal_ were therefore swung broadside-on to +the beach. The anchors were then taken ashore in the boats and carried +up the beach to above high-water mark, where they were buried in deep +holes dug in the sand, with timbers laid lengthwise upon them to prevent +them from being dragged out again when the strain was put on the cables. + +The holes were then filled up and the sand heaped high above them, to +get as much weight as possible upon the anchors, and to allow more +purchase. + +Then from the cables attached to the anchors themselves, at a distance +of about twelve feet before they disappeared into the sand, a spring of +stout manila rope was led, and fastened securely to a palm-tree at the +edge of the brushwood in a direct line with the ship and the anchor, +thus affording a doubly secure purchase when the time came to heave on +the cable and haul the vessels up on the beach. + +Roger and Harry had been sent ashore by Cavendish to take part in this +work, as he wished them to get an insight into every part of the duties +of a sailor, and thus make themselves two useful members of the crew, +for the captain could not afford to carry any man who was not thoroughly +proficient, the capacity of his ships being too small to afford +accommodation to mere idlers. + +The lads were, however, very quick to learn, and very anxious to master +all the details of their profession, and therefore never complained, +whatever the duty that was assigned to them. They thus increased their +knowledge and efficiency very quickly, and Cavendish had no grounds for +regret that he had taken them on board his ship. + +The anchor belonging to the flag-ship had been taken ashore and securely +buried, and the cable, with the rope attached, bent on to the anchor, +and the _Stag Royal_ was ready for careening. The seamen then tramped +off along the beach to where the anchor for the _Tiger_ had been brought +ashore and laid on the sand, and proceeded with their preparations for +careening that craft also. + +They had begun to dig the hole in the sand in which to deposit the +anchor, when Roger's attention was attracted by a sound of rustling in +the wood behind them. He looked round, and perceived that for a +considerable distance along the beach the foliage appeared to be moving +to and fro, as though stirred by a slight breeze. Yet, so far as he +could tell, down there on the beach, there was no wind at all stirring, +nor had there been a breath of air all the morning; the atmosphere, in +fact, was so still, and withal so heavy, that a thunder-storm was +anticipated. + +Another circumstance that he noted was that this peculiar movement in +the bush extended only from just beyond where the seamen were now +occupied to a point a trifle beyond where they had been at work a few +minutes before, fixing the anchor of the flagship. Everywhere else the +foliage was absolutely without movement of any kind, as it had been +during the whole of the morning. + +Much perplexed how to account for this singular phenomenon, he stood +gazing at the moving foliage, and wondering what it could portend. + +The movement seemed to be confined to the one place only, but as he +gazed the motion suddenly ceased, and all was quiet as before. + +He looked round to see if any of the other men had observed anything, +but they were all much too intent on the work in hand to take notice of +anything else; and his friend Harry was just as busy as the rest of the +men. He therefore dismissed the matter from his mind, thinking that his +eyes might perhaps have deceived him, and set to work again with the +other men. + +The hole was soon dug and the anchor deposited therein, planks and +baulks of timber being laid upon it as before. The sand was filled in +and a mound raised above the work, and it only remained to further +secure the anchor by putting a spring on to the cable, and fastening to +a palm-tree as before. + +As this last part of the work was being done, and the spring being +lashed round the palm-tree, one of the seamen, named Martin, grasped +Roger by the arm. + +"Do you see that, Master Trevose?" said he, pointing. + +"What do you mean, Martin?" answered Roger. + +"Why, over there, sir," said the man, pointing in the same direction as +that in which Roger had seen the peculiar movement of the foliage some +little time before. "I be sure I saw something shining among the trees +just now. What d'ye think it can be? I only just caught a sight of it +for a moment; but I be sure I beaint mistaken." + +Roger looked in the direction indicated by the seaman, but could +distinguish nothing. + +"Are you sure, Martin?" asked he. "Because I fancied that I, too, saw a +peculiar movement among the trees over in that direction a little time +ago." + +"Yes, I be sartin sure, master," replied Martin. "I only see'd it for a +minute, 'tis true, but there warn't no mistake about it; and it seemed +to me to be very like the glitter of steel." + +Roger was much puzzled, and also somewhat perturbed; he therefore +determined to inform the captain of what he and Martin had observed, +immediately upon his return to the ship, but to say nothing to the men +until the work on shore was finished, for fear of distracting their +attention from the task in hand. + +This was soon completed, and Roger, calling the men together, got them +into the boats and they pulled back to the ships, leaving the party of +men from the _Tiger_ upon their own vessel, and taking his own crew on +board the flag-ship. + +He then sought out the captain, and found him seated in his cabin +working out some observations. The lad duly reported that the work he +had been sent to execute was completed satisfactorily. + +"Very good, Roger; very good indeed!" replied the captain. "I will come +on deck presently and see how the tide serves; and if it is suitable we +will haul in at once. For I am anxious to get these repairs effected as +soon as possible, and the sooner we start the sooner we shall be +finished. By the way, Roger," he continued, "as you know, we are +somewhere on the eastern coast of the Spanish island of Cuba; and while +you were ashore with the men just now I have been busy working out our +exact position on the chart." + +Cavendish here pointed to a chart which he had open on a table before +him, together with a pair of compasses and a ruler. + +"Here we are, you see," resumed the captain, pointing to a spot on the +chart. "Here is the island of Cuba, and here"--pointing to a little +indentation in the coast-line--"are we in latitude 20 north, and +longitude 75 west. + +"Now you had better remember that bearing, my boy, in case you should +ever wish to return here when you get command of a ship of your own. We +sailors would call this bearing `20 north, 75 west', leaving out the +word degrees. You, Roger, if you will take my advice, my lad, and your +friend Harry as well for that matter, will start in as soon as you can +and thoroughly perfect yourselves in the science of navigation, for you +never can tell, lad, when you may want it; and if you intend--as I +suppose you do--to follow the sea as a business you will not be able to +do anything without it. + +"I will tell you all that you want to know about it if you will come to +me from time to time when I am not busy; and I have here a book which +you may study at your leisure. You will find it very interesting." + +Roger thanked the commander both for himself and on Harry's account, and +promised to take up the study as soon as they were again at sea, as he +and his friend would be much too busy for anything of that kind while +the vessels were in harbour undergoing repairs and overhaul. He was +then on the point of informing the captain of what Martin and he had +seen, when Cavendish interrupted him. + +"Roger," said he, "I have been much exercised in my mind lately as to +what shall be done with these Spanish prisoners we have on board. There +are nearly three hundred of them, and although many of them are in +irons, and all are imprisoned below, I do not altogether like the idea +of carrying them about with me too long, for they are a dangerous cargo; +and not only that, they are also a great drain upon our stock of +provisions. When we leave this island we shall probably be at sea for a +very long time, as I intend to cruise in the Caribbean Sea, out of sight +of land for the most part, on the lookout for the plate and bullion +galleons from Mexico; and when we finally sail from here I wish to take +on board as much fresh meat, fruit, and vegetables as I can, to help eke +out the ships' stores. Now I do not want to carry about with me nearly +three hundred men who will be of no use to me, and who will only help us +to eat up our provisions faster than I wish. Moreover, these men are a +constant menace to us while they are on board. + +"Now I have been working out our position with a view to seeing exactly +where we are, and discovering how far we are at present from the nearest +Spanish settlement on the island. For it has been in my mind for some +days past that we could not do better than land those fellows here, when +we are ready to sail, giving them a few of their own weapons wherewith +to procure food by the way, and defend themselves against any savages +they may meet, and tell them where their nearest settlement lies, +directing them to make their way to it. It is true that I do not much +like the idea of letting loose nearly three hundred Spaniards who are +the enemies of our beloved queen--God bless her--and who will perhaps +compass the death of many an Englishman before they come to their own, +but what else can I do, Roger? Have you any suggestion to offer?" + +"No, sir," replied the boy; "I think, with you, that the only thing to +do is to release them and let them make their way to some settlement of +theirs on the island." + +"Well then, that settles it," said Cavendish. "While you were ashore I +conferred with others of my officers, and all offer the same advice; so, +when we are ready for sea once more, ashore they shall go. And now it +is quite time that I went on deck and saw about getting the vessels +hauled ashore; that is if the tide yet serves, which it should do by +this time. Let us go." + +The captain rose, and was about to leave the cabin, when Roger said he +had something to tell him. + +"What is it then, lad? tell me quickly, as I want to get on deck," said +the captain. + +Roger then recounted what Martin and he had observed, adding that these +occurrences seemed to him to signify the presence of a body of men +hiding in the brushwood. + +"It is possible, Roger," agreed Cavendish, "seeing that you and Harry +were attacked but yesterday. But I thought that we gave the savages so +sharp a lesson then that they would not wish to renew our acquaintance. +Are you sure that it was not wind moving the trees, and that it was not +the sun shining on the palm-leaves that made Martin think of the glitter +of steel?" + +"I am sure there was no wind, sir," replied Roger, "for I looked very +closely; and it was no leaf that produced the glitter that Martin saw; +he knows the glint of steel too well to be mistaken." + +"Well, many thanks for the information at any rate!" said the skipper. +"I will order a doubly sharp lookout to be kept. We must avoid a +surprise at all hazards, for we might lose a great number of men +thereby." + +He then turned and went on deck, followed closely by Roger. + +When they arrived on deck, Cavendish considered, upon inspection, that +the tide would serve, as it was now rising rapidly; he therefore +immediately gave orders that the winches and capstans should be manned, +and the ships hove in towards the beach until their keels touched +bottom. + +This was done, and soon the two vessels had been hauled in until they +grounded gently. + +Then the boats were again got over the side, together with a number of +rafts which had been constructed for the purpose, and the guns were +lifted out by derricks and deposited in the boats and on the rafts, and +so carried ashore. + +This unloading occupied a considerable amount of time, and when at +length Cavendish considered the two vessels sufficiently lightened, the +tide was almost at high-water mark. + +The boats and rafts were then taken back to the ships, the men climbed +on board, the windlasses and capstans were again manned, and, the +vessels being considerably lightened, and so once more well afloat, were +again hauled in until their keels touched bottom. + +The captain considered that they were now far enough up the beach, as +the receding tide would leave them high and dry. + +Tackles were next fastened to the masts above the topsail-yards, and +fastened to convenient trees, and all was in readiness to heave the +vessels down as the tide left them. + +Roger and Harry had been busy with the rest of the crew, and, as they +worked, Roger had found time to inform his friend of the peculiar +occurrence which he and Martin had witnessed, and he asked Harry his +opinion of it. + +"Well," said Harry, "it would seem to me to denote the presence of +savages near us. That there are hostile natives in this part of the +island we know from past experience. Have you informed the skipper?" + +"Yes," replied Roger, "I told him what I had seen; but it seemed to me +rather as if he put the circumstance down to my imagination and +Martin's. Nevertheless he thanked me for the information, and promised +to be on the lookout." + +"Well," said Harry, "it strikes me as rather a foolish thing to leave +the ships' guns scattered about the beach as they are at present. If we +should be attacked we could never use them, pointing as they are in all +directions; we could not fire without danger of hitting one another. It +would be a good thing, I think, if the captain, instead of leaving the +weapons strewed about the beach as at present, were to arrange them in a +circle round the place where we are working on the two vessels, and get +them loaded in readiness, and we should then be prepared to repel an +attack if it came." + +"A very good idea, Harry," exclaimed Roger; "you always seem to be +prepared with good schemes. Go and tell the captain, and see what he +says." + +Harry at once ran off and told Cavendish what Roger and he thought of +the matter. + +"You two lads," said Cavendish, "seem ever to be thinking of attacks by +natives. Yet your scheme, young man, is a good one, and I will have it +carried out at once; it is well to be on the safe side." + +He accordingly gave the necessary orders, and the men turned to with a +will, with the result that the guns were soon arranged as Harry had +suggested, with the muzzles so pointing as to command not only the +adjacent bush but also the whole range of the beach. The weapons were +then loaded, and the party were reasonably secure from an attack in that +direction. + +By this time the tide was ebbing fast, and the men took a pull on the +ropes secured to the ships' masts, with the result that the vessels soon +began to heel over perceptibly on their sides. As the tide continued to +drop, the ropes were hauled upon, and soon the vessels were down on +their beam-ends. Then the men, like a swarm of ants, grew busy on their +exposed sides, working with hammer and chisel, paint-pot and brush, and +the scene became one of great activity. + +The tide had by this time retreated so far that the hulls of the vessels +were clear of the water, and the men could work right down to their +keels, the ships being hard and fast aground, so that they could not +possibly be moved until the next tide. + +As they could not leave the captured Spaniards in the careened ships, +and dared not let them loose to help with the work, they had been +transferred to the two craft still afloat, the _Elizabeth_ and the _Good +Adventure_. + +Roger and Harry were slung over the bow of the _Tiger_, both of them +busy with scrapers taking off the old paint before the new was put on. +It thus happened that they were higher above the level of the beach than +any of the others, the part of the hull upon which they were working +being just below the starboard cat-head. + +Roger was scraping away merrily, when Harry plucked his sleeve. + +"Is that the movement you were speaking of, Roger?" said he, pointing to +the brush. + +"Yes, there it is again," said Roger excitedly; "only it is somewhat +nearer this time; and see, I am certain that was the flash of the sun +upon some steel weapon." + +"Yes, I see; there it is again. I see it clearly now," answered Harry. + +Just then a hail came from below in the captain's voice. + +"Roger, my man, the cable secured to the maintopmast seems to be working +loose, and may carry away. Get up aloft, boy, and look at the seizing, +and, if necessary, put a fresh one on." + +Roger hastened away up into the main-top, leaving Harry still in his +perch, and examined the seizing. It was, as the captain had said, +loose, so the boy proceeded to secure it afresh. + +Having finished his job to his satisfaction, he prepared to descend from +aloft, but, before doing so, cast his eyes round the scene, and nearly +fell out of the main-top in his alarm; for there, coming round a point +half a mile away, and concealed as yet from those on the beach by a low +point, was a large fleet of canoes filled with natives, who were +doubtless hoping to come upon the beached vessels unawares. They would +certainly have done so had it not been for the fortunate circumstance of +Roger being sent aloft. + +He threw another glance to seaward, to see if he could count the canoes, +and found that there must be quite a hundred of them; then he took a +survey of the brushwood inland, and found that his suspicions as to +savages being present there were only too true. At his greater +elevation he found himself looking down upon quite a horde of them armed +with spears, bows and arrows, and clubs. They were advancing slowly +through the bush, and their stealthy movement forward had occasioned the +swaying to and fro of the foliage that Roger first, and Harry +afterwards, had observed. + +Roger could not tell whether or not the natives had seen him, and were +aware that they were discovered, but hurried down from the main-top with +such speed that, when he had reached the last ratline of the rigging, he +lost his footing and fell on his back on the sand at the very feet of +Cavendish. + +Fortunately for him the sand was soft, and he was not much hurt, though +a good deal shaken. Pulling himself together, he got on his feet and at +once told Cavendish what he had seen. + +There was no time to lose; a boat was promptly sent away with messengers +to the two vessels afloat, the _Good Adventure_ and the _Elizabeth_, to +warn them to be in readiness; and the trumpet sounded for the men to +cease work and muster. Arms were hurriedly served out; men were +stationed at the guns, which the captain was now very glad he had loaded +and arranged according to Harry's advice; and very soon they were as +ready for the attack as was possible in the short time at their +disposal. + +Meanwhile the two vessels afloat had lifted their anchors, and were +standing closer in, the better to defend their now helpless consorts. + +It was evident that the natives in the bush were waiting for their +friends in the canoes to approach closer before they attacked, and this +hesitation saved the English the loss of a number of men; for had the +savages attacked while the men were at work on the ships, the latter +would have been taken at a serious disadvantage, and the loss would have +been very heavy. + +As the first canoe made its appearance round the point, a perfect +pandemonium of savage and ear-splitting yells arose from the bush, and a +loud noise of crashing and crackling announced that the enemy there were +coming along at their utmost speed. The outcry was answered from +seaward as the canoes came pouring into the inlet. + +"Now, stand steady, lads!" shouted the captain. "As they come in upon +us give them a round from the guns, and load again if you have time; +then a volley from the muskets; and after that we must trust to our good +swords. But keep cool, and do not throw away a shot." + +As he finished speaking the enemy burst from the bush like a swarm of +angry bees, and charged at full speed at the little band of white men +opposed to them; whereupon a perfect storm of grape-shot, old nails, +rusty bolts, pieces of scrap-iron, and even stones, with which the +cannon had been hastily loaded, went hissing through their close ranks; +and, from the piercing screams and yells of agony that at once arose +from them, the execution must have been terrible. Yet they poured out, +checked only for a moment. + +"Fire again!" roared the captain; and the muskets crashed out in a +rattling volley, the bullets mowing the natives down in swathes. + +This second discharge checked them and caused them to waver; but a tall +man, gaily bedecked with feathers, instantly sprang from the ranks, and, +haranguing them, called to his comrades to follow him, he himself +leading the charge. + +They soon reached the guns, and, leaping over them before they could +again be loaded, were at once among the English, who had now to fight +for dear life. + +Howling with fury, they stabbed and slashed and struck with spear and +club; and from the other side of the little circle came a shower of +well-placed arrows, and many a brave seaman fell writhing his life out +on the sand, which by this time was assuming a sinister crimson hue. + +Roger and Harry, each armed with an excellent sword borrowed from the +ship's armoury, were here, there, and everywhere, but always together, +doing much execution, and repeatedly saving each other's lives. + +Cavendish, in the front of his men, swept his long blade from side to +side, and as it fell, flashing meteor-like in the brilliant sunshine, +the naked warriors sank before it in heaps. + +Now from seaward came the crashing discharges of heavy guns, followed by +renewed shrieks and cries, as the _Elizabeth_ and the _Good Adventure_ +poured their broadsides into the closely-packed canoes. + +"God grant," muttered Cavendish, "that those other vessels of ours may +keep the canoes off; for if these fellows are reinforced, we can never +hold out against them." + +But nobody had time to see how the other action was progressing, for all +were too busy with the work in hand, which was the task of defending +their own lives. + +Twice had the gallant little band of Englishmen driven the savages back +over the barricade formed by the ships' guns, and twice had the enemy, +led by the tall savage, forced their way in again. + +At last, seeing clearly that all hinged upon this man's downfall, +Cavendish made many strenuous efforts to reach him; but for some time he +failed, owing to the press. At length, however, an opening occurred, +and Cavendish, rushing forward, stood face to face with his arch-enemy. + +The chief was a man of mighty stature, and evidently of enormous +strength, standing nearly seven feet high; and at first sight the +disparity between the two adversaries seemed enormous. But what the +English captain lacked in height he made up in strength and agility. + +Sword in hand he circled round and round his gigantic foe, watching like +a cat for an opportunity to strike a deadly blow. + +But the savage took the initiative, and, raising his spear, darted it at +the Englishman with all his force. Cavendish, however, was not to be +caught so easily, and, taking the shaft of the spear with the edge of +his sword, he parried the thrust, and the weapon merely ripped his shirt +instead of piercing his body. + +Before the native could recover himself, and guard his body, the English +captain thrust with all his strength, quite unprepared for the wily +savage's next move. + +Seemingly careless of the wound that he inflicted upon himself, the +savage caught the keen blade of his adversary in his left hand, and, +although the weapon lacerated his hand in a fearful manner, he succeeded +in wresting it from the captain's grasp, while, at the same time +flinging away his spear, he seized Cavendish round the lower part of the +body, lifted him clear of the ground, and dashed him to the earth, +himself falling with his antagonist. + +The pair rolled upon the ground, each striving to obtain a grip of the +other's right arm, to prevent any other weapon being used. Now the +savage and now the white man was uppermost, but at length, with a huge +effort, Cavendish twisted himself from under his foe, and lay +full-length on top of him, feeling for his dagger. The chief, however, +had likewise seized a knife which hung at his girdle, and, before the +captain could draw his weapon, he plunged his knife into Cavendish's +side. + +The Englishman's grasp relaxed, he slipped from his position, and lay +upon his side, writhing on the sand. The native now rose to his knees +and raised his arm to deal a fatal blow; but, even as that blow fell, a +sword flashed through the air, and arm and knife fell to the ground +together. + +Roger, for it was he who had thus appeared in the nick of time, at once +turned his sword and drove it through the heart of the chief, who rolled +over lifeless at his feet. The young hero then raised his captain in +his arms, and, staggering out of the press of the battle, laid him down +out of sight behind a gun-carriage. + +Meanwhile the vessels afloat in the bay had been giving a very good +account of the enemy in the canoes. The natives, it was clear, had been +watching, and, having seen the preparations for careening the ships, had +hoped to find all four hauled up; in which case they would have secured +an easy victory from force of numbers alone, as the ships would then +have been unable to use their guns against the force in the canoes. But +as it was they had to deal with two fully-prepared ships, and, after +several fruitless attempts to board, were now hauling off with the +remnant of their fleet, most of the canoes having already been destroyed +by the broadsides from the _Elizabeth_ and the _Good Adventure_. + +The land force, seeing their companions in the canoes withdrawing, and +also having lost their chieftain, now began to waver. Observing this, +the English hastily formed up into line, and, with a loud cheer, charged +the enemy afresh, hewing right and left with hearty goodwill. + +This fierce rally proved altogether too much for the savages, and they +broke and fled precipitately. + +The English now rushed to their guns, and, hastily completing the +loading which had been checked at the first onslaught of the enemy, gave +the flying savages another dose of grape and canister that strewed the +beach with dead and dying, and further hastened the flight of the +survivors, who quickly vanished in the recesses of the thick bush. + +The enemy thus disposed off, finally as they hoped, Roger and Harry went +off to attend to the captain. + +They found him sitting up. He averred that his hurt was only a flesh +wound; and after asking for, and obtaining, a draught of water, the +gallant fellow got on his feet and went off to survey the scene of +carnage. + +Over a hundred of the natives lay dead on the sands; and a number of +wounded were seen crawling towards the brush, endeavouring to escape. +They were allowed to go, as the English could not be burdened with +wounded savages, and were indisposed to slay them in cold blood. There +were twenty-three of the Englishmen who would never again answer the +roll-call; and over forty wounded, who were conveyed on board the _Good +Adventure_ and the _Elizabeth_, afloat in the bay. The dead, both black +and white, were, for health's sake, immediately buried in the sand where +they lay. + +Cavendish, after having had his wound bound up, ordered a stockade to be +at once built, and loopholed for guns and muskets, for their future +defence, in the improbable event of the savages not having already +received a severe enough lesson. + +The seamen were now divided into two parties. One half of them were to +continue the work of repairs and overhauling on the two vessels then +careened, the _Stag Royal_ and the _Tiger_, and the remaining half were +to work upon the stockade. + +Then, this matter arranged, Cavendish called Roger to him, and, first +thanking him for his timely rescue and the saving of his life, he put +the lad in command of the party who were to build the stockade. + +Roger was also publicly thanked, in the presence of officers and men, +for the warning he had given, which enabled the party to make their +hasty preparations for the reception of the natives, without which the +whole party on shore would most likely have been cut off to a man. And +if the ships in the bay had not likewise been warned, it was quite +within the bounds of possibility that they would have been boarded +before the guns could have been loaded and brought to bear on the +canoes; in which case there could be little doubt that the savages would +have captured the vessels through sheer weight of numbers, for there +were several hundred men in the canoes. + +It ought to be mentioned that when Cavendish gave Roger the command of +the company to be employed in building the stockade, he also endowed him +with full power to use his own discretion as to how the work should be +carried out, only occasionally giving the lad a few hints. Invested +thus with such great responsibility, and with such important duties to +execute, Roger naturally needed a lieutenant, and he selected Harry for +the post, dividing his men into two parties, one of which he placed +under the command of his friend. + +This arranged, he sent Harry away into the woods with his men, armed +with axes and bush knives, to cut timber for the stockade, while he +himself, with his own party, remained on the beach, digging holes in +which to deposit the uprights when they were cut, and also digging a +ditch round where the palisade was to be, in order to drain off any +water that might accumulate, and thus prevent the interior of their +small fort from being flooded. + +Harry and his gang soon returned with a load of stout stakes, plenty of +suitable trees for the purpose being found close at hand. Depositing +these on the beach, he then returned into the woods for more material, +Roger and his men meanwhile proceeding to plant the main posts in a ring +round the guns. + +It was not long ere they had driven a row of posts deep and firm into +the sand, starting from the margin of the beach nearest the water's +edge. + +This brought them, in the direction in which they were going, fairly +close up to where the woods ceased at their junction with the beach. + +Roger was watching the men drive in the next post with heavy wooden +mallets, procured from the ship, when he observed that, although they +were hammering hard at the stump, it did not seem to be going down as +quickly as it should; indeed, upon closer inspection, it did not appear +to be moving downwards at all. And, further, the mallets, instead of +giving out a dull sound, as they had done whilst driving through sand, +now gave out a sharper and quite different sound as the top of the post +was struck. + +One of the men engaged stepped up to Roger and touched his hat. "It +seems to me, sir," said he, "as though something was stopping of this +here post from going down any furder. I expects as how there is a stone +or summat in the sand under the point. Do you think that ere stump is +down fur enough as it is, or shall us pull un up and put un in +somewheres else?" + +Roger stepped up and shook the post, and, finding it quite loose, +decided that it would have to be driven deeper in order to be secure. +Nevertheless it was necessary to space the posts at equal intervals one +from another, if his ideas were to be carried out; he therefore ordered +the stump to be pulled up, the obstruction removed, and the post driven +down again in the same position. + +The seamen thereupon laid hold of the post, and, all hauling together, +it soon came out; and with shovels and crowbars they began to break down +the sand and enlarge the hole, so as to get at whatever was in the way +and remove it. + +It was not long ere the shovel of one of the men struck upon something +hard, and the man, dropping upon his knees, went to work to scrape the +sand away with his hands, presently laying bare to view what was +apparently part of a spar of some kind, not old or worm-eaten, but +seemingly almost new. Having located this, they started to clear the +sand away from the whole length of the piece of timber, and, while doing +so, found that there were two other poles or spars laid alongside it. +After an hour's hard work the three spars were unearthed, and proved to +be the three poles of a set of sheer-legs, which had evidently only +quite recently been hidden. + +Roger then instructed the men to start probing in the sand, to see +whether there might be anything else buried, and he himself took a boat +and pulled away over the bay to the _Elizabeth_ to inform Cavendish of +his discovery. + +He found the captain lying in his bunk nursing his recent wound, and +informed him of the circumstance, asking also what he should do in the +matter. + +"You have dug out of the sand what you think is a set of sheer-legs, eh, +boy?" said the captain, raising himself in his berth on one elbow. "And +have you found anything beside?" + +"No, sir," said Roger in reply, "there was nothing else dug up when I +left; but I told the men to probe the sand, whilst I came off to you, to +see if there was anything else there." + +"Well," responded the captain, "I must look into this. I will get up +and come ashore with you; but just go and call the surgeon first; I wish +him to bind this wound of mine up again before I leave the ship." + +Roger did so; and, the surgeon having dressed and bound up Cavendish's +hurt again, the two descended the ship's side and, getting into the +boat, were rowed ashore. + +When they reached the beach they saw that the men had already lifted out +the three sheer-leg poles and laid them on the sand, and now a gang of +men were hauling upon a rope attached to something still in the sand. + +When Cavendish and Roger came up to the spot they saw that the top of an +iron chest had been uncovered, and the men had fastened a rope to a ring +in the lid, and were now hauling on the rope to drag the chest clear. + +Cavendish watched the seamen a moment, and then went to examine the +poles. After a few minutes' observation, he said to Roger: "It is +pretty evident to me, boy, that this inlet has been used before for some +such purpose as that for which we are using it, namely, for careening +vessels for repairs and refit. These poles have been employed for +lifting guns or other heavy material taken out of a ship or from off a +raft. Now I wonder who it may be that has used these things? The +Spaniards would not need to use this inlet for any such purpose, for +they have their own ports on the island, where this kind of work could +be done far better than here. Nor can they have been Englishmen, I +should think, for if this place were known to any of our own people it +would be marked on the chart, and we should have heard of it, most +certainly. Also, the fact that these things have been buried points to +the certainty that the people who have hidden them intend to return and +use them again. If they had not meant to come back, they would have +taken them with them when they left. No, it is evident to me that the +people who left these articles will return periodically to this place to +refit; and as this spot is almost unknown, as well as being lonely and +secluded, it would seem to my poor understanding that the men who use +this place are not Spaniards or English seamen proper, but pirates. It +also occurs to me that there may be something in this box that they are +just getting out which will tell us what we want to know." + +As the captain finished speaking, the box came up suddenly, and the +seamen, who were hauling manfully on the rope, fell upon their backs, +only to scramble quickly to their feet again with much laughter at the +mishap. + +"Now, men," said Cavendish, who had a habit of taking his crew into his +confidence, "before we go any further, let me tell you that I believe +this inlet to be a pirate's resort, which they visit periodically for +the purpose of effecting repairs. If so, we must capture them if we +can. We must, therefore, be careful to leave no traces of our own visit +here or they may become alarmed and desert the place. Therefore all +this gear must be replaced exactly as we found it, before we sail, and +this box must not be broken open, but the lock must be picked instead. +And if we replace everything exactly as we found it, the pirates--if +such they be--will not suspect that anyone else has been here; they will +still continue to use the inlet, and some day they will walk right into +the little trap that I intend to set for them. Now, lads, up with that +chest, and be careful with it. Pass the word for the carpenter and +armourer to come here and bring their tools." + +These two men were soon on the spot, and between them they had the chest +open in a few minutes. An eager examination of its contents showed that +there was nothing of any intrinsic value contained therein; but there +were documents and papers written in Spanish which abundantly verified +the captain's conjecture. For from these Cavendish, who could read and +understand Spanish perfectly, learned that the bay where they were now +lying was indeed the resort of a pirate crew; while the name of the +chief miscreant, as ascertained from the papers, was Jose Leirya. The +documents gave, among other particulars, a detailed account of the +scoundrel's doings ever since he had started his nefarious trade on the +Spanish Main; and the mere recital of his atrocities proved enough to +make every man of them there present swear a great oath to hunt the +villain down wherever he might be, and hang him, with all his rascally +crew, from the yard-arms of his own ship. + +Nothing else of any importance having been found, the chest was +carefully locked up again, after the papers had been put back, +everything replaced in its former position and buried in the sand once +more, the utmost care being taken to destroy all evidence of the things +having been disturbed. + +After this little episode the work on the ships went steadily forward. +The _Tiger_ and the _Stag Royal_ were soon finished, and the _Elizabeth_ +and the _Good Adventure_ took their places. + +These last-named vessels received the same attention as their consorts, +and were in a fortnight pronounced quite sound and once more ready for +sea. They were hauled off the beach, and Cavendish had the great +satisfaction of seeing his little squadron of four ships once more all +ataunto and ready to sail. + +The next morning Cavendish called a meeting of his officers in his +cabin, and their long and earnest consultation resulted in the decision +that they should cruise, as originally intended, up the Mexican coast +and in the Caribbean, with an addendum to the effect that special +efforts should be made to capture the pirate Jose Leirya, whose +atrocious deeds, as recorded by his own hand, had made every man in the +fleet his enemy, determined to hunt him ruthlessly to his death. + +This having been arranged, preparations were forthwith made for leaving. +The Spaniards were brought on deck in squads, and armed with weapons +sufficient to enable them to obtain food, or successfully defend +themselves against the attacks of savages. They were then sent ashore +in boat-loads, the ships all having their broadsides trained on the +beach where they landed, to prevent treachery on their part. + +In the last boat-load went Alvarez and de Soto, both of whom Roger had +seen on the _Gloria del Mundo_ at the time of the engagement with the +Spanish fleet. + +De Soto gracefully thanked his captors for their courtesy and kindness +as he went over the side, but Alvarez scowled heavily round him, and +looked attentively at every face near him before he went, as though he +meant to fix their features on his memory, that he might recognise them +again in the event of a future meeting. Then, with a glare of hatred at +the retreating form of de Soto, he turned his back without a word and +went also. + +This completed the landing of the prisoners, and very glad the +Englishmen were to be rid of the responsibility and risk. + +"That fellow Alvarez will know us again when next we meet," said +Cavendish with a laugh, to Roger, who was standing by his side watching +the Spaniards on the beach. + +"Yes," replied Roger, "and he means mischief, I am sure. I should be +very sorry for any one of us who might be unfortunate enough to get into +his power." + +"He seems to hate de Soto also pretty thoroughly," said Harry. "Did you +see the look he gave him as he went over the side?" + +"Ay," answered Roger, who went on to tell of Alvarez's little soliloquy +relative to de Soto while searching for the papers in the cabin of the +sinking _Gloria del Mundo_. "He will do de Soto a bad turn, of that I +am sure, if he ever gets the opportunity," remarked Roger in conclusion. + +All was now ready for their departure. The Spaniards had formed up on +the beach and marched off in order into the bush, and were by this time +nowhere to be seen. + +Sail was hoisted and, the flag-ship leading, the little squadron passed +out between the heads one after another on their way to the coast of +Mexico; and by evening the island was merely a long grey line on the +eastern horizon, while all eyes were strained toward the golden west, +each man eager for the first sight of a sail that might prove to be a +richly-laden galleon, or even the pirate Jose Leirya. Later in the +evening the moon rose in all her tropic glory, and the sea in her wake +gleamed like one huge speckless sheet of silver. + +Behind them, in the bush on the island, by the evening camp-fire, +Alvarez, with certain other choice spirits of his own stamp, was +plotting grim and deadly evil by the light of the same moon which lit +the English adventurers on their way. + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT. + +ROGER GOES ASHORE TO RESCUE A MAROONED MAN, AND IS HIMSELF LEFT IN THE +LURCH. + +The days now slipped by uneventfully, and morning after morning broke +without either land or ship making its appearance to break the monotony +of a perfectly clear horizon. + +Slipping down the Windward Channel, and sailing on a South-South-West +course, they had left Morant Point, at the eastern end of Jamaica, on +their starboard beam; and after keeping to their South-South-West course +for the five succeeding days, they had turned the vessels' heads to the +East-South-East, intending to sail as far in that direction as La +Guayra, where they hoped to find a plate galleon in the harbour, and +make an attempt to cut her out. Thence they planned to change their +course once more, standing westward along the coast of Venezuela, +crossing the Gulf of Darien, the Mosquito Gulf, and the Bay of Honduras, +and so up through the Yucatan Channel, leaving the western end of the +island of Cuba on their starboard hand, and into the Gulf of Mexico, +where they intended to cruise for some time, feeling tolerably certain +of picking up a treasure-ship there at any rate, even if they were not +fortunate enough to snap one up whilst cruising on their way. + +They could, of course, have reached the Gulf of Mexico much more quickly +by sailing down the Windward Channel and along the southern coast of +Cuba, and by the Yucatan Channel into the gulf; but they had heard of +the treasure-ships that made La Guayra their port of departure, and were +anxious not to miss any of them. Also, they believed that, by taking +the longer course, there would be more likelihood of their falling in +with that most ferocious and bloody pirate, Jose Leirya, as he was +called, or Jose de Leirya, as he loved to call himself--for he was said +to claim descent from a grandee of Spain, although those who knew the +man were well aware that his birth and parentage were obscure. + +As has already been related, one of the seamen on board the flag-ship +one night gave some account of the pirate's former doings, and the +discovery that the buried gear found at the Careenage--as Cavendish had +named the spot where the squadron refitted--was the property of the +pirate was proof positive that the scoundrel was still prowling +somewhere in those seas. Likewise, it will be remembered, every man in +the fleet had sworn to do his utmost to bring the villain to justice. +The anxiety, therefore, to catch him was such that officers, even, not +infrequently spent hours at the mast-heads in the hope of seeing his +topgallantsails showing above the horizon. Old Cary--the man who +claimed to possess some knowledge of Leirya--said that when he last +sailed in these seas the pirate was cruising in a schooner of unusual +length, and lying very low in the water, her hull painted black, with a +broad scarlet riband, in which her open gun-ports looked like a number +of gaping mouths, having been built very large to enable the broadside +guns to be trained almost fore and aft. The craft's masts were, +furthermore, said to be of great height, and might be recognised by +their remarkable and excessive rake aft; indeed--so asserted Cary--her +spars were of such extraordinary length, and the vessel herself lay so +very low in the water, that she had the appearance of being perilously +overmasted and topheavy. This appearance, however, Cary explained, was +altogether deceptive. The vessel sat low in the water indeed, but she +was not the shallow craft that she looked; there was more of her below +than above the surface, and she drew a great deal of water for a vessel +of her tonnage. This great draught of water enabled her to carry a +heavy load of ballast, tall masts, and a correspondingly heavy press of +sail; thus she was an enormously fast vessel, and had up till now easily +eluded capture, being able to run away from and out-weather many vessels +more powerful than herself. + +In justice to the pirate, however, it must be admitted that he had +seldom been known to run away. His vessel was exceptionally heavily +armed, and, if his antagonist happened to be not very much more powerful +than himself, he invariably stayed and fought the action out, always +succeeding in beating off his opponent, while in many cases he had +captured her. The fate of the unfortunate crews that fell into his +hands was--if his own records were to be credited--not to be dwelt upon; +for he described himself as guilty of the most awful atrocities to men, +women, and even children. The fights, of course, occurred only between +himself and war-vessels; merchant-ships never attempted such an +impossible task as to fight the pirate, and very often seemed too +completely paralysed with terror even to attempt the equally impossible +task of running away! + +Such was the vessel that everyone in Cavendish's squadron was so eagerly +looking for, their eagerness being further stimulated by the fact that +the captain had offered as a prize, to the first seaman who sighted her, +the best weapon that should be taken out of her after her capture-- +which, of course, all on board considered as absolutely certain, could +they but once succeed in coming up with her; while to the first officer +or gentleman who saw her he offered as reward the best suit of clothing +to be found in her. Such, however, was the eagerness of all hands to +come up with and destroy the vessel, and her rascally crew and leader, +that the lookout would have been just as keenly kept if no reward +whatever had been offered. + +But there was a still further stimulus in the not unnatural hope that +Jose Leirya would have on board some, at least, of that vast treasure of +his, with the possession of which he was credited by every man who had +ever heard of him; and visions of much prize-money to spend on their +return to Plymouth were always before the eager eyes of the Englishmen. + +Regulating the speed of the whole squadron by that of the slowest ship-- +which happened to be the _Tiger_, the rechristened _El Capitan_--the +fleet went slowly to the East-South-East on its appointed course. + +In those days, as, of course, it is hardly necessary to remind the +reader, charts were few, and those few were not to be relied upon as +more than approximately accurate. + +On the course that the commodore had marked out for his little squadron +they would, according to their chart, fall in with no land until they +made Oruba Island, after which Cavendish intended to steer a course +between the island of Oruba and what is now known as the Paraguena +Peninsula, leaving the other two islands of Curazao and Buen Ayre on his +port hand, and then heading straight for La Guayra. + +Several sailors, and one or two officers, among whom were Roger and +Harry, were as usual perched upon the cross-trees, the yards, or at the +mast-heads, on the lookout for the first sight of the infamous Jose +Leirya's schooner, and with no idea whatever of sighting land. So +everybody on deck was much astonished when, on a certain morning, the +cry came down from the masthead of the _Stag Royal_ of "Land ho, bearing +dead ahead!" At the same moment a string of flags fluttered up to the +main truck of the _Tiger_, which was signalling that she also had caught +sight of land of some description. + +"What do you make of it, Roger?" shouted Cavendish, for it was Roger's +sharp eyes that had caught the first glimpse of the unexpected land as +he was aloft straining his eyes in a search for the raking masts of Jose +Leirya's craft. + +"Well, sir," responded the boy, "it is an island of some kind, a very +small one, and lying low in the water. I can make out what I take to be +a few trees, probably palms, and I think--nay, I am quite sure now--that +I can see a thin column of smoke rising from about the centre of the +island." + +"In that case," said Cavendish, turning to Leigh, who was standing at +his elbow trying to catch sight of the land from the level of the deck, +"there is evidently a human being on that island who has seen the sails +of our fleet, and wishes to attract our attention and be taken off. I +suspect there has been a shipwreck there, and very likely there may be +more than one man. Now, I should not at all object to find and take off +a whole crew of shipwrecked seamen--provided that they were English,-- +for what with our fight with the Spaniards, that brush with the savages, +and sickness, we have had our crews thinned down very considerably. God +grant that they be not Spaniards; for if they are, and are in distress +there, I must take them off in common humanity--though, were we in like +case, I doubt if they would do the same for us,--and then I shall have +my vessels again lumbered up with a lot of useless fellows until I can +land them somewhere. Moreover, that same landing will be very difficult +now, for we shall not be likely to find down here another place which +will serve our purpose so well as did the Careenage, all these islands +and land hereabouts being already occupied by Spaniards, and we should +be running our own heads into danger in attempting to get rid of them. +Mr Leigh, be good enough to work out our dead-reckoning up to this +hour, and let us see exactly where we are on the chart, for there is no +island or land of any description marked where we are at present +sailing." + +Leigh did as the captain had ordered him, and found that the ships were +at that moment in longitude 73 degrees west and latitude 15 degrees +North; so that, going by the chart, there ought not to be any land in +sight for several days at least. + +"This particular part of the Caribbean Sea, sir, is not very greatly +frequented by English ships," said Leigh in explanation; "but the +Spaniards, no doubt, know these waters well, and yonder island may +perhaps be laid down on one of their charts." + +"Very possibly," answered the skipper; "but we have no Spanish charts. +The next Spaniard we capture, however, we will search for her charts, +which will certainly be of the utmost use to us." + +During the foregoing conversation Roger had come down from aloft to +report still further to the captain, and he had overheard the last +remark, which immediately reminded him that he had brought certain +charts away from the cabin of the _Gloria del Mundo_; in fact, Harry and +he had found their cipher concealed in the folds of one of them. He had +intended to give them to his captain, but subsequent stirring events had +driven the idea out of his mind. + +Having now recollected them, however, he explained the matter to +Cavendish, and asked if he should bring the charts up on deck. + +"By all means," replied the skipper; "let us have them at once, Trevose, +my man." + +Roger dived below, and soon reappeared with the charts under his arm. +They were immediately spread open on the deck and overhauled, and all +were found to be of the utmost importance; some papers also being found +among them giving the bearings and soundings of certain secret channels +leading to ports on the South American coast. There were also found +plans of towns and fortresses that would prove of inestimable value to +them. These last were forthwith placed in safety for future reference, +and a chart was presently discovered showing that particular portion of +the ocean upon which they were now sailing; and, sure enough, there was +a small island marked in the precise spot occupied by the one for which +they were heading. There was, in ink, a description of the island-- +written, of course, in Spanish,--setting forth that it had been named +"Isla de Corsarios", and that it was, according to English measurements, +two and a half miles long by one mile broad; also that it was +uninhabited. The description, written as a marginal note, further +stated that there was a spring of fresh water on the island, and that +there were palm-trees thereon; that the islet was of sandy soil, and +supported no vegetation beyond the few palms mentioned. + +"This, then, explains the matter," said Cavendish. "Evidently it has +been missed by our vessels, but the Dons have located it. I can clearly +see that these charts will be indeed very useful to us." + +By this time the island could be made out from the level of the deck, as +also the smoke, which was undoubtedly rising from a signal-fire that had +been lighted on the beach. The ships were, however, not yet near enough +to make out who the inhabitants were, nor how many of them there might +be. Indeed, had it not been for the sight of the smoke, the captain +would have imagined the island to be totally uninhabited, and would not +have thought it worth while to stop thereat; and, but for the fact of +the smoke being observed, this veracious yarn would most probably have +had a very different ending. + +All the officers of the ship, including Cavendish, Roger, and Harry, +were now standing in the eyes of the vessel; some had mounted the +bulwarks, and were supporting themselves thereon by holding on to the +rigging, and one and all were shading their eyes with their hands +against the powerful rays of an almost vertical sun, each anxious to +catch the first sight of the man, or men, who had built that signal-fire +on the beach. + +In obedience to an order from Cavendish, old Martin, who was credited +with having the sharpest eyes in the ship, went aloft to the +foremast-head, on the lookout, with instructions to let those on deck +know when he first caught sight of the inhabitants of the island. + +In about a quarter of an hour they had very perceptibly neared the +shore, which lay very low, and presented, at a closer view, more the +appearance of a mud or sand-bank, with a few dwarfed trees and shrubs +growing thereon, than an island in its accepted sense of the word; and +shortly afterward Martin's voice came down from aloft in accents of +excitement: "I see un, zir; there 'a be. 'Tes only one man, zir, so far +as Ai can mek out, and 'a be a-waving of a red shirt, or zummat laike +that, Ai think, zir." + +"Can you only see one man, Martin; or are there any more with him, think +you?" shouted Cavendish. + +"Naw, zir," responded the old fellow; "as Ai zay, Ai can only zee one of +'em, and 'e do be a-carryin' on zumthing wonnerful, zir. 'E be +a-jumpin' up an' down, and a-wavin' of his arms laike to one possessed. +Ai expec's as how un belaives us 'aven't zeen un, an' wants to attrac' +our attention." + +"Very well, Martin," answered the captain; "stay where you are, man," as +he perceived the old fellow making preparations to descend, "stay where +you are. Keep a sharp lookout, and let me know if anything further +takes place, or if any more men make their appearance. + +"I expect, gentlemen," said the captain, turning to the assembled +officers, "that there is only one man there; the others would have +joined him by this time, had there been any more of them. In a way, I +am sorry; for I could very well have done with a great many more men-- +always provided, of course, that they had been Englishmen,--for we are, +as you all know, very short-handed. This man is possibly the sole +survivor of a shipwrecked crew; but, as there seems, so far as we can +see at present, to be no trace of others being there, I should be more +inclined to think that he has been marooned. Marooning is, of course, a +very common practice, particularly among pirates, and, in my opinion, it +is one of the most cruel forms of punishment ever conceived by the brain +of man. Now, it has occurred to me as quite within the limits of +possibility that this man ashore there may be a marooned member of the +crew of that scoundrel, Jose Leirya. It would not be so very +extraordinary, after all, if he were. Leirya is practically the only +pirate at present in these seas, and we are all aware that marooning is +practised chiefly among pirates. Should it happen to be as I somewhat +suspect, the man will, at all events, know something worth telling us +about that arch villain; for I shall never be happy until I have hunted +the scoundrel down, and hanged him for the dog he is!" + +The captain's face blazed with righteous anger as he spoke, and his +expression was reflected on the countenances of the officers gathered +round him. It boded ill indeed for the pirate if ever the squadron +should fall in with him. + +"Send a man into the chains," continued Cavendish, speaking to Roger. +"As the land lies so low in the water, it is not unlikely that the water +round it is very shoal, and I have no wish to get any of the vessels +ashore if I can help it. And order the signalman to signal the rest of +the fleet to keep the lead going." + +Roger obeyed, and a leadsman was soon perched in the chains to windward, +busy with his sounding-line to ascertain the depth of water in which +they were then sailing, and to give timely warning if the water should +begin to shoal dangerously. + +"Seven fathoms now, sir!" reported Hearst, the leadsman. + +"Very well," answered Cavendish; "we are safe as yet," turning to Leigh. +"Let her go through the water." + +The other vessels were strung out behind the _Stag Royal_, and they fell +into her wake for their greater safety; for she drew more water than any +of the rest, being a much larger vessel, and where she could go the rest +could follow. They were running along with a fresh breeze on their +starboard beam, and making about six knots an hour. They were therefore +rapidly nearing the island, and could by this time discern the solitary +occupant from the deck. He still continued to wave the red shirt, or +whatever it was, that they had at first seen, and it appeared as though +even now he could scarcely convince himself that he had yet been seen, +although the fleet was heading directly for the island, for he continued +his wild gestures--leaping into the air, and waving his arms like one +possessed. + +"Six fathoms!" came the voice of the leadsman from the chains. + +"We can stand in some way farther yet," commented Cavendish. "I want to +take the ship in as near as I can, so that the men may not have far to +pull in the boat. Furthermore, gentlemen, by the look of the sky, +methinks that a gale is brewing, and it will be well that the boat get +not too far away from the ship." + +"Five and a half fathoms!" chanted the leadsman a few minutes later. + +"'Tis well. Still keep her going as she is," ordered the captain. + +The people on deck could now see the poor solitary on the beach quite +distinctly, and presently he came running down to the water's edge, +still waving his red flag; and so eager did he appear for rescue that it +seemed as though he intended to swim off to the ships, for he waded into +the sea up to his arm-pits. + +"I pray Heaven that he does nothing so foolish!" murmured Roger, who +still remembered his own experience with the sharks. + +The unfortunate man had no such intention, it presently appeared; yet +was he still in a sufficiently dangerous situation, for he stopped where +he was with the water up round his shoulders, and continued waving his +signal of distress. + +"Five fathoms bare!" was the next report of the man with the +sounding-line. + +"We can edge in even a little farther yet," remarked the captain. "But +I cannot understand," he continued, "why that man persists in acting so +strangely. He must know by this time that we have seen him and will +rescue him, yet he continues to signal with his arms and that red rag as +though he were demented. It would not greatly surprise me to find, when +we get him on board, that his brain has given way with the horror of +solitude, suffering, and privation." + +"By your leave, sir, it seems very much to me," suggested Roger, +touching his hat, "as though the poor fellow were striving not so much +to attract us nearer as to warn us to keep farther away." + +"Why, boy, prithee what puts that idea into your head?" retorted the +captain rather testily. "Why should he wish us to keep off? Surely if +you were in his place you would be fully as anxious as he appears to be +to have the rescuing ships approach and take you off without delay?" + +"What I meant to suggest, Mr Cavendish," responded Roger rather +stiffly, and not one whit abashed by his commander's testiness, "was +that perchance this man knows the shoals and rocks round the island +well. He may perceive that we are sailing into danger, and wish to warn +us from approaching any closer before it be too late." + +"Zounds, boy!" shouted Cavendish, "'fore Heaven I believe that you may +be right in your assumption!" + +Then, turning to the crew: "All hands stand by to veer ship!" he cried. + +But even as he spoke there was a sudden check to the vessel's way, and +almost instantly she stopped dead, the sudden shock throwing more than +one man prostrate on the deck. At the same moment the leadsman in the +chains gave his warning cry: "Three fathoms only, and shoaling fast!" + +But the warning came too late, for the vessel had taken the ground, +which evidently shoaled up with great abruptness. Her fore, main, and +mizzen topmasts snapped like carrots with the sudden check to her speed, +and came tumbling down with their attendant wreckage, thus adding to the +already great confusion on deck, and, what was worse, killing two men, +whom they could ill spare, and badly injuring five others. + +"You were right, Roger!" shouted the captain as he ran past the lad to +the stern of the vessel, with intent to warn the other ships from a +similar mishap. But the warning was needless, for they had been on the +lookout, and, observing the accident to their consort, had at once +hauled their wind and gone off on another tack in time to avoid a +similar fate. When at a safe distance they luffed into the wind and, +furling their canvas, came to anchor. + +Cavendish, seeing that the remainder of his little squadron was safe, +ordered the wreckage to be cut adrift and the decks cleared for further +operations. + +"Work away with a will, lads!" he cried encouragingly. + +"The ship has taken a soft berth; she lies on the sand, and there is no +present danger of her sinking; indeed we are in much too shoal water for +that. Mr Leigh, we must get the wreckage cleared away first of all, +after which we will get out kedge anchors astern; and if these fail us +we will run out cables to the other vessels. Perchance we may thus get +ourselves off by our own hauling and the others towing. But we must all +work with a will; for, as all may see, there is in the look of the sky +every prospect of ill weather very shortly, and if it take us ashore +like this we shall lose the ship! Now, Roger, take you two hands in the +gig--I cannot spare more--and bring off that poor fellow. I would that +we had earlier understood what he meant; it would have saved us this +disaster. And hasten, lad, for I cannot spare even three of you for a +single moment longer than is absolutely necessary. Yet must I have that +man, for he may possess information of untold worth to us. And you, Mr +Leigh, will take two hands also, and go off to the other vessels. You +will acquaint them with our condition, and give them their orders to +prepare for towing, and to be ready by the moment when we can avail +ourselves of their help, for we have no time to waste." + +Roger soon found his two men, and the boat was got ready and over the +side in a very few minutes; yet, quick as he had been, he perceived as +he pushed off that Mr Leigh's boat was already some distance on her way +to the other ships. + +"Now, give way, men, with a will!" cried the lad, encouragingly. "You +heard what Mr Cavendish said--there is not a moment to lose if we are +to get that man off, and the ship too, ere the gale breaks. And indeed +I like not the look of the weather at all. It fast grows more +threatening, and we shall be lucky if we get back to the fleet in time. +Furthermore, I fear much that there will not be time to save the poor +old _Stag Royal_: she is, to my mind, hopelessly lost, for, if +appearance belie it not, the gale will be down on us ere they can hope +to move her off the sand; and I pray God that the poor fellows on board +her may be able to get away from her in time. Ah, the wind comes away +even now! Pull, lads, pull, or we shall be swamped ere we can get +ashore!" + +As he spoke, the whole sky seemed to darken in a moment all round them; +the sea took on the appearance of dull metal and became of a livid hue. +Away on the north-western horizon the sky was black as ink, and below +that, between sky and wave, was a line of white extending athwart the +horizon, showing the forefront of the advancing gale. + +"Pull, lads, pull!" again shouted Roger, raising his voice above the +deep moaning sound that filled the air everywhere about them. "Unless +we can contrive to reach the shore before that line of white, you know +what our fate will be. We shall have to wait until the gale blows over +before we can return to the ships, if indeed they survive it." + +The seamen saw that what Roger said was only too true, and pulled for +dear life; but the boat was a heavy one, her full complement of oarsmen +being eight. Now, however, she had only two men pulling; they therefore +made painfully slow progress, and the white line of water seemed to be +overtaking them at a speed that filled them with despair. + +Meanwhile Roger noticed that the solitary watcher on the beach had now +left the water, and was lying at full-length on the sand as though +overcome by his exertions, weakened as perhaps he was by long exposure +and privation. + +The lad felt extremely anxious as to the fate of the ships, and +frequently turned his head to snatch a glimpse of what was happening +behind him. He was able to see, during his brief observations, that +boats had been lowered from the stranded ship, and from her consorts, +and were plying at their utmost speed between the wreck and the other +vessels of the squadron. It was evident to Roger that the captain, +observing the extraordinarily rapid approach of the gale, and foreseeing +that, unless a miracle were to take place, the stranded ship must be +lost, had not delayed a moment, but was transferring her crew to the +other ships as fast as he possibly could. Roger fervently prayed that +this operation of transfer might be completed ere the storm burst upon +them; but he was very doubtful, for that fatal white line of foam was +driving down upon the fleet with appalling rapidity. + +But he could not relax his attention from the matter that he himself had +in hand. He could not watch what was going on behind him and also steer +the boat; so he set his teeth and gripped the tiller hard, looking +straight ahead of him in search of the best and safest spot on which to +beach his boat, for the sea was rising fast. He would have given much +to have had his bosom friend and more than brother, Harry, in the boat +with him at that moment. He could always rely on Harry's coolness and +sound clear-headed advice, and he would have felt much less anxious had +his chum been with him then. + +The man on shore was now seen to stagger to his feet and to support +himself with a stick, alternately pointing out to sea and beckoning them +on. But neither Roger nor the men with him now needed anyone to remind +them of the peril in which they stood. + +They were nearing the beach now, but meanwhile the sea had been rising +with almost incredible rapidity. When they left the ship the sea had +been calm, with not even a ripple lapping the beach. There had been the +proverbial calm before the storm. But now, although the gale had not +yet reached the boat, the waves were leaping up the beach in foam, and +their back-wash gave forth a roar like that of distant thunder. Roger +yearned to look behind him again, to ascertain how far away the white +squall still was, but he dared not turn his head; all his nerve and +skill and courage were now needed to enable him to beach the boat +without capsizing her. One glance at the faces of the men pulling, who +of course were sitting looking aft in the direction from which the storm +was coming, was enough to convince him that it could not be by this time +very far distant. They were now within a few fathoms of the beach, and +Roger, for the first time, dared to hope that they would reach the shore +without any mishap, when he observed his two seamen redouble their +exertions, with a look of terror on their countenances, although they +were very nearly "gastados" as the Dons say, or used up, and the next +moment, with a fearful shriek, the white squall burst in all its fury +upon the unhappy trio. The boat seemed suddenly to take wings; she was +propelled with fearful velocity towards the beach; the spindrift +whistled about them and blinded them; the shriek and roar of the wind +deafened them, and its fearful force stunned them. The seamen were +blown bodily from the thwarts into the bottom of the boat; but Roger, +clinging desperately to the gunwale with one hand, and fiercely gripping +the tiller with the other, contrived to retain his seat, and strove to +pierce the dense mist of scud-water with his eyes, that he might see to +beach the boat safely. But he could perceive nothing, and the next +moment a wave descended full upon his back, dashing him forward and out +over the bows. The tiller thus released, the boat broached to, filled, +and capsized, and her three occupants were left struggling in the water +and fighting for their lives, while the craft was flung bottom-upward on +the beach and dashed into staves by the violence of the shock. Tossed +hither and thither, to and fro, Roger strove to get his breath; but he +could not, for he seemed buried in salt water; and he was suffering all +the agonies of suffocation when his head emerged for a moment from the +water and he drew a hasty breath that seemed to put fresh strength into +his fast-failing limbs. Yet, strive against it as he would, although he +felt the beach under his feet, they were fast being dragged from under +him; he was in the clutch of the fatal undertow, and he knew that, +exhausted as he was, if he were once swept back again into deep water he +would drown, for his strength was now at an end. Summoning up all his +energy, therefore, he gave vent to a loud shout for help--although help +seemed to be the last thing he might expect at that moment--and made one +last struggle for life. But, even as his senses failed him, and he was +sinking backward in that fatal embrace, a pair of strong hands clutched +his hair and arm, and for a few seconds he felt as though, between the +sea on the one hand and a sturdy British seaman on the other, he were +being torn asunder. Presently, however, the wave receded; the awful +feeling of being sucked back left him, and, opening his eyes, he saw +that he was on terra firma, with the sea behind him. "Now run," shouted +the seaman--one Jake Irwin, who had been in the boat with him,--"run, +Master Trevose, before the next sea catches ye." At the same time he +dragged the lad up the beach with all his strength, and they reached +safety as another wave came rolling hungrily after them, to retire again +with an angry snarl, as though cheated of its lawful prey. Roger stood +up and wiped the wet from his eyes and ears, and wrung the water out of +his clothes as well as he could, and looked about him. He saw the two +seamen--one of whom had rescued him, only just in the nick of time, from +a watery grave--standing close by; and not far from them he perceived +the figure of the man whom they had come to rescue, and for whom they +had so nearly met disaster. The seamen who had rowed in the boat seemed +none the worse for their adventure, and asked the lad how he felt, and +whether he had suffered from the accident to the boat. Roger, aching in +every limb and muscle from his recent struggle in the water, felt +himself carefully over, and was able to assure them that he had broken +no bones. + +The stranger now approached and spoke to them, thanking them and +applauding their bravery in coming away to save him, despite the threat +of the gale that was by this time raging furiously. The man, it +appeared, was an Englishman, and, in answer to a question put by Roger, +he confessed that, as the captain had suggested on the deck of the +flag-ship, he had been one of a crew of pirates, and, having incurred +the displeasure of his captain and the enmity of his companions, had +been marooned on the sand-bank with but a small stock of provisions and +no means of obtaining more when those were exhausted; he had been +allowed neither fishing-tackle nor musket with powder and shot, although +the latter would not have been of very much use to him, for the island +was small and so far away from the mainland that birds very seldom made +their appearance there. It appeared that he had been on the sand-bank +some thirty-six days, with the few provisions that they had been moved +to give him, and nothing else beside but the clothing he stood up in. + +"But," concluded the poor fellow, who was emaciated and weak to the last +degree, "I have made a bit of a shelter to leeward of the top of this +bank; let us go there, since even it is better than nothing at all. +Your boat's smashed to pieces on the beach, and we shall be forced to +remain here until the storm blows itself out before they can send +another boat. I pray that it may not be long in doing so, for, although +there is water here in plenty, my provisions are pitifully low; in fact, +for the four of us, there is only enough for about two days with the +strictest economy. But come round to my shelter and I will make some +fire, so that you can get your clothes dried, and you will then be a bit +more comfortable." + +They were turning to follow their new friend, when Roger once more cast +his eyes out to seaward, and he came to a stand-still, remaining as if +rooted to the spot. The others gazed at him for a moment in +astonishment, not knowing what had come over the lad. As they looked, +however, he raised his arm slowly and pointed to seaward; the other +three, following the direction of his outstretched arm, at once saw the +reason for the horror and despair depicted on the lad's countenance. +The flag-ship, which they had left stranded, lay broken in half by the +terrific force of the sea, and the after-part of her was now being +gradually driven shoreward, the fore-part remaining, as before, embedded +in the sand; and, worse still for the poor castaways, the remaining +three ships of the fleet had cut their cables and, setting what sail +they dared, were heading away from the island before the gale. No +wonder that Roger felt stunned with despair, as he realised that he was +actually left on an island that was nothing more than a mere sand-bank, +with three other men to bear him company, it is true, but with, between +the four, only two days' provisions, provided that they were used with +the most rigid economy! + +But he was roused from his reverie by Jake's voice saying to him: "Never +worry, Master Trevose, they ships ha'n't forgotten us by no manner o' +means; but the skipper sees as how he can't take us off while this 'ere +gale lasts, so he's cut his cables and run for it. The captain have +lost one ship, and he don't want to lose any more, so he've just bore up +out of harm's way until the gale have blowed itself out. And that, sir, +with all submission, I calls good seamanship. Never you fear, sir; we +ain't forgotten; the skipper ain't the man to forget his crew, nor no +part of 'em; and as soon as this 'ere bit of a breeze is over, you'll +see they three ships come sailin' back here to this sand-bank to take us +off again. I knows Captain Cavendish, I do, and he ain't the man to +forget we's here, and sail away and leave us. We'll see 'em all back +here to-morrow, or next day at the furdest. But I'm wonderin' whether +there were any poor fellers left aboard the _Stag Royal_ when she parted +in the middle!" And old Jake Irwin looked round, shading his eyes from +the flying spindrift, to see if he could discover any trace of human +being either in the sea or washed up on the beach. But none was +visible. + +"Yes, you are right, Jake," said Roger. "I forgot for the moment that +Captain Cavendish would be obliged to leave that anchorage or be blown +on shore. But the captain will, of course, return as soon as he is +able. As to there being any people aboard when the ship parted, Jake, I +think all were taken off before that happened. And now, since we can do +no more for the present, we had better go and take shelter as this man +suggests. By the way, my man, what is your name?" + +"My name, sir, is William Evans," replied the marooned man. + +"And mine," said Roger, "is Roger Trevose; and these two men"--pointing +to them in turn--"are Jake Irwin and Walter Bevan." + +"Thank you, sir!" answered Evans. "Yonder is my shelter, and when we +reach it I will give you my history up to the present, if you care to +listen to it, for I feel that I have not much longer to live; this last +month has compassed my death, so great have been the hardships that I +have been obliged to endure. After the storm has ceased somewhat we had +better go along the beach and collect any wreckage that happens to come +ashore. And I pray Heaven that some food may be washed up, for we have +very little here to go on with!" + +A few minutes later they came to the "shelter", which was merely a deep +hole dug in the sand, and roofed over with palm branches and grass, +together with a few bits of plank and timber that had been washed up on +the beach. + +"Enter, sir, and fellow-seamen," said Evans, "and to such poor +hospitality as I can offer you, you are most heartily welcome." + +They went in, and the man made a fire with the help of his tinder-box +and a few dry sticks that he routed out from a corner. The fire was +soon blazing merrily, and they took off their clothes and held them +before the flames to dry. Whilst this was being done, the marooned man, +whose face even now bore the imprint of death, brought a little food out +of his scanty store, and some water, and the party sat down to eat and +drink. Then, when the meal was ended, they resumed their clothes, which +were now dry, and prepared to listen to the history of the ex-pirate, +which he gave to the accompaniment of the beating of rain over their +heads, and the tumult of the gale around them. + +Meanwhile Cavendish had not forgotten these poor waifs; but, having +barely contrived to clear the shore with his squadron, was now being +driven away fast to leeward of the island by the furious gale, which as +yet gave no sign of blowing itself out. + + + +CHAPTER NINE. + +THE MAROONED MAN TELLS HIS STORY. + +Crouching over the fire, the marooned man proceeded to tell his story. + +"Well," he began, "I must tell you first that I was born in the year +1532, in the town of Monmouth, in Wales, of purely Welsh parents, +bearing the ancient name of Evans. In my early youth I kept about the +house and tended our flock of sheep, of which we had a great many, on +the dear old Welsh mountains. This life suited me well, for I was of a +studious frame of mind, fond of learning, and I read and studied much +while out on the hills with the sheep. At this time our family was very +prosperous; but not long afterwards England began to be torn by those +religious struggles, which I doubt not you two older men will well +remember, and we were unfortunate enough to have our lands confiscated +by that tyrant, King Henry the Eighth, and, from a state of prosperity +and the possession of all we could reasonably wish, my family found +itself landless, without money, and even without a home. Besides +myself, there were two other children, both girls; and what worried my +poor parents most was the problem of what to do with us three children. +Fortunately an uncle of my mother--a man whose religious convictions had +a habit of changing with the times--had retained all his property, and +he undertook to take my two young sisters and bring them up as his own +children. This kindness on his part relieved my parents of much +anxiety; but there was still the difficulty as to what to do with me. +At last it was decided, in the absence of anything better, that I should +go to sea; and accordingly, although I did not at all care for the idea, +to sea I had to go, since no other course was open to me. My father +secured me a berth as cabin-boy on board a vessel called the _Delight_, +trading between London and ports on the Mediterranean, and commanded by +a man named Thomas West. It had happened that my father, in the time of +his prosperity, had been able to do this man a service, and that was the +reason why he took me on board his ship; and I am bound to say that he +was always very kind to me. The time for the next voyage came round +only too quickly for my liking, and I bade a sad farewell to my father +and mother, who somehow scraped up money enough to go to London with me +to see me off, little dreaming, poor souls, that they would never see me +again." + +The pirate's voice shook slightly; he paused for a moment, and brushed +the back of his hand across his eyes; then, clearing his throat, he +resumed: "We left London in the latter part of the year 1547, when I was +very nearly sixteen years of age, and, sailing down the English Channel, +we entered the Bay of Biscay and touched at our first port, which was +Bordeaux. From thence we sailed again, and--just before Christmas it +was, I remember--we cleared the Straits of Jebel-al-Tarik, as the Moors +call them, and entered the great inland sea. We coasted down its +shores, touching first at Barcelona, for we were not then at war with +Spain, and then at Marseilles, from which port we struck across for +Sicily, intending to call at Palermo. But on the way there we fell in +with a Barbary corsair. Our captain was a brave man, and determined to +fight to the last, as he had a very valuable cargo on board. The fight +began early in the morning, and the pirate tried at first to ram our +ship with his sharp beak; but the wind was good, and our ship was so +nimble, and answered her helm so well, that we were able to avoid the +rushes of the corsair, although he nearly had us on one occasion. +Finding that these tactics did not answer, he drew off and, turning his +broadside to us, lacked us through and through with his ordnance until +we were a mere floating wreck, and half our ship's company lay dead on +our decks. We replied as well as we could; but, being only a +merchant-ship, we were not nearly so heavily armed as the corsair; and, +our men being untrained in warfare, very few of our shot hit him, so +that the rascal was but little the worse. Their captain then hailed us, +and asked whether we would surrender; but the master of the _Delight_ +shouted back that if he wanted the ship he must come and take her. + +"Whereat he came at us again, and laid himself alongside us, we not +being able to move by this time, owing to our having lost all our masts, +and being so encumbered with wreckage that we could do nothing. About a +hundred fierce and bloodthirsty ruffians swarmed aboard us and began to +cut us down and drive us toward the fore-part of the ship, while we, on +our side, fought bravely enough with what weapons we could lay our hands +on. But at last our gallant captain fell dead, cut down by the scimitar +of a gigantic blackamoor, and the rest of us--very few by that time, I +can assure you,--seeing this, threw down our arms and surrendered to the +corsairs. There were then but seventeen of us left, all told, and not +one of us but had his wound to show as the result of the fight. Five +out of that seventeen, indeed, were so badly wounded that they died of +their hurts before the corsair reached her port, leaving only twelve of +us, all Englishmen, to be sent into slavery. After the corsairs had +removed us to their own ship, they stripped the _Delight_ of all that +she carried, transferring all her cargo to their own hold. They were +greatly pleased at the result of their day's work--for they had made a +good haul--and made all haste to return to their port, which was Tunis. +But before bearing up they set fire to our ship, and when we last saw +the _Delight_ she was blazing merrily. I make no doubt that she sank +shortly afterwards, leaving no trace behind." + +"You'm wrong there, mate," broke in Jake Irwin. "Don't you mind that it +rained heavily soon afterwards? Well, the rain put out the fire, and an +English ship comin' up found her still smoulderin', with enough of her +left to show that she was the _Delight_. She brought the news of the +loss of the _Delight_ into Plymouth--I remember hearin' all about it,-- +and it was thought she had took fire in the ordinary way, and that her +crew, havin' gone off in the boats, was a'terwards lost. No one ever +gave a thought to pirates or corsairs." + +"Ah," resumed Evans, "would to God that that vessel had come up sooner! +We should have been saved--those left of us--from a living death that +lasted for many years. Yes, now you come to mention it, I remember the +rain; but we never dreamed that it would put out the fire, for we left +her burning furiously. Well, the other ship was too late, and it makes +no difference now. But, to get on with my yarn. We reached the port of +Tunis about ten days later, and there was much joy there when it was +found what a valuable cargo the corsair had brought back; and the joy +was all the greater because of the twelve white prisoners, for white +slaves are reckoned very valuable in those parts, and there hadn't been +any taken for a very long while. We were all put up to auction, and the +man who bid highest got the man he fancied. A big Moor from the +back-country took a liking for me, for I was a fine strapping youngster +then, although you mightn't think it to look at me now. Well, he bought +me, but me only; so I said good-bye to my comrades, never expecting to +see them again, and we set off with my master's caravan for the +interior. + +"His home must have been some hundreds of miles in the interior, for it +took us over two months of travelling every day to get there. We struck +from the town of Tunis south-eastwards, as I could tell by the sun. +After travelling for a long time we came to a big river, with fields of +rice on each side of it, and beyond them the burning desert, with hills +and mountains behind that again. When we came to the river we left the +camels, and proceeded in boats until we came to a mighty waterfall, +where we quitted the river for a time, and went a little way overland; +then we took to the river again. This we did four times, and at last, +after more than two months, travelling all the time, we came to a big +town, built all of white stone, very fine to see. All around were green +places like parks, with wells of good water in them; and there were +palm-trees all about, and palaces of white marble; it was a lovely place +for a free man to live in, but for a slave it was dreadful. + +"Well, my masters, I was kept here for ten long years, during which I +learnt the language, and found that the city in which I dwelt was named +Khartoum. Then I began to fall ill; I looked old with suffering, and +could not do the tasks allotted to me. I was whipped, and burnt with +red-hot irons; but even such cruelties as these did not make me do any +more work--for indeed I was more dead than alive,--so at last my master +said he would send me down the river to the sea-coast, and sell me there +as a galley-slave, as I was of no more use to him, while I should be +made to work when I was in the galleys. So, with six others in like +condition, I was sent off one morning, in charge of a guard, down the +river, passing on our way six waterfalls or cataracts, as also many +ruined temples and palaces of great age and beauty, with no men in them. + +"After nearly two months of travelling, having passed many towns and +villages on the way, we came one morning to a place on the river where +we halted; and away in the desert I could see three great buildings, +broad and square at the bottom, rising to a great height, and +terminating in a point. I asked about them of our captors, and they +told me that they were tombs of ancient kings of Egypt, and of great +age. + +"Leaving these, we went on again, and in course of time came to the city +of Alexandria, where our journey ended. We stayed there several weeks, +and then I--being by this time recovered from my sickness,--with the +other six men, was sold to the captain of a corsair galley, who wanted a +few more slaves to make up his complement of rowers. + +"And now began the worst years of my life. For six long years, my +masters, I sweated in a hot sun, with no shelter; toiling at the great +heavy sweeps with the other slaves; always kept to our work by the whip +of the bo'sun. Ah, the torment of those years! The recollection of +them would never leave me, were I to live to the age of the patriarchs +of old. We pursued other craft--mostly merchantmen--and took them; and +those of the slaves who were killed by the shot of the other ships were +replaced by their crews. + +"Many a time did I pray that I should be one of those to find death; but +it never came to me, though often enough to the men by my side. At +last, one day we attacked a Spanish vessel--for we had gone down towards +the Straits of Jebel-al-Tarik--that looked like a harmless +merchant-ship, but she proved to be a war-ship disguised on purpose to +take us, and others like us. After more than an hour's fighting, during +which nearly all our men were killed, she took us; and I, with the other +Englishmen on board the galley, gave thanks to God, for we foolishly +thought that all our troubles were now over. But we were soon to find +out our mistake. There was now war between England and Spain, and we +quickly discovered that we had merely made an exchange of masters. + +"We were taken on board the Spaniard and the galley was sunk. Her +owners were all hanged, being heathens, but we Englishmen were +considered heretics, and we were to be reserved for the Holy +Inquisition, that that office might convert us from our sins, and `save +us from everlasting flame', as the Spanish Dons put it. We were landed +at Cartagena, in Spain, and I, with eight others, was thrown into +prison, to await my trial at the hands of the Holy Office. One by one +we were tried, and all found guilty of `heresy'. Then they asked if we +would recant. We all refused, with the natural result that we were put +to the torture. Oh, my masters, pray daily and nightly that you may +never fall into the hands of the Holy Inquisition! Those years that I +spent on the galley were as heaven compared to being in the hands of the +Dons. + +"I will not tell you how they tortured us--for indeed the story will not +bear telling,--but I bear the marks of their irons and the rack to this +day. My companions steadfastly refused to renounce their faith, and +after enduring the most hideous and awful tortures they were burnt +alive. I know not whether my tortures were worse than theirs, but at +last I could bear them no longer, and I recanted, to gain release from +my daily pain. But I was mistaken in supposing that this late +conversion was going to save me. I was tortured again, for my past +obstinacy, and then, instead of being released, I was sent to their +galleys, to spend the remainder of my life therein. By turning Romanist +I had indeed saved myself from burning, but not from that living hell, +the life of a galley-slave. + +"I was, then, sent to the galleys, and remained there, how long I know +not, but it seemed to be several years. During the time that I was in +the Spanish galley--for I remained on the same vessel all the time,--we, +together with other vessels, made several attacks upon English ships, +but we were beaten off with heavy loss in every case except one, and +that was when we captured a small English merchantman called the +_Dainty_, the unfortunate crew of which, I suppose, were put into the +Inquisition, as I had been. These many conflicts were productive of +heavy casualties among the slaves, many more, indeed, than among the +soldiers and sailors who composed our fighting-crew, for, when chasing +another vessel, or attacking her broadside to broadside, our enemy +generally depressed his guns in order to hull and if possible sink us, +as in that way only could they prevent us from running alongside. And +every shot that pierced a galley's hull was certain to kill or maim at +least four or five slaves. But our masters cared nothing for that; when +one crew of galley-slaves was exhausted, another batch was sent for to +take their place. There were always plenty of slaves to be had from the +Spanish prisons, and the men we got from them were an even more cruel +and wicked set of rascals than the men who called themselves our +masters. + +"Well, I had been a galley-slave among the Spaniards for some years--how +many years, exactly, I cannot tell you, for after a time my senses +became so deadened that I could not take the trouble to count up and +remember the days and weeks as they passed; indeed I became more like an +animal than a human being. I had been with the Spaniards for several +years, I say, when one day we sighted an English merchantman, as we +thought, and chased her. She appeared to be sailing but slowly, and we +very soon caught her up, to find that we had walked, or rather sailed, +into a deeply-laid trap. The Englishman, it appeared, had adopted a +ruse similar to that practised by the Spaniards when they captured the +corsair from Alexandria. The English had disguised their vessel--which +was a war-ship--to look like an innocent and harmless merchant's +trading-vessel, and to retard her speed and allow us to come up with her +they had dropped overboard a couple of light spars connected together by +a broad piece of stout sail-cloth, the whole of the apparatus being +secured to the stern of the vessel by a stout rope. Thus the passage of +the ship through the water caused this piece of canvas between the two +spars to open, when it acted as a drag upon her, and reduced her speed +so considerably that we soon overtook her. But no sooner were we well +under her guns than she opened fire, and before we could get alongside +her she had worked fearful execution both among our fighting-crew and +also the slaves. Our eyes were now opened to the true character of the +vessel, and the crew no longer had any desire to come to close quarters +with her; so they put up their helm and bore away with all speed for +Cadiz, the port nearest to us. + +"And then began a chase that I shall never forget so long as I live, +sirs. With our full crew we might perhaps have been a match for the +English ship in point of speed, but half our galley-slaves were killed, +and the Englishman, having now cut away his drag, was coming up with us +hand over hand. The slave-drivers came down among us, and, standing on +the drivers' plank, running down the centre of the galley, drove us to +superhuman exertions by the merciless blows of their heavy-thonged +whips, the lashes of which were plaited up with small lead balls on +them. They even used the flat of their sword-blades to our backs, and +after that, when the English ship still continued to overhaul us, they +drew the edges of their weapons along our flesh, making the blood spurt. +We were, as you perhaps know, all manacled together, and at least half +our slaves were killed by the enemy's shot. The floor of the vessel was +ankle-deep in blood, and the corpses of the dead, still manacled to the +living--for there was no time to separate us,--kept time with our +strokes as we pulled, in a manner most horrible to look upon. The man +next me had had his head cut off by a cannon-shot--I remember at the +time wishing it had been mine,--and with every stroke I pulled his +corpse moved also, and with each movement jets of blood gushed up from +the torn veins, which were protruding from the gory neck, and flooded +me. Well, the vessel still continued to gain on us, and I saw the +Spanish dogs of slave-drivers whispering together, and presently they +called for buckets of fire. These were brought, full of glowing +charcoal, and into them irons were thrust. The unhappy slaves saw what +was in store for them, and pulled until their muscles cracked. Soon the +irons were white-hot, and the chief driver called to us in Spanish: `We +must escape that cursed heretic-ship yonder. Now, you all see these +irons? If I see one of you flagging in your efforts, that man will be +branded with them, and when we get into harbour will be handed over to +the office of the Holy Inquisition as a heretic and an aider and abettor +of heretics.' This cruel threat drove us all nearly mad, and--for we +knew what that meant--our muscles cracked again as we laboured on at the +oars, hampered as we were by the bloody corpses of our fellow-slaves. +For myself, I was away from the centre of the galley, I thank God! and +near an open port, so I got a little air, which refreshed me; but I +presently saw one of the poor fellows near the middle of the vessel, +where the air was stifling, begin to relax his exertions. He was +fainting with the heat and fatigue of the chase. The chief +slave-driver, whose name, I remember, was Alvarez, saw it too, and +called out: `Juan, this heretic is fainting; bring the fire-bucket.' + +"The man brought it; Alvarez took out a white-hot iron, and--oh, sirs, I +cannot describe what then happened, but I can hear that man's shrieks +now, as I tell of it! It was awful; and would shrivel my tongue to +relate, and your ears to hear. Well, sirs, not to harrow you further by +those fearful methods of making us work, we at last got into Cadiz, and +escaped the English ship; but more than half of the remaining slaves +died from their exertions. + +"Our diminished crew was replenished by a lot of men from the prisons of +Spain, and among them was a man named Jose Leirya. This man was my evil +genius; and, as he marked the turning-point in my life from good to +evil, I may as well describe his appearance; for he is on these seas +now, and I wish you to know the man, so that if you should meet him with +a sufficient force to capture him, you may recognise the villain. He +was sent down to the galley one morning with a number of other men, to +make up her complement afresh after the encounter with the Englishman. +I recognised him for a leader of men the moment he came aboard the +galley, and, as he was chained next to me on the same tier, I had ample +opportunity for observing his appearance. He was an enormously tall and +broad man, of extremely dark complexion. He said he was of Portugal, +but I should say he had more Moorish blood in him than anything else. +He wore his hair long, and it fell in thick black ringlets over his +broad shoulders. A huge moustache concealed his lips, and a long black +beard hid his chin; indeed the man was so hairy that he had the +appearance of being an ape rather than a man. One of his eyes--which +were jet black in colour, with whites which turned red when he flew into +a rage--had a very perceptible cast in it; the left eye, I remember it +was. His nose had been broken, and had a tremendous twist to starboard; +and he had lost his right ear in a stabbing affray in the streets of +Lisbon. In the left he now wears a huge gold ear-ring, shaped something +like a nut, with an enormous emerald set in it. Such was the exterior +appearance of the man who was to change both my life and that of others, +Jose Leirya, murderer and galley-slave, then mutineer, and, lastly, +pirate and villain of villains, slayer of hundreds of innocent folk, +slave-dealer, incendiary, and bloodthirsty monster, for whom no death is +bad enough. Remember my description of the man, sirs, for he presents +the very same appearance at the present day. I should know, for but two +short months since I was on his vessel; and, God forgive me, I believe I +was not much better than he. But to continue my yarn. This man came +aboard with about a hundred others; and I perceived at once--although +our jailers did not seem to notice the fact--that there was some kind of +arrangement or understanding between Jose Leirya and a number of the new +galley-slaves. What it meant I did not know until afterwards. We left +Cadiz, and our captain, thinking perhaps that the Mediterranean Sea was +not suitable for his enterprises, determined to take the galley to the +West Indies and try his fortune there. So we started away across the +great Atlantic Ocean. + +"As I have told you, Jose Leirya was chained next to me; but he never +once spoke to me until after we had left the Western Isles. A few days +after that, however, he one evening disclosed to me his plan for seizing +the galley, and I then knew what the understanding had been between +himself and a large number of the prisoners who came aboard the galley +with him. On a certain night--which would fall about eight days later-- +at midnight, on a given signal, all were to rise and overpower the +soldiers and sailors of the ship, seize her for ourselves, and use her +for our own purposes. You will ask, how were we to get rid of our +manacles? Well, it was thus arranged, sirs. Jose Leirya had brought on +board, cunningly concealed in his clothing, a number of small saws, of +exceeding fine temper and sharpness. They would cut through our +manacles as a knife cuts through wood. These he gave out to some of the +slaves, and on the night arranged they were to cut the links of their +iron manacles and pass the tools on to the others. This would, of +course, leave the iron rings round our wrists and ankles, but we should +be free to move and fight; and after we had won the ship we could get +the rings off at our leisure. The saws were given out one by one, the +greatest care being taken that they were not discovered, and immediately +after dark on the eventful night we began to cut our fetters, the galley +being then under sail and the oars laid in. By midnight we were ready, +and waiting for the signal. It came as a shrill whistle from Leirya's +lips. At the sound we all swarmed up on deck; and, as most of the +officers and seamen were asleep below, we quickly overcame the watch. +We gave no quarter, knowing that none would be given to us, and we took +no prisoners. Then, going to the companion-hatches, we cried `Fire!' +and as our former masters came running up in their shirts, they were +seized and flung overboard. None of them suspected any plot, and the +vessel was soon in our hands. + +"We then took counsel among ourselves to elect officers, and determine +upon our future movements. Jose Leirya was, of course, elected captain, +and, for some reason that I cannot make out, I was chosen for first +mate. Then for our plans. We were about in the middle of the North +Atlantic, perhaps a little more than half-way to the West Indian +Islands; so we determined to run there, take a ship on our way, if we +could, and if not, capture one in the first port we could reach--for the +galley was of little use to us for our purposes. Ah! if I had but +known, if I could but have foreseen what was to happen in the future, +what deeds I should be called upon to do, rather would I have suffered +death by torture than have joined in the mutiny! But I did not then +know that Jose Leirya intended to become a pirate, or that he meditated +those awful atrocities that have made men curse his name, and swear to +hunt him down and make his end worse than a dog's! At length, when the +ship had been ours for a matter of fifteen days, and was approaching the +islands, our lookout one afternoon reported a large ship coming up from +the westward. Our hearts leaped with anticipation, but we kept a very +cautious lookout lest she should prove to be a war-vessel. As she came +nearer, however, we saw that she was a large merchant-vessel flying the +flag of Spain--that country that we had grown to hate with a hatred +passing words. She had not noticed us as yet, for we lay low in the +water and had no sail set. As soon, however, as she saw us coming +toward her, she made all sail to escape, and we followed in full +pursuit. Then, finding that we _were_ gaining upon her, she went about, +evidently with the intention of returning to the islands; but she was +doomed to be our prey. Every man of us, even Leirya himself, joined the +crew of oarsmen below, leaving only the helmsman on deck to steer and to +report progress to us below. Thus every oar was fully manned, and we +swept along after her, gaining on her hand over hand, until about the +middle of the afternoon the man at the helm threw us alongside her--for +she was unarmed with cannon and could not fire at us--and we all swarmed +up from below and on to her decks. Such was our ferocity that we +cleared their deck at once, leaving dead and wounded in our path, the +whole of whom--quick and dead alike--we at once flung overboard. + +"We did not require the galley any longer, so we took all her guns and +arms, and furnished the ship with them, sinking the galley afterwards, +and thus hiding all trace of our former crime. We got under way +directly after this, still making for the islands, and then provisions +and wine, of which there were plenty on the ship, were got up, and we +caroused and made merry for the rest of the day. + +"We soon found that the new vessel was not suitable for us; but she was +ere long the means of enabling us to obtain another to suit our purpose, +without any loss of life to us." + + + +CHAPTER TEN. + +WILLIAM EVANS CONTINUES HIS YARN. + +"We were now about two days' sail from the island of Porto Rico, and we +had discovered from the ship's papers that it was from the Port of San +Juan in that island that she had recently sailed. + +"The name of the craft was the _Villa de Vera Cruz_, and our plan was to +re-christen her, alter her rig and general appearance, and sail boldly +into the Port of San Juan, hoping to be taken for some vessel just +arrived from Spain or elsewhere. Then, if unmolested, we should examine +the harbour; and, if it were found to contain any vessel suitable for +our purpose, the plan was that we were to wait for nightfall, and then +board the other vessel by means of the boats, capture her, and sail out +of the harbour again before daylight with both vessels. And when once +well out of sight of land, and reasonably safe from pursuit, all the +survivors of her crew, if any, were to be killed and flung overboard. +All stores, cargo, and guns were to be transferred to the new capture, +and our present craft sunk--as we had done with the galley. + +"It had become a saying with us that `dead men tell no tales'; so it was +agreed to kill every soul we captured, taking care that none escaped us. +We should thus--so we believed--keep our movements secret for some +considerable period at any rate. For--it is useless for me to attempt +to disguise the fact--we had not been in possession of our prize +twenty-four hours ere we had agreed to start piracy in earnest, preying +on all nations, and selecting some nook where we could hide what +treasure we captured. + +"Well, we duly arrived in the roads of San Juan, and anchored well out +of gunshot from the forts, seemingly without exciting any suspicion +whatever. We carefully examined the roadstead, and there, sure enough, +was just the craft for our purpose; but she was lying right under the +guns of the fort. She was a pretty vessel: schooner-rigged, very low in +the water, and--as we found out when we took her--of very deep draught; +broad in the beam, and `flush-decked' fore and aft, with no raised fore +or after castles. We could see, by her open ports, that she carried +twelve guns of a side--nine-pounders they were,--with a long gun forward +of her foremast that threw a thirty-two pound shot. She was therefore +quite heavily armed enough for our purpose, and there would be no need +to transfer our old guns to her when she was captured; and we should +thus be saved a great deal of labour. Her masts were very long and +tapering, with a big rake aft, and from a distance the vessel looked +overmasted; but when one got on board her one saw that her great width +of beam gave her the stiffness necessary to carry such lofty masts with +their corresponding spread of sail. In short, she was just what we +wanted, and, indeed, we could not have had a ship better suited to our +purpose even though we had built her ourselves. Needless to say, we +determined to cut her out from under the guns of the fort, and capture +her, at any risk, that very night. During the day we got up our arms, +loaded our pistols, sharpened up our swords and cutlasses, and got all +ready for the night attack. We were in a fever of impatience to try our +luck, and could hardly bring ourselves to wait until dark, still less +until midnight, which we decided was the earliest hour at which we could +make an attempt. So great was our excitement and impatience that we +strove to allay them by drinking raw spirits continually; and by night +we were mad with drink, the only effect of which was to turn us into a +gang of demons who would stop at nothing. It was perhaps due to the +drink--though we did not know it--that we actually took the vessel after +all; for we encountered a most stubborn resistance; and had there been +any people in the fort, they would certainly have opened fire upon us, +and we should have been killed to a man. Luckily, as it happened, for +us, there was a carnival in progress in the town that night, and nearly +every man in the place was attending it. Those who had not got leave +deserted, and went all the same, even to the last sentry; so that when +we made our attack there was not a solitary soldier in the fort. + +"At length the hour came; we got our boats over noiselessly, and pulled +away toward the schooner. It was dark as the inside of a wolf's mouth, +and there was but little phosphorescence in the water. We pulled with +muffled oars, and were nearly alongside her, when someone on board must +have caught a glimpse of the faint flash as our oars dipped, for we +heard a voice giving the alarm on board in Spanish. Seemingly they did +not want us to know that they were on the alert, and reckoned on giving +us the surprise we intended for them; but we had caught the low words of +warning, and knew that they were ready for us. We laid our boats +alongside one another, and held a whispered council, as a result of +which we very slowly and cautiously pulled round to the farther side of +the vessel, and boarded her silently there, falling upon the Spaniards +in the rear. This was the saving of us, for they had lined the bulwarks +on the other side, and had we attempted to board on that side we should +never have been successful. + +"The fight was fierce and grim, and, strangely enough, silent; there was +not a cry, save the groans and moans of the wounded and dying. We +struggled and fought in silence, and in the dark it was difficult to +tell friend from foe. At length, to make my long story a little +shorter, we drove them below, and, cutting the vessel's cable, made sail +for the open sea. We had agreed to show a red light to our own vessel, +as a signal for her to slip out also, if we were successful; so we +looked round for a red lantern, and presently found one. The signal was +made, and immediately answered by three flashes of a white light from +our old ship, as decided upon before leaving her. Both craft were soon +under way for the open sea, and kept each other in view by the light of +the stars; and at daybreak we could only just see the land. We kept on, +however, until mid-day, to make ourselves doubly safe, by which time we +had run the land out of sight; when both craft were hove-to. Then the +crew of the prize were brought up on deck; and as we were, after our +recent rights, very short-handed, we gave them the choice of joining us +or of walking the plank. They were, for the most part, a rascally lot +of men, and did not need the persuasion of `the plank' to join us; +indeed they seemed glad to have the opportunity. By this means we +replenished our crew, and our total number now exceeded by forty-nine +that which we were before taking the galley. We had, therefore, a crew +of two hundred and twenty-five men, which was a big crew for so small a +ship. But then, as Leirya said, we had to provide against casualties. +Seventeen men walked the plank, rather than join us, and after that we +made the necessary transfer of stores and other material, and sank our +old vessel. We were now ready and well equipped for our piratical +undertaking, and we started at once on our nefarious career. + +"I cannot recount to you all that took place, for many long years have +passed since I first threw in my lot with that scoundrel, Jose Leirya; +but we took countless ships, and accumulated a vast amount of treasure, +the most part of which is buried in a certain spot. I know the bay +where the hiding-place is; but exactly where the `cache' itself is I +know not. Of that, however, a little later on. To shorten my story--of +which I expect you are now heartily tired--I will pass over my life and +experiences during the years that I have been with the pirate, until +about six months ago. But I must tell you first that, what with fights, +disease, punishment by death, accident, and so on, our crew gradually +changed until I and two others, with Jose Leirya himself, were the only +survivors of the original galley-slaves. The other men hated me, and +for some time had been putting about false reports of me, and other +matters to my great harm, until at length Leirya said he would get rid +of me. The men clamoured for my death, for I had often sent others of +them to their death; but Jose refused to kill me, as I had been so long +with him. He promised to maroon me, however, and the scoundrels had to +be satisfied with that promise. They made many attempts, however, to +murder me, but I escaped them all. + +"We did not sight an island for some time, and now, every day, I brooded +over the wrong Jose had done me in listening to the lies of others, and +acceding to their demands, and I determined to have my revenge on him. +He had always trusted me, and did so still, and I had a key that fitted +the lock of his cabin. One day we sighted a ship; and, as it fell calm, +the boats were ordered out to pull to her and capture her. Nearly all +hands went, including Leirya himself, but I remained behind to help look +after the schooner. While they were away, I went into the captain's +cabin, and, finding his keys in the pocket of a jacket of his that hung +there, I opened his private drawer and took out all the papers that were +there, putting back blank ones of similar appearance to those that I had +stolen, relocked the drawer, and replaced the key. I then hid the +papers in my own chest, which I was certain Jose would allow me to take. +I will tell you why I stole those papers. It was because I thought I +should find the key to his hidden treasure among them; and I was not +mistaken. I found it, or what I believe to be it, but it was in cipher; +and I have spent nearly all my time since I have been on the island in +trying to translate it, but have not been able to do so. I know, +however, whereabout the bay is in which the hiding-place is situated. +It is at the east end of the island of Cuba, in latitude 20 degrees +north, longitude 75 degrees west. + +"I have those papers still; and before I die I will give them to you, +Master Trevose. They may be useful to you; and if you can translate the +cipher, why, there are millions there for you, unless, indeed, Jose +Leirya removes them before you can get there. Well, sirs, Jose did not +discover the loss by the time that we fell in with this sand-bank, and, +according to his promise to the crew, I was marooned here; but he gave +me a musket, with powder and ball, and enough provision to keep me for a +year. The men who went in the boat to put me ashore were, however, my +most deadly enemies; and before we reached the shore, and when they were +far enough away from the vessel not to be seen, they dropped musket and +all overboard, leaving me only a very little provision, saying that they +did not wish me to die too soon. Then, after landing me, they returned, +the ship disappeared, and I have seen no sail but yours since they left +me here two months ago. That, gentlemen, is my story. To help you hunt +down that bloody pirate, however, I will tell you that he intended +sailing up through the bays of Honduras and Guatemala, and through the +Yucatan channel into the Gulf of Mexico, to cruise there for merchantmen +sailing to and from Vera Cruz and the other ports. And it is there that +you will find him, sirs. Chase him; run him down; take him, at all +costs, and hang him and his crew from his own yard-arm, and burn his +ship; so shall you exterminate one of the most cruel, ferocious, +bloodthirsty devils who ever sailed the sea, and avenge me, sirs. For I +shall soon die; the hardship and exposure that I have suffered here have +killed me! But now that I have told you my story, I can die +comfortably, for I have only lived to impart my information to someone +else, and so help them to hunt that man down. But see, the dawn is +breaking!" + +The other three had been so intensely interested in the outcast's tale +that the time had passed unnoticed, and the first streaks of dawn were +indeed in the sky. Moreover, the wind had dropped, the rain had ceased, +and the sea was going down. The unfortunate ex-pirate seemed exhausted +by the long recital of his experiences, and looked very weak. Presently +he laid himself down on the sand under his shelter, and fell fast asleep +through sheer fatigue. The others went outside and took a survey of the +beach, and were lucky enough to be able to collect quite a respectable +quantity of wreckage, together with several casks of provisions. And +they could see several more being gradually washed in, so they were in +no danger of starvation, at all events for the present. They at once +began to roll up the casks to the shelter, promising themselves a good +meal before beginning the work of collecting all on which they could lay +their hands. They resolved to collect all that they could, for it was +impossible to be sure as to when the three vessels of Cavendish's fleet +would return; they knew that there were too many vicissitudes in a +sailor's life to permit of their absolutely depending upon anything, and +they therefore resolved to make every possible provision for a lengthy +stay where they were, should such prove to be necessary. That Cavendish +would never abandon them they knew, but it was easy to think of a dozen +circumstances or accidents to defer his search for them indefinitely. + +Roger and the two seamen rolled up a few of the casks to the door of the +little shelter, and, all feeling very hungry, they determined to broach +one of them, as they judged from their appearance that they were +provision-casks. They first glanced at the marooned man, to see if he +had yet awakened from the slumber into which he had so suddenly fallen, +but he was lying in his former position, breathing very heavily, and he +had evidently not moved since they left him. Roger remarked to the two +seamen: "I fear that poor fellow will not live much longer; he says he +is exhausted by exposure and privation, and, looking at him, I can +easily believe it. I hope he will live long enough to be taken on board +the ships, and so be able to tell his story in his own words to the +captain; but unless the squadron appear very soon it will be too late, +for I am afraid a few days will see the last of him!" Then, as there +seemed no fear of rousing him, they went into the shelter to look for +themselves and see how much provision he had left. They found it +without difficulty. There was only about three pounds of ships'-biscuit +left, and two or three strips of dried meat. This was absolutely all +the food that was left, and had it not been for the wreck, and the casks +of provisions being washed ashore, their position would have been very +serious indeed. Jake Irwin had been searching for some cooking utensil, +or some article which could be used as such, and presently appeared with +an iron three-legged pot, which was the only thing in the small +establishment that would serve their purpose. Meanwhile Roger and +Walter Bevan had secured the ex-pirate's only axe, and were busily +engaged in removing the head of one of the casks which they had rolled +up opposite to the little shelter. The top presently came away, and +they saw, disclosed before their longing and hungry eyes, not the +provisions they so much needed, but a hard and rocky mass of caked +gunpowder, made useless and solid by the action of the sea-water that +had penetrated through the crevices of the cask. + +"God help us!" exclaimed Roger. "If all these casks hold nothing but +powder, we shall slowly starve to death. I hoped they would all be +provision-casks; I never thought they would contain aught else!" + +"Never despair, Master Trevose," replied Bevan, "they may not be all the +same. Let us try another cask. We may have better luck this time." + +Disheartened and anxious, they set to work, desperate with hunger, and +beat in the head of the next cask with savage blows. And, oh joy! in +this cask they at length found the much-needed food in the form of salt +pork, with which the barrel was filled. + +"Hurrah," shouted Roger, "we are saved after all!" + +They took out two large pieces. Jake Irwin filled the pot with water +from the spring, and, having soon made a fire, they set the meat on to +boil. The savoury odour of the cooking meat soon met their nostrils and +encouraged them to fresh efforts on the other casks. Strangely enough, +though the first cask opened was filled with spoilt gunpowder, all the +rest of the barrels had good wholesome provisions in them. The second +barrel opened was found to contain ships'-biscuit, the third and fourth +salt pork; the fifth had beef in it, and in one or two more casks they +found further food, sufficient in all to last them for some months +without going on short rations. It was not long ere the meat was +sufficiently cooked to satisfy them, and they went in to call Evans and +acquaint him with the fact that he could now have a good wholesome meal. +They aroused him with great difficulty, and he seemed to be weaker than +ever. He revived somewhat under the stimulating influence of the hot +food, and told them that if only he had had such food a little earlier +it would have saved his life. + +Their meal finished, they got up a few more casks which had meanwhile +come ashore, and gathered more wreckage, piling all their material +recovered from the sea in a place of safety well above high-water mark. +Having at length collected everything in sight on the beach, the next +thing they set themselves to do was to find a suitable spot and erect, +with the wreckage that they had found, a hut large enough to contain the +entire party with comfort. But first, as Roger very rightly observed, +it was necessary and prudent to build a fire the smoke of which could be +seen out at sea, and which might serve as a guide to Cavendish in his +search for the sand-bank should he happen to be looking for it. Their +plan was to feed the fire with damp wood and sea-weed during the day, to +produce a thick smoke that could be seen at a long distance out at sea, +and to put on dry wood at night to make a bright blaze which could also +be seen a long way off. This was soon done, and a site was then +selected for the projected hut. Among the palm-trees on the summit of +the bank were three trees so placed as to form the points of a fairly +spacious triangle. Roger selected these, intending to nail or otherwise +secure planks to their trunks, making a three-sided enclosure; leaving +space, of course, in one of the sides for a door. A roof they believed +they could dispense with, as the trees were not very high, and the tufts +of leaves at their summits were so thick, and grew so close together, +that it seemed very doubtful whether even the furious rain of the +tropics would be able to penetrate them. They found a number of nails +in the planks and timbers which they had collected, and these served +their purpose. Roger, Jake Irwin, and Walter Bevan worked right +manfully at the job of erecting the new hut, and in a few hours it was +finished. Evans, poor fellow, was far too weak to take a hand in any of +the operations, and lay in his shelter almost unable to move. When the +new hut was finished, the builders found the man too far gone to walk, +so they brought some planks and put him on them, carrying him up in that +way. He was laid gently down and made as comfortable as possible under +the circumstances. A pannikin of water was left with him, and some cold +provisions placed near him in case he should feel hungry. The others +then went away to seek further wreckage and casks, but they found no +more. Then they decided to make another shelter wherein to protect +their provisions. It was thought advisable to construct this place near +the new hut; so the old shelter--such as it was--was taken down and +replaced close behind their new structure, and the casks, barrels, and +other perishable matters were placed therein as being safer, as well as +easier to get at at all times. They were now fairly settled down in +their new domain; they had shelter, and plenty of food to last for some +months, even on full rations. There was water in abundance to be had +from the spring, and altogether their lot was far and away more +satisfactory and endurable than that of the poor marooned pirate had +been. Besides, there were now four of them, and they had the advantage +and comfort of each other's company, while Evans had been entirely alone +with only his own miserable thoughts for companions until Roger and his +two seamen made their welcome appearance on the sand-bank. It occurred +to Roger that it would be a very good thing to have a flag and +flag-staff, because their fuel would not last for ever, and with it +would go their only means of signalling to passing ships; so several +narrow pieces of wood were nailed together, and the two seamen, both of +whom were wearing red shirts, sacrificed those garments in the interests +of the community. The lad then split them both down one side, to +increase the area of his improvised ensign, and tied the arms together +to increase the length. This "flag" was then nailed to the makeshift +flag-staff, and Roger and Jake Irwin swarmed up a palm-tree--one of the +three composing the posts for the support of the walls of their hut, +while Walter Bevan passed up the flag and staff to them from below. +Then Roger, with his sword, which he had carried up naked between his +teeth, cut away part of the foliage, and the staff was pushed up through +the hole thus made, the lower portion being secured to the top of the +trunk of the palm-tree. Both men then scrambled down to the ground +again and looked up at their handiwork. There it fluttered, far above +the tufted crowns of the palm-grove, a large red flag at the top of its +lengthy staff, some eighty feet above the ground, and visible, as they +judged, at a distance of at least ten miles out at sea on a clear day. +This, as Roger remarked, gave them an extra chance of being recovered by +the fleet, as the flag would be seen at almost as great a distance as +the smoke from the fire, while the two together ensured their being +sighted by any vessel that approached the island within ten miles. + +Satisfied at last with their work, and seeing that there was nothing +further for them to do at the moment, Roger determined to make a tour of +their little domain; so, leaving Jake Irwin to attend to the sick man +Evans, Roger and Walter Bevan set off. Starting from a point on the +beach opposite the hut, they began their walk, going towards the eastern +end of the sand-bank. They found that the shore was everywhere sand +until they had gone some half a mile and nearly reached the end of the +island, when they came upon a ledge of rocks over which they had to +clamber, and which stretched out for quite a long distance into the sea. +The two ventured out some few hundred yards along the ridge to seaward, +and found that it had deep water on each side of it, the rock seeming to +run perpendicularly down to the sandy bottom. The place struck them as +being an excellent situation for fishing from if only they possessed +hooks and lines, for, peering down into the water--which was clear as +crystal,--they saw all manner of many-hued and beautiful fish disporting +themselves below. They gazed admiringly and somewhat longingly at them +for a few minutes, determining to return later and attempt to catch +some, and then resumed their explorations. They had not gone very far, +and were walking side by side, when Roger stumbled over an inequality in +the surface of the sand. He passed on, taking no notice of the +circumstance, thinking it to be only a stone or piece of rock covered up +by the sand; but Bevan, who had noticed the occurrence, stepped back, +and, dropping on his knees, began to clear away the sand with his +fingers, presently revealing to Roger's wondering eyes a number of eggs. + +"Whatever are those?" exclaimed the lad, hardly able to believe his +senses. "I suppose they are eggs; they look like eggs; but I have never +before heard of eggs being buried in sand." + +"These, Master Trevose," responded the man, smiling at Roger's +astonishment, "are turtles' eggs, and they are excellent eating, I can +assure you. They will be a grand change of food for us, as will the +fish when we can catch them. Moreover, having laid these eggs here, the +turtle may very possibly come back to this spot to lay more. We will +look out for her, and if she returns we must turn her over on her back +and then go back and fetch Jake, who will help us to carry her to the +hut. We need not worry about fresh meat now, Master Trevose. If we can +catch turtle we shall have meat enough to last us for some time." + +"I am rejoiced to hear you say so," returned Roger. "But why turn the +turtle on her back, should she make her appearance?" + +"Well, sir," replied the man, "the way of it is this. By turnin' a +turtle over on its back you can always make certain that, if you're +obliged to go away and leave it, you'll find it in the same place when +you come back; because if a turtle's laid on its back it can't turn over +again by itself, and so is perfectly helpless and unable to move." + +There were fourteen eggs in the "nest" in the sand; so Roger took off +his coat, and, tying the arms together, made a sort of bag of it, into +which he carefully put a few of the eggs. Then, carrying his parcel +very carefully, they resumed their journey. They found no more eggs at +that time, and discovered nothing further of importance, and shortly +afterwards arrived back at the hut, having completed their walk round +the islet. + +Irwin reported that the man Evans had called for water, and had seemed +in great pain, but had revived a little after drinking, and was now +again asleep. + +The two explorers deposited their burden of eggs, and told Jake of their +hopes regarding the turtle, arranging to go down again later and watch +for the creature, knowing how important it was to their health to secure +as varied a diet as possible. But before setting out again they put a +few of the eggs into the hot ashes of the fire and baked them in their +shells. When they thought they would be sufficiently cooked, they took +them out of the ashes, and roused Evans up with the news that another +meal was ready for him. + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN. + +DEATH OF WILLIAM EVANS, AND APPEARANCE OF A PIRATE VESSEL. + +It was with the utmost difficulty that they at length succeeded in +arousing the unfortunate man to a sense of his surroundings. Ever since +their landing on the sand-bank the poor fellow had been sinking with +startling rapidity. It seemed as though prior to their appearance he +had kept himself alive by a sheer effort of will, for the sole purpose +of relating his story and putting the avengers on the trail of his +former captain; and, this done, the strain was relaxed, and nature was +claiming her due. Evans at last sat up with great difficulty, passing +his hand over his forehead and gazing at his companions and around at +the new hut as though he had never seen either them or it before. + +The three on-lookers felt an infinite compassion for the unfortunate +outcast; and although he had been, by his own showing, a party to the +most dreadful atrocities, yet Roger and the seamen felt that it was not +for them to judge him. They recognised that he had never been a willing +participator in the horrors he had described, and in their opinion he +had fully expiated his offences by the suffering and agony of remorse +which he had endured on the sand-bank. Roger tenderly supported the +emaciated frame in his arms, and tried to coax some food down the sick +man's throat; but he weakly pushed away the hands of the would-be +benefactor, and, the light of reason presently returning to his eye, he +said he could eat nothing, but pleaded for a draught of water. This was +at once given him, and, seeing that the man was too weak to swallow +anything solid, Roger ceased to persuade him. In a few minutes the poor +fellow was again sunk in a profound stupor. As no more could be done +for him, the others turned their attention to their own meal, and, being +ravenously hungry, did full justice to the food before them, averring +that they had never in the whole course of their lives tasted anything +half so enjoyable, thus conclusively proving the truth of the statement +that "hunger is the very best sauce." + +Having at length satisfied their appetites, it was considered quite time +to go and wait for Mistress Turtle to make her appearance. So away they +went, and, the distance not being great, they soon arrived at the spot, +where, sure enough, they saw a fine large turtle. They had been none +too cautious in their manner of approach, as they hardly anticipated +finding her there so soon, if at all; and, directly they appeared over +the ledge of rock, away she went as fast as she could for the sea. But +Roger, who was a very fast runner, soon got in front of her and headed +her off; and a few seconds later the men came up, when their united +efforts were sufficient to turn her over on her back, after which she +was safe. Bevan then drew his knife and cut off the head, which was +thrown away; and then, making fast a rope which they had brought with +them to one of the fins, they dragged the carcass off, and at length got +it to the hut. They then started to cut it up, one of the fins being at +once dropped into the pot and stood on the fire to make soup, that the +sick man might have something more nourishing than water to drink. Then +they put away as much as would keep fresh until they had used it, and +the remainder they hung out in the sun to dry, after cutting the flesh +into strips, thus ensuring for themselves a plentiful supply of meat for +some time to come. They all now felt somewhat more comfortable in their +minds, for they were certain that with the fish they hoped to catch, and +an occasional turtle or two, with a further possibility of eggs now and +then, and, above all, a plentiful supply of water, they would be able to +hold out until the fleet came back to take them off their temporary +prison. + +Having removed every particle of flesh from the shell, Irwin signified +his intention of taking the latter down to the water's edge to clean it +thoroughly, as it would then afford a very handy and useful receptacle +for water, and it would be further very useful as a bath; for it was +highly dangerous to attempt bathing in the sea, the likelihood being +that the adventurous swimmer would be snapped up by some voracious shark +before he had been a minute in the water. He therefore went off, +dragging the shell after him, while Bevan returned to the turtle's nest +for the remainder of the eggs, and Roger busied himself with the +simmering turtle soup, also taking a few strips of the meat and impaling +them on pieces of wood in readiness for the next meal. Having performed +this part of his duty he strolled away down to the beach to watch Jake +clean the turtle's shell. As he came in sight of the beach, what was +his surprise to see Jake Irwin in the water up to his arm-pits, reaching +out as though endeavouring to get hold of some object just beyond him. +The man did not see Roger, and continued his strange antics; but +presently he got hold of what he was after, which had the appearance of +a small keg that seemed to be about as much as he could conveniently +carry. He then turned round and began to make his way ashore again, +carrying his prize with him. He glanced up, saw Roger, and shouted: "I +have something here, Master Trevose, which will be very valuable to us +if it is what I believe it to be." He soon waded out and flung down a +small barrel on the sand at his feet. + +"Why," said Roger, "what is that? It is a barrel of some sort, as, of +course, I can see; but what do you suppose its contents to be?" + +"Well," responded the sailor, "as I was getting water to clean the +shell, I saw some object washed up and then taken out again by the +undertow; so I determined to get hold of it if possible; and next time +it rolled in I made a grab at it, but missed it; then I ran out after +it, and, after making several attempts, managed to get a hold of it, and +brought it ashore; and here it is. And I think it valuable because it +looks to me like one of the ship's spirit-casks. It may be brandy, and +if the brandy has not been spoiled by the salt water getting at it, it +will be a great blessing to that sick man Evans, and may even save his +life. And it may save ours too, if we get taken ill; for there is no +knowing when the fleet will be here again." + +"Very true," responded Roger. "I do not believe that the skipper will +give up looking for us while his ships hold together; but, as you say, +it may be a long time before we are rescued, so it is as well to secure +everything we can lay our hands on. Meanwhile, let us take the barrel +up to the huts and open it, and see if the contents are what we hope +them to be, and whether they have been reached by the sea-water, and +spoiled, or not." + +Then, each taking an end of the barrel--which was one of those small +casks called breakers, holding about twelve to fourteen gallons, and +therefore very weighty,--they carried it up to the hut, where they found +Bevan just returned with the remainder of the turtle's eggs. Irwin at +once set to work to remove the bung of the cask, while Roger went into +the hut and fetched out the only small vessel belonging to the little +community, a wooden mug capable of holding somewhere about a pint and a +half. + +A few moments more and Irwin said: "Ready, Master Trevose?" + +"Yes," replied the lad. + +"Then, here you are, sir." + +Roger slipped the mug in front of the hole, and caught the liquid in it +as it came gurgling out. He let the mug fill, and then the bung was +returned to its place and driven home with the hammer. So far as colour +and smell were concerned there could be little doubt that the liquor was +brandy, as Irwin had surmised. + +Roger was not greatly addicted to the use of spirits, being, indeed, +exceedingly temperate; he therefore considered himself but a poor judge +of its quality. Nevertheless he sipped at the contents of the mug, and, +having tasted, said that, so far as he could tell, the stuff was good +spirit enough, and at any rate he was certain that it had not been got +at by the salt water. Bevan and Irwin then each took a taste--a pretty +long taste it was too, for they returned the mug to Roger empty,--both +pronouncing it to be the finest brandy of France that had ever passed +their lips. They, being seamen, would have very much liked some more; +but Roger pointed out that the spirit must be regarded as medicine only, +and must be carefully conserved for use as such if ever any of +themselves should be taken ill. The men fortunately had sense enough to +see that Roger was right in what he said, and agreed to the liquor being +kept for use in case of necessity. + +It was now time to prepare the next meal, and this was done; a perfect +feast of eggs, turtle steaks, bread, and turtle soup constituting the +"spread". Evans was again aroused, and given a few spoonfuls of the +soup, with a liberal allowance of brandy in it. He seemed too dazed to +enquire where all this nourishing and wholesome food had come from, but +managed to swallow his portion, and it revived him so much that he sat +up without assistance. His faculties seemed to return to a certain +extent, and presently he asked for more. This was given him, +supplemented this time by a small quantity of brandy and hot water. The +spirit seemed to do him more good than anything else. The light came +back gradually to the fast-dimming eyes, and a spot of colour made its +appearance in his ashen face. He swallowed with great difficulty; but, +taking his time, he managed to eat a very fair quantity of food for a +man sick nigh unto death, and the food, together with the stimulant, +revived him so much that for a time Roger thought that with care, +constant attention, and good food they might even now save the man's +life after all. But the effect was only transient, and it was not long +before he had to lie down again; his eyes lost their fire, and he +gradually dropped back into a stupor similar to that from which he had +been aroused to take his meal. + +Roger was greatly moved by the poor wretch's condition, and was very +quiet and reserved for the remainder of the day; the two sailors, +however, had seen more of the world and its vicissitudes than the lad, +and it did not affect them at all. When night fell, all retired to +their improvised couches, it being considered unnecessary to keep a +watch; for they replenished the fire so thoroughly before turning in +that it would burn until morning. And if the ships should by any chance +happen to sight the island during the night, they must inevitably see +the fire, built as it was on the highest point of the bank, and, seeing +it, would know that the castaways were alive on the island. They would +then naturally heave-to until daylight. + +Day dawned, and all hands turned out, the invalid, of course, excepted. +Breakfast was cooked, and they sat down to the meal with very hearty +appetites, despite the fact that upon looking round them the horizon was +found to be bare of ships. Evans was again roused from his now constant +stupor, and managed to take a little soup and brandy; but he immediately +afterwards sank back again exhausted, and relapsed at once into his +usual state. The two seamen went away to fish from the reef running +into the sea close to where the turtle was taken, and Roger remained in +camp to look after Evans. + +The men had not long been absent on the fishing excursion, and Roger was +busy in the hut, when the sick man moved, turned on his side, and, +opening his eyes, fixed them on Roger's face. A sepulchral voice issued +from the man's lips, and Roger understood him to ask that he should come +close to his side. He, of course, immediately acquiesced, and lay down +on the ground beside the man, so that his lips might be level with +Roger's ear, and thus enable the poor fellow to speak without further +weakening himself by raising his voice. The man asked for some brandy, +and Roger at once gave it to him. This revived him a little, and he was +now able to speak, though in a very low, weak, and husky voice, in which +the near approach of death could now be heard. It was clear, indeed, +that the invalid was sinking fast, and that he earnestly wished to +communicate something to Roger before he died. First he asked the lad +to see if the two sailors were anywhere near. The boy told him that +they had gone fishing; but this did not satisfy him, he would have Roger +look and make sure. To satisfy him, therefore, Roger went outside and +took a look round, and, the men being nowhere in sight, he went in and +reported the fact to Evans. Evans then signed to the lad to come closer +and sit down, so that he could speak directly into his ear. Pulling +himself together with an effort, he said: + +"You have been very kind to me, young man, and I am going to recompense +you by giving you the papers that I stole from Jose Leirya's cabin, also +the cipher, which, when translated, will put the owner of it into the +possession of that scoundrel's enormous treasure--always provided, of +course, that Leirya has not already returned ere this and secured it +himself. But I do not think he has; for, as I told you at the end of my +yarn, when I left him, or rather when he left me here, he was going for +a cruise in the Mexican Gulf. As I mentioned, the treasure is hidden +somewhere on the shore of that inlet at the east end of Cuba, the +latitude and longitude of which I gave you. But you will have to +ascertain the precise locality of the treasure for yourself by +translating the cipher; for I do not know it, nor does any other living +man, except Jose Leirya himself. You will perhaps say that some one of +those who helped him to bury it must know, and doubtless they did--once; +but of those who left the vessel to bury the stuff with Jose not one +ever returned to the vessel, or was heard of afterward. The crew of the +ship so stood in awe of our captain that they dared not remonstrate or +make any enquiry; but we were all convinced in our minds that he did +away with those men by poison, and buried them in the brushwood near the +beach. There were seven men to bury the treasure with him, and, big and +strong as he was, and is, he could not have killed them all openly, or +in fair fight. Jose may, or may not, know by this time that I have the +key to the hiding-place of his treasure; but if he does he will not dare +to remove it and attempt to bury it elsewhere; for all in the ship are +aware of what took place when he first buried it, and none would go with +him again to assist him, and he could not undertake the job alone. +Besides, he has always expressed the utmost confidence that no one could +ever translate the cipher without the key, and that he carries in his +own brain; so he will almost surely leave his wealth where it is. I do +not want your seamen to know, for those men could not keep silence; the +news would soon be known to all, and then, of course, it would no longer +be a secret. The papers I have not examined; I merely looked at them to +make certain that the cipher was there, and, finding that it was, I +troubled no further. But you had better examine them, as there may be +something of value among them. I told you in my yarn that we had a +driver on the galley named Alvarez, who left her before Jose Leirya came +aboard, or if I did not, I intended to. Well, I must tell you that +there were originally two copies of the cipher, and Alvarez, whilst an +officer in a Spanish ship of war, employed an agent of his to join the +crew of the pirate vessel and steal the cipher, if possible, as Alvarez +had heard all the circumstances relative to the treasure from one of his +spies, of whom he employs a great number. This spy obeyed his orders, +but was only able to secure one copy, leaving the other, which I now +possess. We discovered the theft while lying in the very harbour where +the treasure is hidden; but the spy got to hear that all was known, and +sprang over the side, intending, of course, to swim ashore. But as he +went he was followed by a shower of bullets, and we saw him no more; so +I feel very certain that he lies at the bottom of the bay, and that +Alvarez did not get the cipher he wanted." + +Thought Roger to himself: "I'm pretty certain he did, and, what is more, +I know now that he had it in his cabin aboard the _Gloria del Mundo_, +and this man little thinks that I have the very paper he is talking +about in my pocket at this very moment; for it must be the same." He +said nothing, however; and the dying man resumed: + +"You have therefore no rival to fear except Jose himself; and if you +should destroy his ship and himself--as I hope your captain will do when +you have told him my story--you will be certain of vast wealth, provided +that you can translate the cipher, which I believe you will certainly be +able to do, for all that Jose says as to its impossibility without the +key. Now I am exhausted with talking so much. Please give me a little +more brandy." Roger did so, finding the man too weak to lift the mug to +his lips, and almost too far gone to swallow. Having recovered +somewhat, he continued in a weak voice, taking a packet from his pocket: +"And now, here is the packet of papers, and the cipher is with them. +Keep them safely by you, and part with them under no circumstances or +conditions whatever. If you do this your fortune is certain." + +He ceased speaking, and his head fell heavily back on his hard couch. + +Roger sprang for more brandy, and lifted the poor fellow's head, but he +appeared lifeless. Roger wetted his lips with the spirit, and presently +they parted sufficiently to enable the lad to pour a little into his +mouth. This was gradually swallowed, and Roger poured in a little more, +which was also taken; and in a few seconds a heavy sigh escaped the lips +of the sufferer, and his eyes opened. But there was a glaze over them +that told its own tale. The white lips opened, and Roger, bending down, +heard the last words that Evans ever spoke. + +"God bless you, sir," he said, "and keep you safe! Keep your promise to +me, sir. Good-bye! I die now, and am glad!" The eyes went duller +still, the lips ceased to move, the body seemed to stiffen, and grew +suddenly cold. Roger knew that the end had come, that the poor fellow's +troubles were at last over, and that he was at rest. + +Roger remained for some moments sitting, and lost in thought; then, +rising, he placed the blanket over the dead man's face and went outside +the hut. He determined to go and find his two sailors, and inform them +of what had happened, so that they might come and assist him in burying +the body at once; for in that climate it was necessary to bury a body as +soon as possible after death, for sanitary reasons. + +The lad had not gone very far from the hut when he remembered that he +was still holding the packet of papers in his hand; so he slipped them +into the pocket where he always kept the other cipher. But as he did so +he paused for a moment and then drew the papers forth again, determined +there and then to compare the two ciphers, for he felt almost positive +in his own mind that the two ciphers would be found to be identical. He +therefore sat down at the foot of a palm-tree in the shade, and, undoing +the packet, compared the two papers, finding, as he anticipated, that +the ciphers were written in exactly the same terms. "Therefore," +thought Roger, "the spy of Alvarez managed after all to evade the +musket-balls fired at him, and succeeded in conveying the cipher to +Alvarez. No wonder that the Spaniard was so anxious to find his papers +that day in the cabin of the _Gloria del Mundo_!" + +Having satisfied himself on this point, he returned the papers to his +pocket, buttoned up his jacket again, and continued on his way to find +the sailors. They presently made their appearance, thus saving him the +trouble of searching for them, and he saw that they were laden with as +much fish as they could carry. They explained that they had caught far +more than was necessary for present use, but that they intended to try +the experiment of drying it in the sun, even as they had done with the +turtle's flesh, thus--in the event of success--providing a store of food +against any contingency that might arise. + +Roger, of course, returned with the men, and on the way back recounted +to them the fact of poor Evans's death, and of his desire to bury the +body at once. + +The three were soon back at the hut, and, choosing a spot at some +distance from it, dug a grave in the sand with sharpened pieces of wood, +as they had no other implements. The hole having presently been made +sufficiently deep, they returned to the palm-grove, and laying a blanket +on the floor, placed the inanimate body thereon. Then, Bevan taking one +end of the blanket and Irwin the other, they carried the corpse away to +its lonely grave, and reverently laid it therein. This done, Roger, +kneeling by the grave-side, said a prayer, whilst the seamen stood by +with bared heads, after which the sand was shovelled back, and a small +mound raised over the grave. + +The death of Evans affected the three survivors more or less during the +remainder of the day; they were all very silent and thoughtful, and +turned in early to sleep. About midnight Roger awoke with a vague sense +of some impending evil. He turned and turned again upon his hard couch, +but found it impossible to sleep. After a time he began to feel that +there was a something missing to which he had been accustomed. He +racked his brain over and over again, vainly trying to remember what it +was, but for some time without success. Then it came suddenly upon him +that the usual faint reflection of the glow which the big fire at the +beach had been wont to throw round the hut was absent. Quickly getting +into a few clothes, he stepped out of the hut, and saw that the moon in +her first quarter was rising high in the heavens, giving just sufficient +light for him to distinguish objects faintly. He therefore did not take +the lantern with him, but at once walked away down to the beach, where +he found the fire out and cold. They had forgotten to replenish it +before turning in for the night. He took out his tinder-box, in order +to get a light, when he happened to look up, and to seaward. And there, +before his astonished gaze, he saw a vessel riding at anchor about two +miles from the shore. In the first paroxysm of his joy, Roger was about +to call aloud, imagining the craft to be one of the vessels of +Cavendish's squadron; but on looking again, and studying the craft more +closely, he saw that she was altogether different from any of the +vessels in the fleet. He was wondering who or what she could be, when +Evans's description of a certain ship flashed across his mind. Yes, +there she certainly was, exactly as Evans had described--the black, +long, and low-lying hull, the flush deck, the schooner rig, and the +enormously tall, tapering, and raking spars! Yes, in that moment Roger +knew her for what she was. + +She was the pirate schooner of Jose Leirya! + +The man had doubtless missed his papers, and, guessing who had taken +them, had come back to secure them. Evidently knowing the bad landing, +Leirya was waiting for daylight before attempting to send his boats +ashore. + +"Six hours more of darkness!" thought Roger, and he bounded back to the +hut as fast as he could go. He awoke the two seamen, and told them all +in a few words. They were naturally overwhelmed with consternation, not +knowing what to do. But said Roger: "I have a plan that may possibly +save us. We must put all our provisions back in the casks, and bury +them in the sand. Then we must hide everything that we brought ashore, +leaving out only poor Evans's belongings. The new hut we must, of +course, leave--they will think that Evans built that himself,--but we +must remove from it every trace of our own presence on the islet. Then, +poor fellow, we must unearth his body and lay it in the hut, covering +him up. When they come ashore in the morning, as of course they will, +they will see that he is recently dead, and will not dream that he has +been once buried already, if we are careful to remove all traces. It +will naturally be thought that he died here alone and untended. We must +be very careful to efface every sign of our presence here, and leave +only such things as Evans had when we arrived, or may be reasonably +supposed to have collected from the beach. Then, as to hiding +ourselves--At the extreme seaward end of the rocks, where you to-day +caught your fish, there is a hollow big enough to conceal a dozen men; I +particularly noticed it when I was on the spot. We must take some food +and water, and hide there until the pirates leave. They will not +attempt to land at that place, for the reason that a boat could not be +safely put alongside the rocks; and if we carefully hide everything +belonging to ourselves they will not suspect that anyone else is here, +and will not search. Now we must be quick, for our lives depend upon +it. If we are found we shall certainly die horribly. Quick now, men! +we must do everything that has to be done, and be safely hidden before +daybreak, or we shall be seen." + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE. + +NARROW ESCAPES OF THE CASTAWAYS--THE SQUADRON HEAVES IN SIGHT AGAIN. + +The seamen needed no second bidding. From Roger's description it could +be none other than the pirate vessel, and both knew what their fate +would be if they were so unfortunate as to be discovered by the pirates. +Rapidly throwing on their clothes, they came out of the hut, and an +examination of the vessel over the top of the bank convinced them that +Roger's statement was only too true. + +"How about the flag though, sir?" said Bevan. "If they have seen that-- +and it is almost certain that they have--they will think there are +others here, and will search. It will be no use hiding then; for if +they believe anybody else to be here, they will search till they find +us." + +"I think we need not greatly trouble about the flag," responded Roger. +"They will imagine that poor Evans set up the staff and flag before he +died, in the hope of attracting attention; they will hardly trouble to +examine it closely enough to discover that it is made of two red shirts. +Besides, for aught that they know, Evans might have taken two red +shirts ashore with him in his chest when he was marooned. No, it +matters not if the flag has been seen. But come along, men; every +moment lost now only increases our danger." + +They forthwith set to work in grim earnest, labouring for their lives. +The casks were rolled out of the store, and holes were scooped in the +sand for their reception. To bury them was not a long job. They took +care, however, to set aside some provisions and water for their use +while in hiding. Next came the job of burying their simple utensils, +such as they were, and also the shell of the turtle. Then there was the +gruesome task of digging up the body of poor Evans. It had to be done, +and the sooner the better, as Roger said; so all three went to the +unpleasant duty. The mound of sand was removed, the tilling taken out, +and they presently came upon the body. The sand was brushed from the +hair and clothing of the corpse, and it was then carried to the hut, +placed in its previous position, and covered with the blanket in which +it had been buried. + +This completed their preparations for the pirates' landing--for it was +certain that they would land; otherwise why should they have returned to +the island? Their work had lasted longer than they thought, and away to +the east the first sign of dawn was apparent by the time they had +finished. They knew the marvellous rapidity with which the day comes +and goes in those regions, and recognised the need for haste if they +were to gain their proposed place of concealment unperceived; for there +would certainly be sharp eyes on board the pirate, looking for the first +sign of the marooned man. They therefore took, each man, his share of +the provisions, and, keeping carefully below the concealing top of the +sand-bank, started to run at their utmost speed for the ledge of rocks +which was to be their refuge. + +Meanwhile daylight was coming with terrible rapidity. The shore +extremity of the ledge of rocks was reached after what seemed an +eternity, and they began their passage out along it as fast as they +could go. It was dangerous going among the rocks, but danger, frightful +danger, spurred them on. Looking seaward they could make out the hull +of the pirate vessel quite distinctly, and they all prayed that they +might not be so easily perceived. At last they reached the hollow among +the rocks, which was to be their haven of refuge, and tumbled over one +another into it. + +Having at length got their breath, Jake Irwin put forward the sensible +suggestion that they should take their morning meal at once; and they +proceeded to do so, all, however, with a very unpleasant feeling that it +might quite possibly be their last. They finished with a hearty draught +of brandy-and-water, to put some spirit into them after their toilsome +night's work, Bevan and Irwin having taken especial care to bring a good +quantity of the liquor along. Then they scrambled cautiously up and had +a look at the schooner, taking care to remain well hidden themselves. +They were, in their present position, much nearer to the pirate vessel +than when they first saw her, and, as the sun got up and shone on her +stern, they could, with some little difficulty, make out her name--the +_Black Pearl_,--which was painted in large red letters across her +counter. Presently signs of returning life were apparent on board, and +soon afterwards a boat was filled with men and lowered. It pushed off +as soon as it touched the water, and made for the shore. + +How fortunate was it, thought Roger, and how much like a special +dispensation of Providence for their safety, that they had forgotten to +replenish the fire on the night before! Had it been burning, the +pirates would have known that living beings were on the island, for +Evans's body gave evidence that it had been dead too long for them to +suppose that a fire lit by him would still be burning. The remains of +it they certainly would see, but they would doubtless believe that Evans +had made it, and that it had gone out after his death, little dreaming +that at the moment when they let go their anchor the ashes could have +been scarcely cold. + +While these thoughts were passing through Roger's mind, the boat landed, +and her people got out and proceeded quickly up the beach. A shout +presently announced that they had caught sight of the new hut, toward +which all hands at once wended their way. For some time nothing was +seen or heard of the pirates; but eventually three of them went down to +the beach again, and, entering the boat, pulled off to the ship. + +"Going to inform Leirya that the victim of his cruelty is dead," +whispered Roger to Bevan; and the latter nodded. + +After the boat had remained some few minutes alongside the _Black +Pearl_, a man of enormous size was seen to descend the ship's side and +enter her, when she again pushed off, and was pulled shorewards once +more. + +"I'll stake my allowance of grog for the day," whispered Jake Irwin to +the two others, "that that man in the stern-sheets there, handlin' the +tiller, is Jose Leirya hisself, comin' ashore to make sure that the man +is really dead, and to secure they there papers what Evans said he stole +from the cabin; that's what's brought him back, I'll warrant. It's a +pity you didn't remember, sir, to take 'em from the body. Evans said +they was vallyble." + +Roger, according to his promise, did not inform Jake that he had the +papers in his possession at that moment. + +"Ss--sh!" whispered Jake, suddenly withdrawing his head from its point +of lookout, "here they come! God in heaven! why don't they go back to +the ship now they see as Evans is dead? What more do they want? +Surely, sir, we didn't leave nothin' about that'd show 'em we was here, +did we? I thought we cleared away all our traces." + +"So we did," replied Roger, "so far as I can remember, that is. It is +perhaps only by chance that they are coming this way." + +The men came nearer and nearer, and ventured out a little way along the +rocks. Presently they heard a voice at some distance away shout in +Spanish: "Ha, you, Gomez, go out to the end of that ledge and see if the +water is deep enough for boats to lie alongside the rocks." + +A voice replied: "Ay, ay, Captain!" from a point so close to them that +its owner must have come almost to their hiding-place without the +fugitives either seeing or hearing him. + +The three looked at one another, and then, as if the same thought had +come to each of them at the same moment, they with one accord advanced +cautiously and stationed themselves behind a rock by which the man must +pass to reach the edge of the ledge. Here, where they now were, +everything that might transpire would be screened from the others, +unless some of them were following Gomez out along the ledge. But they +must risk that. Crouching low, and as silent as watching cats, they +waited for the man Gomez. + +In a moment or two they heard his footsteps on the rocks, and his heavy +breathing. Nearer and nearer he came, and now he was almost on them! +Then with a spring they had him, and he was down among the rocks before +he could utter a sound. Quick as lightning Jake pushed a handful of +sand and sea-weed into the Spaniard's mouth, and clapped his hand over +it to prevent its ejection, Roger and Bevan at the same instant seizing +the man's arms and legs. The eyes of Gomez were staring and starting +out of his head with mortal terror at this utterly unexpected attack. +Jake drew his knife. Roger shook his head violently in dissent, but +Jake whispered hastily: "It must be, sir; we can't help it; it is his +life or ours!" + +Roger turned his head away, and the next moment he heard a horrible +choke and gurgle, while the body writhed violently as he held the arms. +A flood of something hot rushed over his hands and arms, and he felt +quite sick. + +"Now, sir, quick!" said Jake. "It's our only chance. There's an +overhanging ledge of rock here. We must take the provisions, and this +'ere corpse, and git into the water, floatin' under the ledge until they +goes; for when this chap Gomez is found to be missin', they'll search +and find us if we don't do as I say. We must risk the sharks!" + +There was clearly nothing else for it; so they slipped in, taking the +corpse with them, and all got under the ledge--which quite concealed +them--and supported the dead body, that it might not float away and +betray them. + +The proceeding was fraught with danger, as sharks swarmed in those +waters, and the blood that was oozing from the Spaniard's body would be +almost certain to attract those monsters of the sea,--their scent for +blood being very keen. The flesh of the fugitives crept, and the +knowledge that one of them might be seized kept them in a state of +perfectly agonising suspense. They had been in for some time, and the +position was becoming unendurable when: "Gomez, Gomez, where are you? +Hasten, man; we do not want to wait here all day!" came from the very +ledge underneath which they were floating, and holding, meanwhile, the +corpse of the man who was then being called by name. + +"Where can he be, curse him?" growled the same voice. "What has become +of the lazy hound? Carrajo, I will flog him when we get on board! +Gomez!" + +There was, of course, no reply. + +"He may have fallen in and been drowned, or taken by a shark, +perchance," suggested another voice. + +More oaths followed, together with a lengthy dissertation on Gomez's +ancestors, both immediate and remote. At this moment Bevan gave vent to +a suppressed gasp, and, following his gaze, the others saw the dorsal +fins of several sharks which had evidently scented the blood still +draining from the body of the slain man, and were now searching for +their prey. Then the concealed listeners heard--from someone who had +evidently been to the edge of the ledge to search for the missing man-- + +"I have looked, Captain, and Gomez is nowhere to be found." + +There were more awful oaths from Jose--for it was indeed that renowned +and most notorious scoundrel,--and then he again spoke: + +"He must have fallen in and been drowned--curses on him for a clumsy +fool! Yes; and there are the sharks that have taken his worthless +carcass. Come, you; we will return to the schooner. It is useless to +search further for him, for he will never come back." + +Meanwhile the sharks were coming ever closer and closer still, while the +footsteps of the pirate and his companions were heard retreating. The +minds of the hiding trio _were_ much relieved at the departure of Jose +Leirya and his villains, and particularly at Jose's mention of his +intention to return to the vessel; but the suspense of waiting for them +to retire, while the sharks were edging ever nearer and nearer, was +awful. The triangular fins of these terrible monsters were now darting +rapidly hither and thither, and at every dart the voracious fish came +nearer than before. Momentarily they expected to see one or more of the +fins disappear below the surface, and they knew that when that happened +they might anticipate seizure by the shark a few seconds later. But as +yet the fins remained visible on the surface of the water. + +Poor Roger was nearly fainting with anxiety and apprehension, while +Bevan was rapidly becoming exhausted. At length the strain on their +nerves became unendurable, and Jake Irwin said: "I don't think those +fellows'll hear us now, even if we splash; and if we don't splash, they +sharks'll be at us in a few minutes. Anyhow, I'm a-goin' to risk it!" + +Forthwith they all began to splash vigorously, although as yet they +dared not shout. The sudden commotion of the water, coming after the +dead silence that had previously reigned, startled the great fish, and +the fins instantly scattered in all directions, to the great relief of +the fugitives. But, as Jake said: "That won't keep 'em off very long; +they've smelled blood, and they'll be around again directly." + +He then swam a stroke or two, very cautiously, out from under the ledge, +in order to have a peep at the pirates and ascertain whether they were +still in sight. They were, but if they pushed on without stopping they +would be out of sight in a few moments. But the question was--would +they be able to keep the sharks at bay for that short time? It was +doubtful, to say the least of it, yet they dared not move out of their +hiding-place just then, or the pirates would be certain to see them +making the attempt. The inaction was beginning--nay, had long since +begun--to tell on their nerves, and poor Roger felt as though he could +scarcely refrain from shrieking aloud, so great was the tension. And +those terrible fins were again gathering about them! One by one they +came edging back, ever nearer and nearer. At last the fugitives could +endure it no longer, and, taking the corpse by the shoulders and turning +it into a more favourable position for his purpose, Bevan said: "They'll +wait no longer. Now, when I push this 'ere dead body off, jump for your +lives back on to the ledge. We must risk being seen; for they sharks +don't mean to be denied." + +He then gave the corpse a violent push seaward, and the three made a +simultaneous scramble for the safety of the ledge. Jake was up first, +and extended his hand to Roger, while behind them they heard the +clashing and snapping of jaws, and the sudden rushing wash of water, as +the body of Gomez was torn to pieces by the hungry monsters. + +The commotion in the water was terrible, and horribly suggestive, as the +sharks snapped and struggled and fought for their share of the prey; and +they thought that surely the pirates must hear, and, hearing, return to +see what all the noise was about. Roger was out now, and only Bevan +remained in the water. Jake and Roger stretched out their hands, Bevan +grasped them with his own, and, with a simultaneous pull, out he came, +landing on his knees on the rock. But only just in time; for even as he +left the water a huge shark, of at least twenty-five feet in length, +came dashing at him with such furious determination that he ran his +great snout, with its rows of shining saw-edged teeth, right up on the +ledge, so close as actually to graze Bevan's body. The man, however, +hastily sprang aside, capsizing Irwin and Roger, and the three fell +pell-mell into the hollow in the rocks which had served as their former +hiding-place. + +Safe at last; but what a narrow and providential escape! And now to +discover whether the pirates had seen them. Jake climbed up to his +former coign of vantage, and as soon as he clapped his eye to the +peep-hole he held up his hand in warning. Roger shuddered. "After +all," thought he, "after those hairbreadth escapes, have they seen us, +and are they coming back to take us?" + +Jake now came creeping cautiously down, and whispered that the pirates +had not gone off as far as they had anticipated; indeed they were not +very far away even now. They had evidently not seen the fugitives leave +the water, but they were all standing in a group, looking back toward +the hiding-place, and, so far as Jake could judge, they seemed to be +listening. Bevan now crawled up and had a look, and then beckoned to +the rest. They climbed up alongside him, and, through the peep-hole, +saw that the pirates had now relaxed their attitude of attention, and +were once more walking slowly away, ever and anon taking a backward +glance over their shoulders. Presently they disappeared from sight +behind the rocks, and the fugitives breathed more freely. + +Roger said: "If now they but go straight off to their ship we are saved. +I trust they will not chance to stumble upon any of our buried +provision-barrels, or they will at once suspect our presence and search +until they find us; for I can see that they are not altogether easy in +their minds over the strange disappearance of Gomez." + +"I don't think that's so, Master Trevose," replied Bevan. "'Tis only +our fancy. For my part, I'm convinced that they believe Gomez have +fallen off the rocks and been taken by a shark. But how pale you do +look sir! better have a drop of brandy." + +But, alas! there was no brandy. In their haste to escape from the jaws +of the sharks both brandy and their small store of food had been +dropped, and were both now, without doubt, safe in the maw of one of the +monsters. Roger turned still more pale, and Bevan put his arm round his +shoulder to support him. Presently his head fell back, and he went off +in a dead swoon. The experiences of the last few hours had been too +much for the poor lad, and overstrained nature would bear no more. + +"He'll soon come round, Jake," said Bevan. "Get a drop of water, if you +can without being seen. Bring it in your hat and slop it on his face; +that'll soon bring him to." + +Jake accepted the suggestion, and presently returned without having seen +anything of the pirates. They soused Roger's head and shoulders with +sea-water, and the boy soon recovered, feeling a little ashamed of his +weakness. + +"Don't you worry yourself about that, Master Roger," replied Jake. +"I've seen men stronger and older than you faint for less than what +we've just gone through." + +Roger was soon himself again. They took another look round, and this +time they saw Jose Leirya and his crew down on the beach, preparing to +get into their boat. + +"We'd better not leave this here spot until we see 'em up-anchor and get +well away," advised Jake. "For all we know they may come ashore again, +and if they was to do that a'ter we'd left our hidin'-place, 'twould be +all up with us." + +The others agreed to this proposal, and watched the boat pulling away to +the ship. She soon got there, and was forthwith hoisted inboard, and +presently the watchers saw her sails fall from the yards, while up came +the anchor, the schooner canted, the sails filled, the vessel gradually +gathered way--and she was off! The three felt strongly inclined to give +a hearty cheer; but prudence prevailed, and they remained silent. +Presently, however, they got out of the hole in which they were +crouching, and made their way cautiously along the ledge, taking the +utmost care to keep always out of sight of the schooner; and by and by +they reached the beach, and over the top of the near-most rock saw the +_Black Pearl_ rapidly growing smaller in the distance. By crawling and +creeping and dodging behind anything big enough to conceal them, they +finally gained the back beach, and then, having the ridge between the +pirate vessel and themselves, they set off at a brisk pace for the hut. +When at length they reached it they found that nothing had been +disturbed, but the body of Evans had evidently been searched, and was +now lying upon the sand, instead of where they had left it, on its +improvised couch. Their first act was to unearth the cask of brandy and +take a good draught apiece, feeling that they both needed and deserved +it after what they had gone through that morning. + +Then Evans received his second burial. Poor fellow! his inanimate body +had been put to a strange use; but they felt that, could he know, he +would not in the least object. + +The provisions were next got up and re-stored, and then they found time +to take a look at the retreating pirate vessel. Yes, there she still +was, now very small to their view, yet hardly as far off as they had +expected her to be. + +They continued to gaze for a few moments longer, and were just about to +turn away, with relief and thankfulness in their hearts, when they saw +the pirate vessel hurriedly setting some additional canvas; then +suddenly she bore up and went off on the other tack, presenting her port +side instead of her stern to the island. + +"Now, what's the matter?" queried Jake; "he's headin' away south for La +Guayra way! But what's he in such a tearin' hurry for?" + +"Can't make it out at all," answered Bevan. + +They felt their sleeves plucked, and, turning round, beheld Roger +pointing, but unable to speak, toward the horizon on the side of the +island opposite to the pirate ship. And there, at last, they perceived +the fleet, hull-up above the horizon, in plain sight, with every sail +set, carrying on after the pirate at their utmost speed. + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN. + +THEY ARE RESCUED AT LAST--CAPTURE OF THE PIRATE SHIP BLACK PEARL AND HER +CAPTAIN, JOSE LEIRYA. + +It was scarcely possible that Cavendish should not recognise the +island--both by sight and from his reckoning--as the one on which Roger +and his little crew had been left; yet all three of the vessels +comprising his squadron were cracking on in chase of the _Black Pearl_, +and evincing not the least interest in the sand-bank, which they were +leaving on their starboard beam. + +"Well," ejaculated Roger, "having come thus far, one at least of those +ships might have hauled in and hove-to long enough to send a boat ashore +and take us off. Mr Cavendish will scarcely need all three of his +vessels to capture that one craft. But I expect old Cary has recognised +the schooner as Leirya's ship, and the captain is determined to make +sure of her, trusting that we shall be able to hold out here until he +has captured her and found time to return for us. Still, the pirate may +lead them a long chase, lasting perhaps for several days; and if they +are going to catch him, I should like to be aboard to help in the fight +with Jose." + +The seamen said nothing, but it was clear that they fully shared Roger's +disappointment as they stood staring at the fleet of ships that went +sailing past at a distance of some four or five miles--too far off for +the castaways to be observed from their decks. + +Suddenly Bevan uttered an ejaculation, and, turning, ran at full speed +to the hut, and reappeared in a moment with an armful of wood from the +stock which they kept for replenishing the fire. He cast this down on +the beach, and, kneeling beside it, proceeded with feverish haste to +strike a light from his tinder-box. + +"Quick!" he exclaimed; "get some damp wood, wet sea-weed, anything you +like that'll make a smoke; only for goodness' sake be quick! It's our +only chance!" + +The other two, infected by his excitement, at once ran to do his +bidding, but they were quite at a loss to understand the reason for such +violent hurry. + +Having secured several armfuls of varied material, just damp enough to +make a good smoke, but not sufficiently so to extinguish a fire, they +returned and tossed it on the flames, which Bevan had now succeeded in +causing to burn brightly. + +"More! get more!" said he; "and look sharp about it! Quick! quick!" + +"Yes; all right, Bevan!" laughed Roger; "but what is all this tremendous +hurry for? Even if the captain does not now take us off, he will come +back for us as soon as he has captured the pirate." + +"Ay, ay; but don't you see, man," answered Bevan, forgetting in his +excitement the deference due to Roger as his officer,--"don't you see, +man, that the captain's notion is that the pirate have been here and +captured us, and that we are now aboard that there _Black Pearl_ of +his'n? He'll catch her if he can, and bring her to action; but when +that's done there'll be a great slaughter o' both sides, and, supposin' +that the schooner isn't sunk with all hands, Mr Cavendish won't find us +when he boards her. And, not findin' us, he'll believe as we have been +murdered and throw'd overboard, or else he'll think that we're among the +dead as'll be unrecognisable. Then, thinkin' us dead--for he'll not +dream that it's been possible for us to have hidden ourselves here and +escaped these ruffians--he will continue his v'yage wi'out troublin' to +come back here; and here we shall remain, perhaps till we die. That's +the reason why I'm so anxious to attract their attention afore they runs +out o' sight of us; for, if we're not seen now, you may depend upon it +we may as well make up our minds to remain here for the rest of our +lives. What would he be sending all his vessels in pursuit for, if he +didn't believe as we're aboard that there _Black Pearl_. Ye see, sir, +what I'm thinkin' about is this. They few barrels of food as we've got +won't last us for so very long, even if we goes on short commons. And +we can't always reckon on catchin' fish and turtle, or gettin' eggs, and +a few months 'd find us in the same plight as was pore William Evans +when we first came ashore on this here island. Oh, I pray that they may +be keepin' a sharp lookout aboard they ships!" + +The fire was now blazing up bravely, and the castaways industriously +continued to toss on damp fuel, so that a dense column of smoke was now +ascending high in the air, being sheltered from the wind by the +palm-grove just behind them. The three men were careless as to the +pirates seeing the smoke now, knowing that even Jose, with all his +reputation for courage and daring, would not venture to return in the +teeth of the British squadron, to attempt to secure them; yet they could +not help speculating as to what the pirate must be thinking, or what his +feelings must be, now that it was borne in upon him that people had been +on the island, though he had not found them. He would, of course, be +able to make a shrewd guess as to Gomez's fate, and Roger could picture +to himself the fellow's disappointment and anger. For, having failed to +find the papers, in search of which he had returned to the sand-bank, he +would almost certainly arrive at the conviction that the unknown people +on the island, who had evaded his keen eye in so mysterious a manner, +had come into possession of them. To have been so near the recovery of +his cherished papers, and yet to have missed them! Roger could picture +the man standing on the quarterdeck of the _Black Pearl_ gnashing his +teeth in impotent fury, and shaking his fist at the island as he +beheld the column of thick smoke rising from it. But for the +swiftly-disappearing pirate none of them cared a jot, since were not +their own dearly-loved ships near them? And, if God were good, would +they not soon be once more treading those white decks that they knew and +loved so well? Meanwhile, however, it seemed as though, even after all, +there might be a slip 'twixt the cup and the lip; for, despite the +smoke-signal that they were sending up, the ships were holding +persistently on their course after the pirates. + +More fuel was piled on, and the smoke went driving away to leeward in +dense clouds. Still there was no response or sign from the ships of its +having been seen, while they were now drawing rapidly away from the +island. + +"I reckon," said Jake, "that they're all lookin' at the chase, aboard +they there craft. Why can't some of 'em take a squint aft at the +island? Then they would see us, or the smoke at any rate." + +As if in answer to his complaint, and immediately following upon it, +they saw a stream of flags float up from the first vessel--which, as +they rightly guessed, was the ship that Mr Cavendish had taken command +of as his flag-ship,--and a few moments later the answering signal was +displayed from the rearmost vessel, which, evidently obeying the signal, +now came round upon the opposite tack, with her bows pointing toward the +island. + +They were seen! At last they were seen! All their troubles and anxiety +and waiting were now over; hurrah! hurrah!! hurrah!!! The three +castaways seemed to lose their heads completely. They shouted, leaped +into the air, shook hands, and embraced each other, cutting all kinds of +capers, and, in short, behaving like very madmen in the reaction of +their joy after waiting for so long in suspense. For now all recognised +very clearly the truth of what Bevan had said, as to their being seen +and rescued now or never. The ship approached rapidly, under the +influence of the fresh breeze, seeming literally to grow out of the +water, and looking, with her clouds of gaily-painted canvas, like some +huge bright-plumaged tropic bird. Presently they saw her yards thrown +aback, and she came up into the wind, remaining hove-to until a boat was +lowered, and then slowly tacking to and fro opposite them. The watchers +on the beach saw the boat lowered down the side, and the men scramble +into her; then they saw the sunlight glitter on the oar-blades as they +dipped into the water and the boat shot away from the parent vessel's +side. She came rushing toward the beach as fast as the arms of a dozen +lusty men could drive her, her coxswain standing up in the stern-sheets +and peering eagerly ahead at the island. The foam curled white and high +about her stem, showing the great speed at which she was being forced +through the water. + +Said Bevan to Jake: "The skipper have evidently give his orders that +they're not to waste any time on the road, or in takin' of us off. Just +look you at the speed of that there cutter! I expect, if we could only +but see him, that he's stampin' up and down his quarterdeck, bitin' his +nails with impatience to be away again a'ter that _Black Pearl_; and +prob'ly swearin' at this boat's crew for bein' a set of lazy lubbers in +not puttin' her through the water faster." And he laughed. + +A sudden thought struck Roger. "Jake and Bevan," said he, "cut away up +to the hut and get those fresh provisions down here to the beach; we +have a lot of fresh meat still left, and I know how tired a ship's +company gets of salt provisions. That turtle meat will prove a very +welcome change of food for them. So away you go, and look sharp, for +those people will not want to be kept waiting." + +Off went the two men, and presently returned with the dried turtle +flesh, which they laid down on the beach in readiness to be put aboard +the cutter. The small brandy cask was also conspicuously present. Jake +Irwin's quick eye fell upon it. Said he to Roger: + +"Before we go, sir, let's have one more drink, `to the Isla de +Corsarios'; for I'm sure 't has proved a very good friend to us." + +Roger thought that there would be no harm in such a proceeding, so he +raised no objection, and Bevan, pouring out a generous allowance into +their wooden beaker--which he had brought down to the beach without +being asked--handed it to his officer for the latter to take the first +drink. He took it, drinking the toast, and the other two followed his +example, helping themselves liberally, and smacking their lips after it +with much satisfaction depicted on their bronzed countenances. + +The cutter was by this time quite close, and Jake, standing on a rock, +pointed out by signs to the coxswain where he could come alongside and +float in deep water, thus allowing them to embark easily and also put +the little stock of provisions aboard. The craft came dashing up until +within a few fathoms of the place indicated by Jake, and then the crew, +as one man, threw in their oars, and the boat glided rapidly alongside +the rocks, coming to a stand-still just opposite the spot where Jake was +standing. + +"Now then, jump in quick!" yelled the coxswain, who happened to be also +second officer on board the _Elizabeth_, the vessel which was waiting +for them to come on board. "Look sharp, our captain is in all haste to +overtake the squadron before it comes up with that pirate craft yonder. +You need not imagine you are going to take that stuff aboard; I cannot +wait; I have not the time." + +Irwin and Bevan looked somewhat taken aback at this brusque harangue, +but Roger, stepping forward, said: + +"I do not know you, sir, but my name is Roger Trevose, and I am an +officer on board the flag-ship. This is fresh turtle meat, for the most +part, and I am sure your captain would not grudge the few extra moments +spent in taking that aboard." + +"I beg your pardon, Mr Trevose," replied the officer; "I did not +recognise you. My name is Reynolds--Ralph Reynolds, and, as you say, +seeing that your cargo consists of fresh meat, I think we can spare time +to take it aboard, pressed though we are for time." + +In a brace of shakes the meat was transferred to the boat. Roger, +following the two seamen, stepped into the boat, and she instantly +shoved off. Roger sat next to Ralph Reynolds in the stern-sheets, and, +as they made their way at top speed towards the ship, Reynolds said to +Roger: + +"Young man, let me tell you that you and your two seamen have had a very +narrow escape from imprisonment on that island for the remainder of your +lives! We were running up before a fine breeze, this morning, for that +wretched sand-bank of yours, intending to take you off, when we saw a +craft steal out from under the lee of the island. One of the men aboard +at once recognised her as the _Black Pearl_--the ship of that +arch-scoundrel Jose Leirya. We signalled the commodore to that effect, +and he replied, ordering all the ships to make sail and chase; for, you +see, there is no doubt he very naturally supposed that the pirate had +carried you off with him. Of course, sooner or later we should have +brought the rogue to action; but that would not have helped you, as by +all accounts he is the sort of man who goes down fighting his ship to +the very last, rather than surrender, and that, I fully expect, is what +will happen. Then the captain, I take it, thinking, of course, that you +had gone down with the ship, would have dismissed you from his mind; and +in yonder bit of an island you would have remained for the rest of your +lives, or until taken off by some passing ship. The latter contingency, +however, is a very unlikely one, so far as English ships are concerned, +since the island is unknown to the English. And I have a notion that +you would find it much more comfortable to die there, than be taken off +by a Spanish vessel and delivered into the clutches of the Dons. The +fact is, that all hands were too busily engaged in watching the chase to +take much notice of your island. But here we are alongside. Now, men, +up you come on deck smartly, and get that boat hoisted in. Hook on the +falls there, and up with her!" + +Reynolds sprang up the side ladder and, reaching the deck, closely +followed by Roger, saluted the captain, who was waiting for him at the +gangway, and reported himself. + +"Very well," said the captain, "get that boat lifted out the water. She +must be hauled up and secured after we have swung the yards and are once +more on the move. Up helm, Mr Widdicombe, and get way on her!" + +Then he turned to Roger and welcomed him on board the ship; +commiserating with him on his discomforts while on the sand-bank, and +congratulating him upon his as yet unexplained and inexplicable escape +from the pirates. He then recommended Roger to the care of one of his +officers, and, directing Jake and Bevan to take up their quarters and +duties with the other seamen until such time as they could be +transferred to their own craft, turned away to give orders and attend to +the sailing of his ship. + +Even as the cutter had dashed alongside, the vessel, as though impatient +to resume the chase, had paid off and had begun to move through the +water, her bows having been turned in the direction of the other ships, +and the craft herself merely thrown into the wind for a moment to lessen +her way while the boat came up to her and the falls were hooked on. +Then the helm was put up and the ship was away on her old course once +more, cracking on and showing every stitch of canvas to the freshening +breeze, in full and eager pursuit of her consorts and the pirate, the +latter now being hull-down on the southern horizon with nothing below +her topsail-yard showing. The flag-ship was the leading ship of the +three pursuing vessels; and she was distant some nine miles from the +_Elizabeth. El Capitan_--or the _Tiger_ as she was now named--was two +miles astern of the flag-ship, and some seven miles ahead of the +_Elizabeth_; the latter vessel therefore had some considerable distance +to cover before she could overtake her consorts. Night was now +beginning to fall, and the masts of the _Black Pearl_ gradually +disappeared from the sight of those aboard the _Elizabeth_; but the +flag-ship, being so far in advance, still had the pirate well in view; +and now she lighted her three poop-lanterns as a guide to the _Tiger_, +which in turn lighted hers to pilot the way for the _Elizabeth_. The +darkness soon falls in those regions, and in a very few minutes, as it +seemed, night enveloped them like a pall. There was no moon, and, the +night being cloudy, no stars were visible; the blackness, consequently, +was intense. + +All that could be seen was the triangle of lights in the flag-ship, very +dim in the distance, and those on the _Tiger_, shining somewhat more +brightly because nearer at hand. The captain of the _Elizabeth_ +commanded that no lanterns should be lighted on board his ship, and +indeed that no lights of any kind should be shown on board at all. + +"For," said he, "we sail somewhat faster than the _Tiger_ and the _Good +Adventure_, and can see their lights, so that we can tell where they +are. But it is in my mind to have a little sport with good Mr +Cavendish, by letting him find us alongside him at daybreak. We will, +therefore, carry on as hard as our spars and gear will suffer us, all +through the night; and, not to give the others an inkling of our +purpose, will edge away to the westward sufficiently to enable us to +pass the _Tiger_ about a mile to starboard of her, and the same with the +flag-ship." + +At this time it was about two bells in the first dog-watch, and they +could therefore reckon on some ten hours of complete darkness-- +sufficient, as the captain believed and hoped, to allow them to overtake +the other two ships of the squadron. They continued to crack on; and, +as the skipper had enjoined the maintenance of strict silence, the ship +seemed to those on board to resemble some dim phantom vessel, leaping +ghost-like from wave to wave before the strengthening wind. No sound +whatever was to be heard on board save the "swish" of the water +alongside, the low roar of the bow-wave as she plunged through it and +turned it aside from her bows, the weird crying of the wind through her +maze of rigging aloft, and the occasional "cheep" of parral or +block-sheave to the 'scend of the ship. + +At about ten o'clock, much to the captain's satisfaction, the lights at +the stern of the _Tiger_ could be much more distinctly seen; and he +judged that she could at that time be only some four miles distant, +showing that in the past three hours they had gained some three miles on +her, which was good sailing. They were also, at this time, a good mile +to the westward of the starboard quarter of the _Tiger_, and, if +anything, edging a trifle more to starboard of her as they went along. +The reason for this was that the captain did not wish to pass the +_Tiger_ at a less distance than a mile; because, although it certainly +was a very dark night, on even the blackest of nights, if the weather be +clear, there is always a certain "loom" or faint image of a ship thrown +against the sky; and this loom would be visible to sharp eyes unless the +_Elizabeth_ kept some distance away from her consort. + +Little by little they crept up, overtaking the _Tiger_; and bit by bit +her triangle of lights at the stern was becoming merged into one; then +the one light became gradually eclipsed, until at length they could not +see it at all, and by one o'clock in the morning they knew that they +must be running parallel with the _Tiger_ and at a distance of about a +mile and a half on her starboard beam. + +It was possible now to make out the light of her battle-lanterns in her +interior, shining through her open port-holes, through which the gun +muzzles also showed, all in readiness for the attack as soon as the +pirate was brought to bay. As they opened her up, and came abreast of +her, they could see that she was lit up fore-and-aft, and it became +perfectly clear that not only was she cleared for action, but that her +captain had given orders to his men to sleep at their quarters, and thus +be ready for the fight at a moment's notice. + +Having overtaken the _Tiger_, the _Elizabeth_ began to draw ahead +perceptibly, and the brilliantly lighted interior of her consort was +soon eclipsed, while the bright triangle of lights at the stern of the +_Good Adventure_ now showed up clearly about two and a half miles +distant, broad on the port bow. + +Captain Pryce was in great glee, for, if all went well, his little jest +would be a brilliant success, and by daybreak his would be the foremost +vessel of the squadron, and therefore the first to come up with the +_Black Pearl_. + +But where was the pirate? It seemed certain that the flag-ship must +have her in view, since she was standing steadily along on her course; +but not a sign of the schooner could be made out by the people on board +the _Elizabeth_. + +"Surely," said the captain, who, in his keenness, was spending the night +on deck, "we ought by this time to be able to see something of that +craft, a binnacle light, or a glimmer of some sort, to show us where she +is! We are nearly abreast of the flag-ship, and I cannot see a trace of +the _Black Pearl_; yet Mr Cavendish seems to be standing on with +perfect confidence, which he would hardly do were she not within his +view. Still, it may be that he has lost her, and is merely trusting +that she will hold her course, and has the hope of sighting her at +daybreak." + +He had barely finished speaking, when Roger, who had been gazing long +and earnestly into the dusky blackness to the south-west, came up beside +him and said in a low tone of voice: + +"Sir, I have been looking for some time over in that direction, and +within the last few minutes it has come to me that there is a black +something over there--can you not see it, sir?--that is growing very +rapidly bigger!" + +"You are very right, Mr Trevose," replied the captain; "you have done +well to tell me. There is, indeed, something away there; I can make out +the loom of a vessel's sails quite plainly. Now, who or what may she +be? Ah! I have it. The flag-ship is sailing at haphazard after all. +The pirate has doubled and, putting out all lights, has trusted to his +luck to run past the squadron in the darkness. What good fortune for us +that he doubled to starboard, and that I took it into this noddle of +mine to have a jest against the commodore to-night! Had he turned the +other way he would certainly have escaped, as there is no ship over +there to see him, while here are we, with all lights out, and he will +run right into our arms in a few moments. Let her go off a couple of +points, Mr Reynolds." + +Orders were now given by passing the word instead of by drum or whistle, +and in a few minutes the men were all standing silently at quarters, +with battle-lanterns lighted but carefully masked, and everything ready +to pour in a deadly broadside as the pirate came abreast of their ship. + +As she approached, the poop-lanterns on the stern of the _Elizabeth_ +were lighted to serve as a guide to the _Tiger's_ people, who, for their +part, were vastly astonished at their sudden appearance, and a light was +also displayed in the port mizzen rigging, to enable the flag-ship to +distinguish friend from foe. + +Of course all disguise and concealment was now at an end; the pirate had +seen them, but--too late! She was now less than a cable's length +distant from the _Elizabeth_, and as she was bearing up, and before even +her men could leap to their quarters, the _Elizabeth_ had luffed and +delivered her starboard broadside with murderous effect. Down came the +mainmast, severed just above the deck, bringing the fore-topgallant-mast +with it; down on her crowded decks crashed the wreckage, adding its own +quota of killed and wounded to that effected by the guns of the English +vessel. + +The flag-ship had already borne up, and now came foaming down to the +scene of the combat, with the _Tiger_ lumbering along astern. + +The pitchy blackness of the night was illuminated redly and vividly by +the flashes of the guns. The _Black Pearl_, finding escape impossible, +had determined to fight to the bitter end. Her guns were run out, and +they at once opened a galling and well-directed fire upon the +_Elizabeth_, which replied in kind, and the night air resounded with the +report of cannon and small-arms, and was rent with cries, groans, and +screams from the wounded, and shouts and oaths from all. + +The flag-ship now arrived on the scene, and, taking a wide sweep and +luffing up with main-topsail aback under the stern of the _Black Pearl_, +poured in a raking broadside that traversed the whole length of the +pirate's decks, leaving them a very shambles of dead and wounded. + +The artillery tight did not last very long. Anxious to capture Jose +Leirya alive, Cavendish--perhaps not too well advisedly--laid his ship +alongside the schooner, and poured his men on to the pirate's decks. + +Seeing this, the captain of the _Elizabeth_, not to be behindhand, did +the same. Ordering his men away from the guns, and forming them up, he +led them in person over the side on to the decks of the _Pearl_, which +was by this time a scene of dreadful carnage. Blood was everywhere; her +planking was so slimy with it that men slipped and fell in it. It ran +in little rivulets from the scuppers. + +Roger, who followed close upon the heels of the captain, thought +involuntarily of William Evans's description of how Jose Leirya had +captured this very vessel, cutting her out from under San Juan fort in +Puerto Rico; and his tale of how freely the blood flowed on these same +decks then. + +But he had no time for mere thought; his attention was wholly taken up +with the fighting, and the problem of how to avoid being impaled or cut +down by some furious pirate. + +The villains knew that they were fighting with halters round their +necks, and laid about them like very demons from the pit. Cut and +thrust, cut and thrust, they came at the Englishmen, and, headed by Jose +himself, for several moments swept the invaders before them. + +Roger was, as ever, well in the front rank of the combatants, and was +carrying himself right manfully, when he saw one of his countrymen slip +and fall in a pool of blood, losing his sword as he fell. A burly +black-bearded ruffian, whom he had been engaging, instantly set his foot +on the prostrate body, and shortened his hanger to thrust him through; +but Roger, who was engaged with another pirate, nimbly evaded the blow +aimed at him, and, with one spring, like a young leopard, was on the +would-be slayer, and, taking him before he could turn, passed his sword +through the pirate's body with such force that it penetrated to the +hilt, while both rescuer and corpse went rolling to the deck together. +Roger disencumbered himself from the dead body, and, setting his foot +upon it, pulled violently at his sword to get it free again. + +Then another hand was laid over his on the hilt of the weapon, and a +well-known voice said in his ear: "Pull, Roger, lad, pull, and out +she'll come." And out she did come; and Roger faced round right into +the arms of his friend Harry. + +"What, Harry," said he joyfully, "you here! So you were the man whom I +was lucky enough to rescue from that black-bearded rascal just now. How +on earth did you get here?" + +"Yes, lad," replied Harry; "you have saved my life again, and I am once +more in your debt. And as for how I got here, why, how otherwise than +over the bulwarks from my ship? I might rather ask how you came here. +But we must leave our experiences until a more convenient season, or we +shall not live to see the end of this good fight." + +The pirates were fighting now with the fury of desperation, and, +encouraged by the bull voice of Jose Leirya--who seemed to bear a +charmed life,--they prepared to form up into line and attempt with one +furious charge to sweep the English from the decks of their beloved +schooner. + +The Englishmen, however, who were more or less separated and scattered +about the decks, each engaging his own antagonist, saw the move, and +themselves retreated to their own main body in order to strengthen it +for the threatened rally of the pirates. + +At this moment Harry and Roger found themselves isolated from their own +countrymen, and in great danger, as the whole surviving pirate crew was +between them and their friends. + +Luckily for them, however, only four of the enemy turned their attention +to the two friends, the others being too busy preparing to attack the +English main body to think about them. Yet, even as it was, the odds +were quite unequal enough--four stalwart men in the very prime of life, +and hardened by years of toil and activity on the seas, against two +youngsters who were but little more than boys! + +Harry and Roger knew, of course, that they were fighting for their +lives, and as both had their long swords as against the shorter weapon +of the pirates, they contrived to keep them at a safe distance for some +time. + +Meanwhile the pirates had massed together, and the whole body of them, +even to such of the wounded as could stand, and excepting only the four +men who were attacking the two chums, had charged the Englishmen with +irresistible fury, driving them along the deck as chaff is swept before +the wind. After the first rush, however, the Englishmen rallied again, +and were now slowly but surely driving the pirates back along their own +deck, and recovering their lost ground. The carnage was fearful; the +dead and dying were everywhere; the decks were heaped with them; both +sides had lost an enormous proportion of men, and it seemed as though +the fight could only end in both parties being exterminated. + +Roger and Harry were still fighting doggedly for their lives; but their +countrymen were now very widely separated from them, and their strength +was fast-failing them in face of the furious and persistent attack of +their four assailants. + +They were driven back, and still back, until they were forced against +the port bulwarks, and could retreat no farther. Blow after blow was +aimed at them by their foes, and the best that they could do was to ward +off the blows, without daring to assume the offensive. + +They were at their very last gasp, and had mentally resigned themselves +to death, when there came a tremendous shock, throwing the two lads off +their feet only just in time to avoid the final thrusts from the two +pirates, to which fortuitous circumstance they owed their lives. As +they lay on the deck, struggling to regain their footing, they were +trampled on and knocked over again by a swarm of men who were rushing in +over the port bulwarks. It was the _Tiger's_ crew, who had boarded in +the very nick of time. With this reinforcement the English very quickly +turned the tables; and, all massing in one body, swept the deck, +compelling the few surviving pirates--among whom was the redoubtable +Jose Leirya himself--to surrender at discretion. + +The fierce conflict was at last over, and the pirate, long a terror in +the Caribbean Sea, was a captive, while his dreaded but beautiful +schooner, the _Black Pearl_, was a prize in the hands of the English. + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN. + +EXECUTION OF THE PIRATES--A RECONNAISSANCE BY NIGHT OFF LA GUAYRA. + +At the commencement of the fight the pirate vessel had been manned by a +crew numbering well over one hundred men. + +But now her dead lay upon her decks literally in heaps; and, alas! there +were also many English bodies lying among them. Only seventeen of the +crew of the _Black Pearl_ remained alive, among the survivors being Jose +Leirya himself. It was not due to cowardice, or any shrinking from +death on his own part, that he had survived the fight; on the contrary, +he had exhibited a fine degree of courage, and it was only by an +accident, for which he was in nowise responsible, that he was still +alive, and was now standing, with hands lashed behind his back, scowling +heavily at his captors. They, on their side, had suffered almost as +severely as the pirates, having lost an enormous number of men. + +The coming of the sailors from the _Tiger_ in the nick of time it was +that had saved the day, and turned the tide of battle in favour of the +English. Roger and Harry had both had their senses trampled out of them +by the headlong rush of the boarders from that ship; but, as the +circumstance undoubtedly saved their lives, they were not greatly +disposed to grumble at it. Both had soon recovered, and, after +examining themselves to discover whether they were badly wounded or not, +were now engaged in exchanging confidences and experiences, and relating +to each other all that had occurred since their parting prior to the +wreck on the sand-bank of Isla de Corsarios. + +The captured pirate, having been bound securely, were now consigned to +the care of an armed guard, who conducted them below to the hold and +bade them make themselves as comfortable as they could on the ship's +ballast. + +The commodore then called the roll of the three vessels of his squadron, +and found that he had lost no fewer than one hundred and eighty men, +killed and wounded, in the engagement. As for the ships, the _Tiger_ +was untouched, and the flag-ship practically intact, but the _Elizabeth_ +had been somewhat severely mauled. Captain Cavendish's first +instructions were that the vessels should at once proceed to execute +such repairs as were necessary, in order that they should not be at a +disadvantage in the event of a storm overtaking them. But before even +this business could be undertaken came the disposal of the dead. + +With so many slain to deal with, this was necessarily a brief business, +and was accomplished by the simple process of tossing the lifeless +bodies over the side, to find a last resting-place on the sand below, +if, indeed, the multitude of sharks that were swimming round and round +the four vessels did not intervene and otherwise arrange matters. + +This unpleasant duty ended, the decks were washed down with water pumped +up from alongside, and all sanguinary traces of the recent conflict +obliterated. Then Cavendish sent the men who had performed these duties +to aid their fellow-seamen in effecting the necessary repairs to those +vessels that required them, whilst he and his officers made a tour of +inspection of the _Black Pearl_, to acquaint themselves thoroughly with +the vessel, and to secure her papers, arms, and ammunition, and any +valuables that might be on board her. Roger and Harry, having had a +brief chat, followed Mr Cavendish down the companion-ladder, and found +themselves in the vessel's main cabin. This was most beautifully fitted +up, evidently with the spoils which had been taken out of her numerous +captures; but beyond the confines of the captain's cabin the entire +vessel was filthily dirty, eloquently testifying to the objectionable +habits of the pirates; and everywhere they went they encountered +significant traces of the recent furious combat, in the shape of +splintered timbers, riven planking, blood splashes, gashes in the +wood-work from sword and axe-blade, holes made by cannon-shot--havoc and +destruction reigned supreme. But even this could not disguise the +barbaric splendour of the fittings and furniture of the ship. Rich +silken curtains were hung anywhere and everywhere where they could be +fastened; thick carpets from Turkey and Persia and India were strewn +wholesale on the soiled planking. Every available space on wall or +bulkhead was ornamented with some trophy or another. Stars of pistols, +swords, hangers, boarding-axes, and pikes were hung wherever there was +room for them. Roger noticed some pieces of exquisite and priceless old +tapestry beside the carriage of one of the main-deck guns, that had +probably served as a curtain, but was now torn down, trampled upon, +smeared with blood, and blackened with powder smoke. The officers of +the vessel had evidently each enjoyed a cabin to himself, furnished +according to the occupant's taste; and in every one there were articles +of enormous value, while the silken cushions, thick-piled carpets, and +dainty coverlets to the bunks might have led one to suppose that the +cabins had been inhabited by delicate ladies rather than by savage +pirates, to whom murder was an almost everyday occurrence. They all +exhibited, however, as might have been expected from such a crew, the +most execrable taste in arrangement. All the colours of the rainbow +were combined together, and every article seemed totally out of place in +all the apartments save that belonging to Jose Leirya himself. + +The cabin belonging to the captain was situated at the stern of the +vessel, and for windows had two large openings leading out on to a +little stern gallery, where Jose could walk in privacy and be in the +open air. This cabin had received the full benefit of the raking fire +from the flag-ship, and presented a scene of lamentable destruction. + +Instead of the two windows leading out on to the gallery there was now +an enormous gaping hole, the lower edge of which was within a +hand's-breadth of the water, which occasionally rippled in as the +schooner rose and fell upon the swell. The rich hangings of silk and +tapestry were pierced and rent; long gashes had been gouged out of the +floor by the round-shot; fragments of silver and gold statues and +candlesticks lay here and there scattered in confusion, and it was +evident that had a single living thing been in that cabin at the moment +when the broadside was delivered it could not possibly have escaped. +Yet, strangely enough, there were three splendid pictures hanging still +upon the cabin-walls absolutely uninjured, and these Cavendish gave +orders to be at once removed and sent on board his ship. + +In a magnificently inlaid and ornamented bureau there were found all the +private papers belonging to Jose, together with the ship's log, both of +which provided, later, the most gruesome reading. + +Of valuables there were none to be found in the drawers, or hidden away, +and Roger mentally decided that the man, for his own safety, had never +allowed valuables to accumulate on board the _Black Pearl_, but had +always transferred them, at the first opportunity that presented itself, +to his hiding-place at Lonely Inlet. But he kept his surmise to himself +and Harry. + +The vessel's hold, which was next investigated, contained nothing of any +importance or value, and, in fact, the whole vessel yielded but small +return for their careful search. + +The officers now returned to the deck, to find that it was once more +broad daylight; and each went back to his own vessel for breakfast. +Roger, having said good-bye to the captain and officers of the +_Elizabeth_, and thanked them for their kindness in taking him off the +island and afterwards, pushed off to the flag-ship with Mr Cavendish +and Harry. Jake Irwin and Walter Bevan, poor fellows, would rejoin +their shipmates no more. They had both fallen, fighting bravely, and +were now lying fathoms deep in the blue waters of the Caribbean Sea. +Little did they imagine, when they left the Isla de Corsarios the day +before, that death was so close to them! + +After breakfast Cavendish called a council of officers in his own cabin, +to discuss the fate of the surviving pirates and their schooner. + +The decision was soon made as to the pirates, and it was that they +should be hanged, one and all, from the yards of their own vessel. As +to the vessel herself, it took somewhat longer to arrive at an +agreement; but in view of the fact that she was little better than a +shattered wreck, and that, even if she were to be repaired, they had +lost so many hands that they could not very well spare the men to handle +her, it was finally decided that she should be destroyed. + +This business settled, the council broke up, and the members of it went +on deck. The flag-ship's boats were then manned, and the officers of +the fleet went on board the schooner. Orders had meanwhile been given, +on board the vessels of the squadron, that their crews should turn up to +witness the execution. The captives were then brought up on deck, and +Cavendish himself read the sentence over to them, and bade them prepare +for death. They met the announcement with the utmost callousness. One +or two of them exchanged remarks in a low tone of voice, and one man was +actually heard to laugh outright. As for Jose Leirya, he heard the +sentence with absolute indifference, and, when asked whether he had +anything to say, answered not a word. + +A whip was now rove from each of the fore yard-arms of the _Black +Pearl_, and a gun on the forecastle loaded with a blank charge. A +number of men were then detailed to run aft with the tail end of the +whip as soon as the noose should have been fitted round each man's neck. + +Mr Cavendish decided that he would hang the captain first, so that +every survivor of his crew might witness the death of their leader. + +All being now in readiness, four seamen walked up to Jose Leirya and, +stooping, cut the bonds that secured his feet. The pirate stood still +for a moment to allow the blood to circulate once more freely through +his limbs, and then, bound though his arms were, he wrenched himself +free from the grasp of the four seamen and made a furious dash towards +the side of his ship, actually succeeding in scrambling on to her +bulwark, with the evident intention of drowning himself, and thus +evading the indignity of death by hanging. + +The seamen, however, who had been hurled right and left by his herculean +effort, closed upon him promptly, and, with very little ceremony, hauled +him off with violence, hurling him to the deck and themselves falling on +the top of him and holding him down with their weight. Yet once again +he succeeded in wrenching himself free from the men's clutches and, +staggering to his feet, made another dart for the ship's side. But he +was pounced upon again, and once more they all fell upon the deck +together. + +A taunting laugh rang out from the group of bound ruffians who were +awaiting their fate, and stung the English sailors to madness. That one +man, and he partly bound, should keep four stalwart seamen at bay was +too much for their temper. They rushed at the pirate again, and this +time seized him securely; then, tripping him up, they slipped a running +bowline over his ankles and hauled it taut, thus rendering the man +helpless. Yet even then they could scarcely keep their grip on him, so +enormous was the strength with which he turned and twisted in their +grip. + +At length, after an infinity of trouble, they succeeded in dragging him +to the forecastle; the running noose attached to the whip was brought up +to the pirate and slipped over his neck; Cavendish then gave the signal, +the gun was fired, the men holding the end of the whip ran aft, the +seamen holding the man sprang aside, and the pirate's body, still +struggling and writhing, went flying aloft, to stop presently with a +jerk as it reached the jewel-block, and dangle at the end of the fore +yard-arm, still plunging and struggling with such violence that the yard +itself fairly shook. It was some considerable time before the struggles +ceased. The body was allowed to hang a little longer, and then the rope +was cut, and the corpse plunged downward into the sea among the sharks, +whose clashing teeth and noisy splashes gave conclusive evidence as to +the whereabouts of the pirate's last resting-place. + +The remainder of the ruffians betrayed not the slightest emotion at the +terrible fate of their leader, but went silently and calmly to their +doom, without struggling as their captain had done; and very soon the +dread ceremony was over, and the pirates had met their deserts. + +The only matter that now remained was the destruction of the notorious +_Black Pearl_. + +Powder and shot there were in plenty, on board the squadron; so Mr +Cavendish decided to give his ships' crews a little practice in gunnery. +By this time also the necessary repairs to the vessels engaged had been +executed, and all was now in readiness for the resumption of the cruise. +Sail was therefore made, and the vessels drew off to a distance of +about three-quarters of a mile, when they hove-to and began to practise +on the pirate vessel with their guns. The flag-ship was the first to +make a hit, which she did between wind and water with her bow-chaser. +The other vessels then got the range, and hulled the _Black Pearl_ with +nearly every shot. + +Harry and Roger, once more together on the flag-ship, had already +recounted in detail all their adventures during the time that they were +separated, the one on the sand-bank and the other on the ship driven +away to leeward of the island by the storm. They were both now standing +amongst the crew of the bow-chaser gun, watching the effect of every +shot with the utmost interest; and Roger presently asked the captain of +the gun to allow him to have a shot. The man, who was much attached to +the lad by reason of many little acts of kindness received, made no +demur. The gun was reloaded, and Roger, with the firing-match in his +hand, cocked his eye along the chase of the piece, watching until the +heaving of the ship should bring the sights to bear on the hulk. +Presently the _Good Adventure_ dipped to a large wave, and Roger, who +was watching like a cat, applied the match. There came the sharp report +of the discharge, and, as the smoke swept away, the young man had the +satisfaction of seeing his shot strike the vessel right between wind and +water, just at the side of a hole where two others had penetrated. This +shot of his, of course, much enlarged the already large hole, through +which the water of the Caribbean was now pouring like a sluice; and it +was seen that the pirate vessel was on the point of foundering. Even as +they watched, the craft seemed to settle visibly deeper in the water, +and she rolled heavily two or three times. A few seconds later her +stern was seen to lift high and her bows to point downward; steeper and +steeper became the angle of her decks and then, with a slow forward +movement that quickly became a diving rush, she plunged to the bottom, +vanishing from their sight in a whirl and froth of water. + +Such was the end of the _Black Pearl_! For years she had been the +terror of all the seas around the West Indies and the coasts of New +Spain. She had been a floating den of vice, murder, and every +conceivable form of infamy, and now her lawless and adventurous career +had terminated in her becoming a target for the guns of the avengers of +the evil she had wrought, while her captain and surviving crew had swung +from the yard-arm of their own vessel before she herself was destroyed. +Her career of murder and terror and destruction was ended at last, and +the evil spirit of those seas was laid. + +All now being over, and it being no longer necessary to carry out their +original intention of scouring the Mexican Gulf for the pirate--chance +having so fortunately thrown him in their way,--it was decided to carry +out the other part of their programme; which, it will be remembered, was +to run to La Guayra and see whether there were any plate ships lying +there, and, if so, to endeavour to cut them out and capture them. A +course was therefore set, and the little squadron bore away to the +southward and eastward in the direction of that port. + +Roger and Harry had now a little time to themselves, and, having so +recently witnessed the destruction of the pirate vessel and the +execution of her notorious captain, the conversation naturally enough +turned to the cipher which Roger had in his possession. He had already +acquainted his friend with the news that the marooned man, William +Evans, had given him an exact duplicate of the cipher that he had in his +possession, taken from the _Gloria del Mundo_, and the two lads now +seriously turned their attention to its translation. But again it +foiled them; they could make nothing of it. They did not wish to +communicate the fact of it being in their possession to any third +person, and ask his advice, knowing that a secret shared with others is +usually a secret no longer. So he and Harry kept their knowledge to +themselves, and went over the remainder of the papers which Evans had +given Roger, as well as the cipher. These also proved to be of no +importance to anyone but their former owner, as they merely contained +notes from the log and diary of the pirate, and, indeed, consisted +mainly of a skeleton account of his many atrocities, recorded for who +knows what reason. The two lads could not see that any useful purpose +would be served by retaining these memoranda; they therefore tore them +up small, and consigned them to the deep. For this reason the history +of the doings and exploits of the pirate Jose Leirya has never been +written, and never will be. + +As the two lads could make nothing of the cipher, they put it away, +deciding not to worry their heads about the matter until some time in +the future, when they should have nothing else to occupy them. The two +ciphers were therefore folded up into a neat packet, and, with the +assistance of a needle and thread, Harry sewed the little parcel into +the lining of his friend's coat, in such a position and manner that even +a rigorous search would probably fail to disclose the presence of the +papers. + +"Now you have them quite safe, my friend," said Harry, "and so long as +you stick to your jacket you need never be afraid of losing that +cryptogram. And should anybody ever come, by any chance, to know that +you have the key to Jose's treasure, he will never be able to find it, +even if he attempts to rob you." + +"No, Harry, I should say not," laughed Roger. "But I do not think I +need fear that any person will try to rob me of that cipher; for, so far +as I know, the only person now alive who is aware that one existed is +that evil-looking fellow Alvarez, and he will imagine, doubtless, that +the cryptogram went down with all the other papers in the Spanish +man-of-war. And he probably thinks, too, that I also went down with +her. At any rate it was not his fault that I did not." + +"Well," objected Harry, "I am not so sure about his thinking you were +drowned on that occasion, for, when we sent him and the other Spaniards +ashore at Lonely Inlet, I saw him looking very hard at you, and I +believe he recognised you, for he spoke to another man beside him, and +tapped his own pocket. The other fellow then looked at you, as though +to make sure of recognising you again, and nodded to Alvarez as they +both went down the side. Yes, I am pretty sure that Alvarez recognised +you, and I think it not unlikely that he may have some idea that you saw +him looking for something in that cabin, and that when you were rescued +you took with you those papers that he left behind in his fright; and, +if so, he of course believes that you have that cipher in your +possession at this moment." + +"Well, Harry, old lad," laughed Roger in reply, "I do not suppose I +shall ever see Alvarez again, and if I do I shall take care that I do +not fall into his power, you may be quite sure. There is one thing +certain. Now that Jose and his crew are dead, that treasure will never +be found except by us, and only by us if we can succeed in translating +the cryptogram, for there is no one else on earth now who knows even its +locality." + +"Quite true, Roger, my friend," replied Harry. "But I do most sincerely +hope that the possession of that paper will not bring you to any harm." + +The conversation between the two lads was at this moment interrupted by +the cry of "Land, ho!" from above, and both boys ran up on deck to catch +the first glimpse of it. + +"Hurrah!" shouted Roger in great glee. "Hurrah! this shows that we are +not far from La Guayra now, and then for more fighting and adventure, +and perhaps we may be able to get ashore for an hour or two." + +The land could be discerned fairly clearly from the fore topmast +cross-tree, to which Roger and his friend ascended. It showed as a bold +headland, apparently of great height and rocky in formation. + +Having satisfied their curiosity, the two came down from aloft, and, +seeing one of the officers attentively looking at the fast-rising land, +asked him what it might be; if it was anywhere near La Guayra, and how +far away it was. + +"You two youngsters seem very eager to sight land again," replied the +lieutenant, smiling. "I should have thought that you, Trevose, would +have had enough of land for a time, after being so very nearly left +behind on that sand-bank. But, to satisfy your curiosity, I will tell +you. That tall headland that you see yonder, and toward which we are +now steering, is called Cape Oruba, and is the north-north-west +extremity of the island of Oruba. We shall leave that island on our +starboard hand, and as we pass it we ought to see the island of Curazao +in the distance, which island we, of course, leave on our port hand. +Then we head into the Gulf of Triste, and so on to La Guayra. Now, +young men, I have posted you up in the different landmarks that we shall +pass, and you can look them up for yourselves, and see where we are, +from that Spanish chart that you were so thoughtful as to bring with you +from the _Gloria del Mundo_." + +Roger and Harry thanked the lieutenant for the information, and went +below to see where was the ship's actual position. + +Nothing of any interest happened here, and in three days from the time +when they first sighted Oruba Point they were as close in to La Guayra +as they dared venture without further investigation. + +Once more a council of officers was held in Mr Cavendish's cabin, on +board the flag-ship, and a plan of campaign arranged. The squadron, it +was decided, was to lie-to in a little bay not many miles to the +north-westward of the Port of La Guayra. There was no danger of its +presence there being discovered, there being no town or port near; the +cliffs rose up almost perpendicularly from the water's edge, and the +little bay itself was practically landlocked, and thus hidden from +seaward. Then three boats were to be provisioned with food and water +for two days, and, leaving the ships early in the afternoon, were to +arrive off La Guayra about midnight or thereabout. They were to make as +close an investigation of the harbour, and any ships that might be in +it, as could be made with safety. They were to ascertain, if possible, +whether there were any plate ships in the roadstead, and, if so, the +precise positions in which they were lying. They were also to +determine, as nearly as they could, what the chances of a night attack +would be; whether likely to be successful or otherwise. In short, they +were to accumulate all the information they could, without being seen. + +The little squadron--which had been hove-to during the consultation-- +filled away once more, and carefully felt its way into the bay, and, +after many very narrow escapes of falling foul of the rocks and +sand-banks with which the entrance was encumbered, came to an anchor in +safety in the spot where it was to remain until such time as the boat +expedition should return. A boat was provisioned and manned by each +ship in the squadron, and Roger and Harry, who were always ready for any +adventure that promised a spice of danger, pleaded so eloquently to be +allowed to accompany the boat sent by the flag-ship, that Mr Cavendish, +after considerable demur, agreed to their going, at the same time +cautioning them that even a very slight indiscretion on their part might +easily involve the expedition in something nearly approaching disaster. + +The next day, all being in readiness, the boats set off on their +dangerous errand about two bells in the afternoon watch, immediately +after the seamen had taken their mid-day meal. They were accompanied by +the prayers and good wishes for success from all in the fleet, but no +cheering was indulged in, lest perchance some wandering herdsman on the +heights should catch the sound, look for its source, discover the +lurking ships, and hasten away to the city to give it warning. + +They kept as close under the huge cliffs that towered above the narrow +beach as they could with safety, in order to lessen the danger of being +seen to seaward, and after dark pulled slightly farther out to sea to +avoid the possibility of running on some rock which they might see and +avoid by daylight, but not after dark. + +About nine o'clock, Roger, who was away up in the bows of the leading +boat, keeping a lookout, passed the word aft to the officer in charge +that they had just opened up a light, apparently on shore. + +"That's our goal, then," said the officer; "that's La Guayra! And now +to find out whether there is anything in there that it may be worth our +while to attack." + +He then made the signal for the other two boats to close, to give the +officers in command an opportunity for a final consultation. It was +presently arranged that, on entering the bay, they were to separate, and +each was to scour a certain part of the harbour, and join the others +again at three o'clock in the morning at the spot where they parted +company, the bearings of which were to be carefully and accurately +taken. + +La Guayra lies in the hollow of an extensive but open roadstead, and is +built at the foot of a range of huge mountains, which tower up into the +clouds behind it, and at the back of which lies Caracas, now the capital +of Venezuela. + +It was to the extremity of this roadstead that the three boats had now +come, and the twinkling lights of the town were clearly discernible at +some distance. + +Anxiously they scanned the bay for any sign of ships lying there, and +after a few moments they were able to make out certain detached sparks +of light, which they felt certain were the riding-lights of a number of +vessels. It now remained for them to pull quietly and unobtrusively +shoreward, and ascertain what the vessels were, and, as far as possible, +discover their strength, and how they lay for protection from the shore +batteries. + +The oars were therefore muffled with pieces of cloth that had been +brought for the purpose, and, orders having been given that no light was +to be shown in any of the boats for any purpose whatever, they +separated, all making for the several points agreed upon before +starting. + +The boat belonging to the flag-ship had the position of honour, and +therefore of most danger. She was to take a middle course, and pull +down to the foot of the bay, close inshore, and right under the guns of +the batteries; a task so dangerous that, should they by any misfortune +be seen, there would be no hope or possibility of escape for them. In +dead silence they pulled slowly along, peering carefully about them, and +getting ever nearer and nearer to the town. The lights began to show +more clearly, and large objects ashore to assume a somewhat definite +outline. The dark background of the mighty mountains behind the town +could be made out towering far above them, their heads seemingly among +the few stars that were that night shining. + +They were creeping on and inward, steering for a cluster of lights that +evidently betokened the presence of a large vessel at anchor about a +mile farther in, when those same lights were suddenly obscured, and a +little later there came plainly to their ears a swish of water, strongly +suggestive of some vessel moving at speed. At the whispered command of +the officer the boat's crew backed water simultaneously, and brought the +boat to a stand-still, just in time to avoid being run down by a dark +mass that came swiftly, and with no lights showing, out toward the open +sea. As she passed the boat, within oar's-length, they could hear quite +distinctly the sound of voices, and, to their utter amazement, the +speech of those voices was English. The vessel was moving so swiftly +that only a few words could be caught, and these were: "All is well so +far, John, my lad; in an hour from this we shall be out of this bay, +and, once on the open sea, it will take more than--" and the voice was +lost in the distance. + +Roger had, some time before, come aft, and was now by the side of the +lieutenant. + +He said in a hushed voice: "What does that mean, Mr Story? There is +some strange happening abroad this night. That ship had Englishmen +aboard her; yet, so far as we know, there are no English ships beside +ourselves in these seas just now. Besides, why was she carrying no +lights?" + +"'Pon my word, Roger, I don't know," replied Story. "As you say, there +are no other English about here excepting ourselves; yet the people in +possession of that craft are undoubtedly English. Ah! can it be, I +wonder, that these people are English prisoners who are effecting their +escape from the Spaniards to-night of all nights; and, having managed to +get hold of a ship, are now clearing off? Zounds! I believe I am +right, and that is what has happened. This is doubly annoying. First, +because we are very short-handed ourselves, and if we could only have +got those fellows to join us it would have helped us to make up our +crews once more; and, secondly, because their escape will surely be +discovered before long, and a search made, which will render it very +awkward for us. I wish I could somehow contrive to communicate with +those other two boats, and let them know; for, this having happened, it +is high time for us to beat a retreat, or we shall be caught like rats +in a trap! But there is no way, so we had better make the best and most +of it, get what information we can, and then be off back to the +rendezvous to wait for the others, and start for the ships directly they +appear. Give way again, boys; but be silent for your very lives' sake." + +Therewith they went swiftly and silently forward again, and shortly +afterward came close alongside a ship for which they had been cautiously +steering. They discovered that she was a Spanish war-vessel, and her +very presence there suggested a plate fleet, which she was probably +destined to convoy. + +After pulling very cautiously round her, and ascertaining her strength, +they made off toward another group of lights, and, on arrival there, +found another war-ship. This craft was apparently a sister ship to the +first one they had seen, and of the same strength. + +Having ascertained this, and seeing no more lights but such as lay in +the tracks of the other two boats, they turned the bows of the boat +seaward, and, finding that it was well-nigh time for them to be at their +rendezvous, pulled vigorously in that direction. They had taken but a +few strokes when, from somewhere behind them in the town, they heard a +distant clamour, suggestive of voices calling and shouting. + +"Listen a moment," said Story. "Stop pulling, lads; I want to hear what +that is going on behind there." + +The men lay on their oars, and all strained their ears, listening. +Presently the sound rose from a dull murmur to one of greater volume, +and a trumpet pealed out from the shore, answered almost immediately +afterwards by one from each of the warships; and suddenly, from one of +the batteries, a flash of fire rushed out, illuminating for a few +seconds, as does a flash of lightning, the whole bay, and then came the +dull report of the gun. + +"Now, men," said the lieutenant, "give way; give way for your lives! +They have discovered the escape of those other fellows, and will find us +also, if we are not out quickly. Resistance to such overwhelming odds +as we should meet with would be hopeless; so pull, put your backs into +it and make her move!" + +Lights now began to flash out from all parts of the bay, disclosing the +presence of vessels which they had not supposed to be there; and, +indeed, it seemed as though they were surrounded on all sides by craft +of all rigs and sizes. How they had threaded their way in without +falling foul of some of them now seemed a mystery. They prayed +fervently that the other two boats might be making their escape while +there was yet time to do so. + +The men set their backs to the work and pulled like very Trojans, and +the boat shot through the water. Picking out a course that would take +them as far away as possible from the lights now shining all over the +roadstead, the lieutenant steered with the utmost caution, for he knew +that his life depended on it, together with those of the boat's crew. + +At length, after what seemed an eternity, they passed out clear of the +encircling ships; nothing stood between them and the open sea; and in +another hour they took their bearings and pulled to the rendezvous. +Luckily, and to the joy of all hands, when they arrived there one boat +was already waiting, and even as they lay on their oars, the third came +up from the other direction. + +News was now quickly and eagerly exchanged, and it was ascertained, +putting it all together, that a plate fleet consisting of three ships +was indeed there, and that it was guarded by the two warships. The +other craft in the bay were mostly coasting and other small vessels, +about which they need not very much concern themselves when they came in +to the attack. The positions of the land batteries had also been +ascertained, and now nothing remained but to return to the squadron with +all speed, acquaint the captain with the information obtained, and then +sail for La Guayra forthwith, so as to arrive there before the plate +fleet could effect its escape from the port. For, once out of sight +below the horizon, they could scarcely hope to find it again except +after a long and wearisome search. + +Once more united, the boats began their return journey, pulling hard +while the darkness lasted, so as to make a good offing by daybreak, and +also to leave themselves less toil after the sun rose. + +It was about four in the morning when they rounded the promontory that +shut in the roadstead, and they could not reckon on more than two hours +more of darkness. The men, although fatigued, held well to their work, +and the boats moved along at a very good speed. + +Day broke with the suddenness usual in the tropics, and, the sun rising, +disclosed to their view, but a short half-mile in advance of them, the +identical vessel that had made such a hurried exit from the roadstead on +the previous night. This was excellent, and the English flag was at +once hoisted at the staves of the three boats, to show that they were +English, and not, as the people aboard the stranger would naturally +suppose, Spaniards in pursuit. + +Seeing the English flag, the vessel hove-to, and the boats soon came +alongside. Arriving on deck, Story asked for the captain, and a man +stepped forward saying that he was an English seaman, who had originated +the plan of escape, and finally contrived it. There were nearly a +hundred Englishmen on board, who had been captured in small parties at +various times, and had been incarcerated in the prison at La Guayra. +They had nearly all been subjected to the tortures of the Holy Office, +and bore the most dreadful scars as mementoes of its attentions. Many, +under the influence of the torture, had recanted and abjured their own +faith in order to save themselves from being burnt alive. + +It appeared that for some time past they had been considering plans of +escape, but the difficulties in the way were many and great, and had, of +course, been immeasurably increased by their numbers. The first +opportunity, therefore, had only come on the previous night, and they +had made the most of it, with what success the reader has seen. + +Story then informed them of the reason of the boats' presence there, +and, telling them of the proposed attack on the plate fleet, invited +them, subject to Cavendish's approval, to join the squadron. + +They all gladly acquiesced, without a single dissentient voice, and +expressed themselves as right glad of the opportunity to be revenged on +their enemies, the Spaniards. + +With this understanding Story took charge of the ship, and, calling the +boats' crews on deck, made fast the boats themselves astern, and towed +them, as, with the freshening breeze that arose with the sun, they made +better progress sailing than pulling. + +As a result of this arrangement they arrived sooner than they were +expected, and there was much joy throughout the fleet at the news of the +plate fleet, and also because of the valuable reinforcement to their +strength, which was very badly needed, and which now made the crews up +to almost their full complement. + +The captured vessel, by means of which the prisoners had effected their +escape, was only a carrack of very small tonnage; and therefore, being +of no use, she was sunk. + +The squadron weighed and made sail toward evening, Cavendish's purpose +being to arrive after dark and attempt a surprise attack, the odds being +so very greatly in favour of the enemy. Sunset, therefore, saw them +under easy sail, heading along the coast toward La Guayra. + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN. + +CAPTURE OF THE PLATE FLEET AND SACK OF LA GUAYRA--DISAPPEARANCE OF ROGER +AND HARRY. + +To make certain of not arriving at their destination too soon, and +before the townspeople and the garrison had retired for the night, the +English ships carried but a small amount of canvas, and consequently +made only some two to three knots per hour. + +It was a little after midnight when Roger, who was, as usual, on the +lookout, and who was credited with the sharpest pair of eyes in the +ship, saw for the second time the lights of La Guayra opening up. As +they came into fuller view of the town itself, and of the roadstead, +they were somewhat astonished to find that both were enveloped in almost +perfect darkness--there was scarcely a light to be seen, either ashore +or afloat. There were one or two scattered here and there about the +town, but there were none at all in the forts, and not a single glimmer +was to be made out anywhere in the roadstead. + +Surely it was not possible that the vessels of the plate fleet, and its +two protecting warships, could have left the port and disappeared during +the short time that had elapsed since the boat expedition had made its +reconnaissance! At that time, too, there had been numerous other craft +lying there at anchor; yet now it seemed as though the bay were +deserted. Some fresh arrangement--some new plan--was obviously +necessary. + +The English ships showed no lights whatever, and the strictest silence +was observed. The captains had received their orders beforehand, and +would have known exactly what course to pursue had there been any lights +showing. But now it became necessary to take fresh counsel among +themselves, and decide how to act. + +The flag-ship was, as usual, in the van, and Mr Cavendish ordered all +the boats to be lowered and manned. These were then to spread out in +line, so as to make sure of intercepting the other two vessels as they +came up, and, having found them, to give orders for them to heave-to, +and for their respective captains to repair on board the _Good +Adventure_. The boats themselves were to return to the flag-ship as +soon as these orders had been carried out. + +Luckily there was no difficulty in picking up the other ships, even in +the pitchy blackness that prevailed that night, and with but a few +minutes' delay the officers of the fleet were once more assembled in the +cabin of the flag-ship. The situation was discussed as briefly as +possible, for there was no time to lose, and it was presently decided +that, instead of the remainder of the fleet following the flag-ship's +lead, as originally agreed, the officer of each ship who had been with +the boat expedition should do his best to pilot the vessel under his +care to the berth occupied by the warships. Arrived there, should the +Spanish ships be present, as all on board fervently hoped would prove to +be the case, they were to attack at once. Whichever of the two +Spaniards might happen to be first attacked, the other would almost +certainly come to the help of her consort, and the flash of the guns and +noise of the tumult would serve to guide the remainder of the English +squadron to the scene of the conflict. + +If, on the other hand, it should be found that the warships and plate +ships had made their escape, each vessel was to return to the entrance +of the roadstead and await the arrival of her consorts as they too +retreated from the bay, when, all having rejoined, they were to return +to their former hiding-place, where fresh plans would be discussed and +made. + +This matter being arranged, the captains returned each to his own ship, +and very shortly afterward the fleet were again under weigh and standing +inshore in the same order as at first. + +Slowly and noiselessly as ghosts they glided on, each heading for the +place where the pilots thought, and all hoped against hope, to find the +warships lying, with behind them the plate fleet, which was the actual +objective of the expedition. + +The English ships had separated, and on board the flag-ship nothing +could now be seen or heard of the remainder of the squadron, each pilot +having taken the direction in which he personally considered the enemy +to be lying. Nothing could be made out, either ashore or afloat, to +guide them in the slightest degree in their search. They were, indeed, +groping blindly forward in the hope of accidentally coming upon their +quarry. The few lights of the town that were visible were away at the +other side of it, at a long distance from them, and were so far from +being of any service that they were positively misleading, to such an +extent that at any moment it might happen that they would find their +ship ashore. + +Roger and Harry were standing in their usual position on the fore-deck, +gazing eagerly ahead, each anxious to be the first to sight the enemy, +when Harry caught his friend's sleeve, and, pointing into the darkness +at a faint blur upon their port bow, said: + +"There's something there, Roger. D'ye see it, lad? It's a ship of some +sort. I can just make out her masts. We shall pass her at very close +quarters. Now, I wonder if perchance she is one of the warships that we +are searching for?" + +The words were scarcely out of his mouth when a perfect volcano of flame +flashed from the side of the vessel which Harry had just sighted, +immediately followed by a thunderous roar, and the shot from the +well-aimed broadside came crashing aboard, doing a considerable amount +of execution. Men fell in every part of the ship. Cries, shrieks, +groans, and curses arose from the decks, which for a moment were a +perfect pandemonium of confusion. + +The captain, rushing along the deck, shouted: "Steady, lads, and stand +to your guns! The Spaniards expected and are ready for us; but do not +forget that you are Englishmen. Pull yourselves together, men, and give +them back better than we received." + +The confusion was but momentary. The crews were by this time too well +disciplined to become panic-stricken, and, awaiting the word of command, +they presently poured in their already-prepared broadside with great +effect, for the mainmast of the war-ship was seen to quiver, totter, and +finally fall with a rending crash over the side remote from the _Good +Adventure_, throwing the crew of the Spaniard into momentary disorder. + +As the flag-ship came up to her antagonist, she took in her sails and +ranged up alongside, inshore of her. There were no batteries opposite +where the vessels were lying, so that no danger was to be apprehended on +that score. + +Like magic, the lights flared up from all parts of the town, and aboard +all the vessels in the bay, as also in the fort at the opposite +extremity of the roadstead. The war-ship herself became a blaze of +illumination, as did also her consort, which could now be seen lying but +a half-cable's-length distant, and which also opened a tremendous fire +upon the flag-ship. The other two ships of the English squadron, +meanwhile, had shifted their helms and were fast approaching, guided by +the flashing of guns and the uproar of the action. + +Even the ships of the plate fleet, lying near at hand, and which proved +to be heavily armed, now began to open fire, as well as the distant +fort; and it was soon very evident that the English fleet had entered +into an engagement in which the odds were vastly against them. They had +anticipated surprising the enemy; but the surprise was all the other +way. Neither had they reckoned on the plate vessels being nearly so +heavily armed. + +The booming of cannon now resounded from all sides, and the darkness was +made light by the flashes from the guns, whilst the air became thick and +heavy with powder smoke. The _Elizabeth_ and the _Tiger_ had come upon +the scene, and were attacking the second war-ship, which was resisting +gallantly, supported as she was by the guns from the ships composing the +plate fleet. + +Indeed the English were in a very warm corner. + +The flag-ship was engaging the first war-ship--the name of which they +discovered to be the _Sotomayor_--yard-arm to yard-arm, and both vessels +fairly reeled under the concussion as the heavy shot crashed in at one +side and out at the other, while the _Good Adventure_ was already on +fire below from the flashes of the guns of her opponent. English +sailormen, however, were ready then, as now, to meet all emergencies, +and the fire was speedily quenched, only to start again, however, and be +again put out. + +Three times did Cavendish pour his boarders on to the decks of the +_Sotomayor_, and three times they were driven back by the desperate +valour and greatly superior numbers of the Spaniards. + +The Spaniard had lost every mast but her foremast, and the English ship +was in almost as bad a plight. Both ships were badly riddled by shot, +and their crews were decimated. It seemed as though, unless some +decisive move were made to end the conflict, that the combatants would +be exterminated to a man. + +The second war-ship, the _Villa de Mejico_, was in even worse plight +than her consort, having two vessels to engage her instead of only one. +She fought with the valour of desperation, however, and was packed with +soldiers who had been put aboard her from the fort in anticipation of +the attack. + +It had somehow got to be known, although it was never discovered how, +that the English were near at hand, and were suspected of contemplating +an attack on the fleet; and in view of this suspicion elaborate +preparations had been made for their reception. + +The crews of the _Tiger_ and the _Elizabeth_ had several times +endeavoured to board, but had been swept back to their own ships on +every occasion by the combined sailors and soldiers on the Spaniard. + +Harry and Roger were, as usual, in the very thick of it, fighting side +by side like the young heroes that they were, and, truth to tell, doing +a considerable amount of execution. + +They were pausing for a moment to take breath, when both happened to +glance forward, and at once saw that the two ships, the _Good Adventure_ +and the _Sotomayor_ with her, were drifting right down upon the second +Spaniard and her antagonists. The Spaniards on the _Sotomayor_, finding +themselves almost overpowered, had cut their cable purposely, to drift +down with the tide on board their consort, in the hope of being able to +make a better stand together than separately. But they were mistaken in +their expectation. The other vessel, having had two to contend with, +was in no condition to render assistance of any kind; rather, indeed, +did she stand in need of help from the _Sotomayor_. + +A brief minute later the flag-ship, still grappling with her quarry, was +aboard the other three craft, and the confusion became worse confounded. + +The Spaniards, determined to make one last desperate effort to beat off +the English, rallied, and, combining their forces, forestalled their +antagonists by attempting to board. + +The two Spanish ships acted in concert, and hurled their soldiers and +sailors aboard the three English craft; but it was a hopeless attempt +from the first. The English closed up, and, forming a solid phalanx, +cut them down right and left, driving them back, and quickly compelling +the shattered remnant of the boarders to seek the refuge of their own +decks. Nor did they stop at that, but followed them pell-mell and close +on their heels in their retreat to the decks of the Spanish ships. The +Spaniards fought with the courage of desperation, but their utmost +efforts were unavailing; the blood of the Englishmen was now thoroughly +up, and there was no stopping them. They rushed with irresistible +courage and determination among the shattered and now completely +disheartened remnants of the enemy, and cut them down wholesale. Mere +mortal flesh and blood could no longer withstand the impetuous onslaught +of the Englishmen, and presently a voice was heard from their diminished +ranks shouting: "We surrender! we surrender! Mercy, mercy!" + +Cavendish raised his voice in command; the slaughter ceased, and the two +armadas were in the hands of the English. The Spaniards were ordered to +fling down their weapons, and they obeyed. + +They were then at once sent below and secured under hatches, and the +victors were now free to turn their attention to the plate ships that +were their primary objective. + +Such boats as would swim were quickly lowered and filled with armed men, +whose orders were to board the vessels, capture them out of hand, and +carry them out to sea under their own canvas; after which the English +vessels and their two prizes would make their way out of the roadstead +as well as might be in their shattered state. + +Once out of the bay, the uninjured vessels of the plate fleet would be +able to tow their companions in misfortune. + +At sight of the approaching boats, containing the victorious English, +the crews of the plate ships were seized with uncontrollable panic, and +many of them incontinently jumped overboard, whilst the remainder +hurriedly lowered their boats and pulled shoreward, anxious only to +escape by any means from so terrible a foe. And this they were allowed +to do without let or hindrance from the English, as the latter had +already quite as many prisoners as they could conveniently look after. + +The vessels were boarded, and sail made; and presently the enraged +population of La Guayra had the bitter mortification of seeing the plate +ships sail out of the roadstead in the possession of the English. + +They swore vengeance, deep and awful, should any of those "pirates"--as +they always termed the English adventurers--ever fall into their hands; +but the latter were equally ignorant of and indifferent to such threats. + +The vessels, injured and uninjured, in due time gained the outside of +the roadstead, and there hove-to, in order to effect temporary repairs. + +Meanwhile Cavendish had resolved to jury-rig his vessels, and sink the +two armadas in full view of the town, to make the defeat and capture +still more bitter to the Spaniards. + +The Spaniards were transferred from the _Sotomayor_ and the _Mejico_ to +the English fleet, and at daylight the warships were sunk in full view +of the town. The English fleet then anchored, and proceeded with their +work of repair; whilst, for safety's sake, a prize crew was put on board +each of the plate ships, which were then sent away to the former +hiding-place at the little bay down the coast. + +Whilst the repairs were going forward, Cavendish held another council, +at which it was resolved to send an expedition by night to attack La +Guayra itself. He argued that the Spaniards would deem them content +with the capture of the plate ships, and would never expect them to land +and attack the city. They would be taken by surprise; and, as the +crowning event of the successful enterprise just executed, he would sack +and burn the town, "to give the Spaniards something to remember him by", +as he phrased it. + +The sailors were only too delighted at the idea of attacking their +enemies again, as also at the prospect of the plunder to be obtained at +the looting and sack of the city. + +The boats were therefore lowered over the side of the ships remote from +the town, and lay under the vessels' lee during the day, in readiness +for the attack that night. + +All day long the repairs were gone on with, and after nightfall torches +and lanterns were lit, to deceive the Spaniards into believing that they +were working hard all through the night, and so lessen their suspicion +as to the probability of any further attack. + +A keen watch was kept on the town all day long, to discover whether any +preparations were being made to resist attack, but nothing of the kind +could be discovered. + +Evidently the Spaniards, as Cavendish had anticipated, were lulled to +security by the supposition that the English, having secured the plate +fleet, would have no reason or incentive for returning, and fondly hoped +that, as soon as the repairs to the ships were finished, they would sail +away; and that would be the last they would see of the heretic dogs. + +But they little knew the character of Cavendish; he was not the man to +abandon any enterprise upon which he had once entered. It was a +principle of his to inflict the greatest possible amount of damage on +the enemy that he could; and meanwhile the town of La Guayra still +remained uninjured. + +Therefore--so ran his argument--La Guayra must be sacked and laid in +ashes before he could consider his duty as thoroughly finished. + +As a consequence, shortly after midnight the boats of the fleet stole +silently out from under the sheltering lee of their parent vessels, and +made swiftly and noiselessly, with muffled oars, for the town. + +Roger and Harry, ready as ever for an adventure, no matter how dangerous +it might be, were in the boats, and keeping a sharp lookout ahead; for +by this time there were but few lights to guide them, the whole city +being wrapped in darkness. + +Everything ahead of and around them was perfectly quiet; not a sound +disturbed the still night air save only the scarcely audible ripple of +water under the boats' bows as they swept gently shoreward. + +Presently there was a grating of pebbles under their keels, and the +boats stopped dead. + +The crews silently disembarked, and all stood still for a few moments, +listening intently to ascertain whether the noise of the boats grounding +on the beach had been heard. But no sound came to them, and, after +waiting a little longer to make certain, the boats were gently pushed +off again, each in charge of a couple of hands to take care of them, and +the marauders proceeded up the beach, soon arriving on the road that ran +the whole length of the town at the edge of the shingle. + +The first thing to be done was to obtain possession of the fort; and, +feeling their way as best they could in the dense darkness, they set off +in the direction in which they knew it lay. + +Up the hill they marched, and presently a black mass, somewhat darker +than their surroundings, showed itself against the sky. They were +there. + +Stealing quietly round, they searched for the gateway, which they soon +found. + +Everything was now ready for the attack, and the officers went silently +among the men to discover whether all were present, when it was found +that not a single man was missing, or had lost his way in the dark. + +Two sacks ready filled with powder, tightly pressed down, and tied at +the mouth, were now brought forward. + +They were placed in position against the ponderous iron-bound door, a +train was laid to them, and the men then retreated to a safe distance +and lay down, waiting for the explosion. + +Presently there was a flicker of light as the spark was struck, and at +the same moment Roger and Harry grasped hands for a second, for bloody +work was about to begin. + +There was a splutter, a stream of fire ran along the ground, and, as +they gazed, an enormous flash of brilliant white light blazed up, nearly +blinding them, followed by a deafening report and a tremendous +concussion that seemed to make the very earth tremble. And with it came +the sound of wrenching iron, cracking timber, and the crash of falling +masonry, and from the interior of the fort the clamour and outcry of the +sudden awakening of its occupants. + +But the English, with no cheer or shout to announce their approach, +leaped to their feet, dashed across the intervening ground, and plunged +over the fallen masonry and wreckage of the gate into the interior of +the fort and into the dim radiance of hastily kindled lanterns. + +Here and there they found a man, only half-awake, confusedly running to +ascertain what might be the origin of the uproar, and him they cut down +at once. From room to room they went, giving no quarter--knowing that +they themselves would receive none,--and one by one the unhappy +Spaniards were killed. + +There was no organised resistance; it was every man for himself, for +they had been taken most completely by surprise. + +Roger, with Harry and a few more, ran at once up aloft and came out upon +the battlements, where with mallet and spike they industriously +proceeded to render the guns useless. + +Into the touch-hole of every gun a spike nail was driven as far as it +would go, thus effectually preventing the possibility of the weapon +being fired until the spike was drilled out, which would necessitate the +expenditure of at least an hour of hard work. + +In a very short time every gun was effectually spiked, and, the capture +of the fort being by this time completely accomplished, the men formed +up again outside, and descended at the double to the town, which was now +thoroughly awakened and alarmed. + +The cathedral was to be the next place of call, the object being to +remove the gold and silver plate with which it was known to be +furnished. + +Meanwhile the tocsins were being sounded. The brazen voices of the +church bells pealed out high above all the other clamour. To add to the +confusion and terror, the English halted, and, fixing their arquebuses, +fired a volley into a square where some troops seemed to be mustering. + +Immediately upon the crash of the volley came cries and screams from the +terrified populace, bearing eloquent witness to the execution wrought by +the flying bullets. Then, picking up their weapons, the English flew +like fiends through the town, cutting down all who had the temerity to +oppose them. + +The cathedral was soon reached, and they entered it. + +Lights were glimmering far up the aisles, just lit by the trembling +priests, who had come in by ones and twos to find out what all the +uproar was about. But the English pressed on, undeterred by their +presence, and, moving up the long chancel, reached the altar. + +Two or three seamen made their way to the belfry, and, loosing the +bell-ropes, in the madness of their excitement began to ring the bells +in the steeple; and presently, clang, clang, clang, came from the tower +as they hauled on the ropes. Rushing from one bell-rope to another, +they started every bell in the steeple ringing, with an effect that was +appalling and terrible. + +As the bells gained momentum, and swung on their beams, so did the ropes +attached to them fly up and down through their appointed holes in the +belfry roof, with ever-increasing velocity. + +Now they began to twine round each other like living, twisting serpents, +and the sailors pulling them had to spring quickly aside to avoid being +caught by the flying and coiling ends. + +Clang! clang! The sound of the bells now became a mad jangle, and the +steeple fairly rocked to their swinging. + +Everywhere the people were pouring out of their houses in terror and +panic, not knowing whither to turn for safety. + +Those who were below in the church were now tearing all the gold and +silver ornamentation from the altar, and the communion plate was +scattered on the floor of the chancel. + +Vainly the frightened priests strove to stay the work of destruction and +violation; the seamen were deaf to all entreaty, and cut and tore the +silken hangings from the altar, wrapping the costly fabric over their +own tarry and soiled clothing. Every man plundered for himself only, +and would allow none to rob him of his intended spoil. + +Above the altar stood a life-sized figure of the Blessed Virgin Mother, +exquisitely modelled in solid gold, and clothed in rich fabric that was +adorned with precious stones innumerable. The sailors saw it, and +leaped one after another upon the altar, drawing their swords and +hacking off the gems, whilst the priests covered their eyes with horror +at the desecration and sacrilege. + +The eyes of the figure consisted of two magnificent sapphires of great +size, and, being unable to reach these with their swords, the sailors +put their weapons behind and under the image, and with a few violent +wrenches it came crashing to the ground with a thunderous noise. + +As it fell, from above them in the belfry came a most awful, piercing, +and agonising scream of anguish. It rose in one shrill cry above every +other sound, and echoed, long-drawn out and ghastly, among the dim +arches of the roof high above them. + +The fearful cry rose and fell, while all below stood still, frozen into +silence by the utter horror of the sound. It was as the voice of a lost +soul in the most dreadful torment. As suddenly as it had arisen it +ceased, and it was now noticed that the tenor bell was no longer +clanging its deep mellow voice above them in the steeple. + +An old priest stepped out from among his brethren. + +"Cease, ye wicked men!" cried he in excellent English. "Cease, ye +heretics and sacrilegious dogs, ere worse befall ye! That awful shriek +was the despairing cry of a soul torn from its body in awful torment. +Take warning, ye, from that man's dreadful fate; for a man it was, +although ye might have deemed the voice that of a devil! + +"I can tell ye his doom. He was caught up by the whirling ropes of the +bells which ye have rung to your own confusion, and his body has been +torn to pieces in the pipe through which the bell-rope runs. Take +warning, I say, and leave this sacred place in peace!" + +He spoke no more, for one of the officers, fearing the effect his words +might have on the superstitious seamen, seized him by the shoulders and +hustled him down the long aisle of the building and through the door +into the street. + +Harry and Roger could not bring themselves to take part in the shocking +work of desecration, and were standing some distance away, surveying the +scene with disgust, when suddenly above the bestial shouts and uproar +came the cry: "Save yourselves, lads, run! There is no time to lose; +the church is on fire! Run! Run!" + +Startled amid their work of destruction, the men paused and looked round +to see whence the voice had come, but could not discover its +whereabouts. + +As they looked, however, columns of smoke were seen drifting about the +building and issuing from the crevices of the roof and walls. + +Evidently the alarm was genuine, by whomsoever given, and the sailors +made for the doors. Those who had overturned the golden figure still +clung to their booty, and, raising it in their arms, half-carried and +half-dragged it away with them by main force. + +It was a scene of the most utter confusion; some staggered away +overladen with gold and silver cups, others with costly silks and +fabrics, whatever most appealed to their erratic taste. + +When nearly all were out of the building, Roger and his friend awoke to +the fact that they were being left alone, and ran forward to escape +while there was time; but, even as they turned to go, the ground seemed +to fall from beneath their feet, and they plunged down, down, until they +struck the hard ground below, the shock causing them to lose +consciousness. + + + +CHAPTER SIXTEEN. + +IN THE HANDS OF THE INQUISITION. + +We must now move forward for a period of four months, during which time +many changes have occurred. + +When the men had escaped from the burning cathedral, Cavendish had +mustered them in the plaza opposite, and found none missing except Roger +and Harry. + +These two were great favourites with the ship's company, and many +willing hands had gone back to bring them out of the smoking edifice; +but no traces of them could be found. It was then thought that they +might have missed their way on the road down from the fort, and search +was made in that direction, but without success. + +The town was then thoroughly searched, yet the two friends still +remained missing. Eventually, therefore, Cavendish was most reluctantly +compelled to sail without them, and many were the conjectures as to what +fate could possibly have befallen them. + +Since that time Cavendish had taken his fleet round the Horn, and sailed +up the western coast of Spanish South America, arriving eventually off +the coast of Peru. At Callao he had received news that a plate ship was +expected to arrive shortly from Manila on her way to Acapulco, in +Mexico, and he had determined to waylay and capture her. And, at the +date to which this history has now arrived, he had just intercepted and +captured her off the Mexican coast, and taken out of her all her vast +treasure--the finest, richest prize that has ever been taken either +before or since. And at this point the exigencies of the narrative +demand that he must be left. + +Meanwhile, our former acquaintance, Alvarez, whom we lost sight of at +the Careenage, had successfully made his way through the Cuban jungle, +and, arriving at the port of Matanzas, with the remainder of the men, +had sailed thence to Vera Cruz, in Mexico, where he had received a high +appointment from the viceroy, which he now held. + +De Soto had travelled with him to Mexico, and, for so gallant a +gentleman, had been singularly unfortunate. Alvarez had found it +impossible to disabuse his mind of the idea that de Soto had the +cryptogram in his possession, and, remembering what had been said by him +about the Holy Office, had brought the fact before the notice of that +body, repeating de Soto's remarks and denouncing him as a heretic. The +unfortunate man was thereupon seized, thrown into prison, and, under the +direction of the villain Alvarez, dreadfully tortured, ostensibly to +compel him to retract his words against the Inquisition, but really to +enable Alvarez to wring from de Soto the cipher, as the price of his +release from prison and torture. + +The persistent and unwavering assertions of de Soto that he had not the +paper, and knew naught of its whereabouts, were received with +incredulity, and the unhappy man was tortured again and again to force +from him the disclosure of its hiding-place. + +The supposed burning of the cathedral at La Guayra had been merely a +ruse to get rid of the spoilers. Several of the priests had hit upon +the ingenious idea of setting fire to large quantities of damp straw in +certain secluded parts of the building, and the smoke, drifting hither +and thither through the interior, had caused the English to believe that +the place was indeed on fire, and had occasioned their hasty flight. +The disappearance of Harry and Roger, on the other hand, was purely due +to chance, and had not, as might be imagined, been brought about by +design. + +The explanation was simple enough. It happened that the paving of one +of the aisles had been undergoing repair at the time of Cavendish's +attack upon the town. One of the large paving-slabs was loose, and +Harry and Roger, in their haste to escape, had trodden on it, causing it +to tilt, and they had fallen into the vault below; their unconscious +bodies being soon afterwards discovered by the priests, when the latter +went to extinguish the burning straw upon the departure of the raiders. + +They were recognised by the priest who had been present in the building +during its spoliation, and who had uttered the warning to the sailors; +and he hastened to impart the good news that two of the pirate heretics +had fallen into their hands. Thereupon the two lads were promptly +delivered over to the tender mercies of the Holy Office, who did with +them what they would; but their ultimate fate was to be delayed until +they should have been publicly exhibited and tortured in every town of +importance in New Spain, as an example of what would happen should any +heretic ever again dare to set foot upon their sacred territory. + +The two poor lads had been branded and tortured publicly in the plaza at +La Guayra--with every refinement of cruelty that yet stopped short of +permanent injury,--and thence had been sent to Mexico to undergo similar +treatment in its cities; after which they were to be returned to La +Guayra to undergo the final punishment of burning alive at an +auto-da-fe. + +Our next meeting with the two lads, therefore, is as they sit, bowed +head on hands, in their small and horribly dirty cell in the building of +the Holy Inquisition in the town of Vera Cruz, in Mexico. + +They had already been tortured cruelly at La Guayra; but their +constitutions were strong and yet unbroken, and the sea voyage from La +Guayra to Vera Cruz--during which they had been carefully nursed in +preparation for the endurance of further torments--had done wonders in +setting them up again; to such an extent, indeed, that they were now +almost their old selves, except for the recollection of their +sufferings, which they would never forget, and the scars from the +instruments of torture, which would remain with them for the rest of +their lives. + +This was the first day of their imprisonment at Vera Cruz, they having +only disembarked from the ship on that same morning. + +They had just partaken of the scanty meal put into the cell by an unseen +jailer, and were now occupied each with his own thoughts--which were +none of the pleasantest--as they sat upon two low stones that served for +chairs, which, with a larger block of stone for a table, constituted the +sole furniture of the cell. + +The cell itself was like a tomb. It was about ten feet long by eight +broad and twelve high, lit by one small window which looked out on to a +dirty, dingy quadrangle, surrounded on all sides by the buildings of the +Holy Office. The unglazed window itself was barred up with stout iron +bars, which were deeply sunk into the wall, the thickness of which was +fully four feet, and much too thick and strong for them ever to dream of +breaking through without the aid of tools, plenty of time, and no +interruption. The ledge below the grating was foul, and piled high with +the accumulated filth of years; and the cell walls were damp and slimy, +covered with a growth of fungus nourished by the hot and steamy +moisture. The building itself was some hundreds of years old, having +been an Aztec temple before the Spaniards had taken it over and adapted +it for its present purpose. The cell door, which had been of stone in +Mexican times, consisted now of a thick and solid slab of teak, strongly +bound with iron, and stout enough to resist the attack of a +battering-ram. + +Chancing once to glance upward and toward the door--having heard some +slight sound outside,--Roger was just in time to catch sight of an eye-- +a dark, shining, and sinister orb--glued to a small hole in the door, +which he had not before noticed, and which was apparently covered when +not in use for spying purposes. It was evident that a watch, constant +and strict, was to be maintained upon them, and that therefore any +attempt at escape on their part, which they might be ill-advised enough +to hazard, would be discovered at once and promptly frustrated. In +fact, it appeared that escape was too absolutely hopeless and impossible +to be thought of seriously. As Roger glanced up, the eye vanished, +leaving them with the unpleasant sensation of being continually watched. + +"We are being spied upon, Harry," whispered Roger. "I saw an eye at the +door just now." And he indicated the place to his friend. + +Harry rose and went toward the door, and as he did so both lads caught +the sound of a retreating footstep. + +"If we had anything suitable," replied Harry, "we might close it up. +But I suppose it would be quite useless for us to do so; they would only +clear it out again, and very likely torture us for our pains." + +"Well," remarked Roger, "if they do here, as they did at La Guayra--that +is, always pass our food in through a trap in the wall, and never enter +the cell,--we might risk doing it and see what happens. They can but +open the hole once more. And we can make no plans, nor indeed can we do +anything, while we are watched constantly; so we might try it at all +events." + +At this moment, as they stood gazing at the tiny aperture, there was a +slight click at the back of them, and, turning round quickly, they saw a +platter of food and jug of water inside the cell, and close against the +wall; but of the aperture through which it had been passed they could +discover no trace in that dim light, even after close and careful +examination. + +"It is as we thought," said Roger; "it seems to be the custom in these +Spanish prisons never to allow the prisoners to see or speak to anyone, +even the jailer. You may depend upon it that we shall never have anyone +entering this cell until they come to conduct us to the +torture-chamber." And he shuddered; the recollection associated with +the word "torture" was exceedingly unpleasant. + +"In that case," agreed Harry, "we will try the effect of plugging that +hole, and see what happens. But first we had better take our meal while +we have the chance." + +Their dinner consisted of a slab of some kind of coarse, dark-coloured, +ill-flavoured bread, and a bowl of maize-meal porridge such as has +constituted the staple food of the natives of that part of the world for +centuries. + +They ate their food, but, hungry as they were, found great difficulty in +swallowing the porridge, so exceedingly unpalatable was it. + +Hunger, however, provides an excellent sauce, and they managed between +them to finish the supply, and then emptied the water pitcher forthwith, +as they were very thirsty. + +"Now to hit upon a good way to stop up that villainous spy-hole," said +Harry, and looked around the cell for something which would answer the +purpose. + +They could see nothing suitable until their eyes fell upon the +accumulation of dirt upon the window-ledge. + +"Ah! I have it!" ejaculated Roger; and, climbing on Harry's shoulders, +he reached down a handful of the dust. + +"Now mix this," he went on, "with that liquor left from the porridge. +That contains a good deal of sticky matter, and will make this stuff +hold together." + +They mixed the dirt and dust and floury water all together, and, leaving +it for a time to harden slightly, found that the mass held fairly firmly +together, and might make a reasonably good plug. + +"We must, however, wait for darkness, Roger," said Harry. "If we put +this in after dark it will not be noticed until the morning, by which +time it ought to have hardened sufficiently to prevent its being pushed +out again. If we were to do it now, it would be noticed when our friend +the spy comes round for a final look at us, and would doubtless be +removed again before it had had a chance of setting." + +Darkness soon fell, and then the two silently and carefully pushed in +the already nearly solid plug of earth. They had sufficient to fill the +little opening completely, for they heard some of it patter down on to +the stone floor outside. + +"There," said Harry, when they had finished, "if they do not find that +before morning, it should be hard, and then I doubt whether they will +trouble to bore it out again after it has set; but we shall see." + +It was now perfectly dark in the cell, for even on the most brilliant +moonlight nights the light could not reach the cell, because of the high +walls all round the quadrangle outside, which prevented the rays from +streaming in. + +Being exceedingly tired, and rather sleepy, the two friends spread their +jerkins on the block of stone forming the table, as it was far too damp +to lie on the floor, and were soon fast asleep in one another's arms. + +They were awakened the next morning by the sound of the trap shutting +after the morning's supply of food had been put in; and their first +thought, before even glancing at the meal, was to see if the plug had +been disturbed. To their great joy, so far as they could tell, it had +not been touched; and, upon testing it, it proved to be perfectly hard +and quite immovable. + +"It will take them a little time to get that out, even if they try to do +so," said Roger; "but I trust that they will not attempt it. If they do +not, we are at least safe from observation, if not from being overheard. +But, to be on the safe side, I think it would be wisdom on our part to +converse only in whispers." + +"I quite agree with you there," replied Harry; "one never knows who may +be listening. And now let us turn our attention to breakfast, and see +whether we have anything different this morning from that miserable and +tasteless meal porridge and black bread." + +They examined the food and found that, this time, instead of the +porridge, a bunch of bananas had been provided; but, for the rest, the +black bread and water were there as before, and nothing beside. + +However, they ate heartily of what they found, and finished it all, +feeling much refreshed after it. But ever hanging over them was the +black cloud, which they could not forget; the remembrance of the +tortures through which they had already passed, and the anticipation of +others to follow. + +They made a further careful examination of the cell; and this time, by +dint of patient search, they located the aperture through which their +food was thrust every day. It was constructed with much skill, and only +by very close inspection could they make out the small joints indicating +the position of the trap. Before they found it, some vague idea had +formed itself in their minds of watching for the time when it should be +opened to pass in their meals, and endeavouring to scramble through +before it was closed again. It was a hare-brained scheme, and would +never have suggested itself were it not for the fact that their minds +had been persistently dwelling upon the chances of escape, and had +become so dulled by long confinement that they were not now so clear as +they had been in happier times. A second glance served to prove to them +the utter futility of any attempt at escape by that means, as the size +of the opening was insufficient to permit the passage of their bodies. + +This discovery came as a severe disappointment to them, and they +remained for some considerable time sitting on their respective stone +stools, a prey to black despair and utter hopelessness. + +They were aroused from their dismal reverie by hearing a stealthy +footstep approaching the door. + +It stopped outside, and, by leaning their heads against the wood-work, +and listening intently, they heard a slight creaking sound, as of wood +against wood, which, to their now alert senses, indicated that the +watcher was gently pushing back the slide which concealed the spy-hole. +There was then a pause, and the lads looked across at one another and +could not forbear a smile, even in their state of misery and suspense, +at the idea of the spy's astonishment and disappointment at finding all +dark when he expected to be able to see into the cell. + +Presently there ensued a slight scratching, and they knew that the spy +was attempting to remove the obstruction. + +Their plug, however, answered its purpose well, and showed no signs of +budging. + +Then the scratching noise began afresh, and somewhat more loudly, as the +man became impatient of the delay, and dispensed with caution. After +several ineffectual efforts on the spy's part the noise ceased, and the +stealthy footsteps were heard receding in the distance. + +"Well, Roger," said Harry, when the sound of the spy's footsteps had +ceased, "we got the better of him that time; did we not?" + +"Ay," responded Roger gloomily; "but we must not expect that the matter +will rest there. They will be certain to return and drill that hole out +again, or make a fresh one, and we are sure to be punished in some way +for what we have done--either by starvation or torture. I am by no +means sure that we were wise in stopping up that spy-hole, or that by +doing so we have served any good purpose." + +"Oh, come now, Roger, old fellow, you must not think like that!" +answered Harry. "Now that they have seen that we know they watch us, +they may not attempt it again; and they would surely not do very much to +us for a little thing like that. Besides, it is intolerable to think +that we are being spied upon all day long, and that whatever we do or +say is known. There would be absolutely no chance whatever of our +making a successful attempt to escape at any time if we had not closed +the hole. At any rate, it is done now, and it is no good our worrying +over it; we must just wait and see what happens. If they are going to +make a fresh place of observation, or punish us for what we have done, +they will not defer it long; so to-day will, in my opinion, decide the +matter. Meanwhile we must wait; and, while we are unobserved, we had +better make the most of our time." + +"You are right, Harry, old friend," said Roger; "but for my part I do +not feel much like talking, or anything else. If we had something +really useful to occupy us to pass the time it would be different; but +as it is, well--what can we do?" + +"Well, I'll tell you," answered Harry. "We will wait for a little +while, in order to ascertain whether they mean to do anything about this +matter of closing up the spy-hole; and, if no one comes, I think we +could not do better than make another attempt to translate that +cryptogram of ours. We have made many attempts already, it is true, and +it has always got the better of us. But then, we have never, until now, +really had the time to spare to attend to it properly. Now would be a +very good opportunity; we have plenty of time--which drags heavily +enough, God knows. This would serve to make it pass; and if we +succeed--and should be able also to effect our escape--we should then be +ready to secure that treasure without delay. For although, so far as we +are aware, we are the only ones who know anything whatever about the +affair, delay is dangerous; someone might easily even get there before +us and discover the treasure by accident. One never knows. What think +you, Roger?" + +"Why, Harry, lad," said Roger, brightening up considerably, "I think +that it's a very good idea. I am surprised that I never thought of it +myself. We had better wait a little, however, and see what happens, +before we extract the paper from my jacket; we do not want to be taken +by surprise." + +The words were hardly out of his mouth when, from somewhere in the +building, evidently some distance away, came a long wailing cry, low at +first, then rising gradually higher and higher, until it became a +piercing scream--the scream of a man in mortal agony. + +The long-drawn shriek continued for some moments, and then died down +again to a low, moaning sound; then it rose again, and changed into a +series of short yapping cries of anguish, almost like the barking of a +dog; then it ceased. + +"What on earth is that, Harry?" ejaculated Roger, looking at his friend, +on whose forehead the cold perspiration was now standing in beads. +"What an awful sound!" + +"I am afraid, my friend," replied Harry, "that it means that some poor +mortal is undergoing torture almost greater than he can bear. What +devils these inquisitors are! If I could but be at the head of a few +hundred English seamen at this moment, would I not pull this place of +torture about their ears; and would I not put a few of them to the +torture themselves, just to teach them by experience what it feels like, +and as a warning to the rest! God help that poor wretch, whoever he may +be! What a fearful, awful sound it is! This is getting dreadful," he +went on, as another shrill and blood-curdling scream broke on their +ears, quavering as it was with the extremity of fearful agony, yet not +quite so loud as before, as though the unfortunate individual were +losing his strength. + +"To be imprisoned here, and not to be able to do anything to help the +poor fellow! Oh, they are fiends in human shape!" cried Roger, stamping +his foot on the ground in impotent fury. + +Then came a sound which made the lads start and look apprehensively at +each other. It was the noise of footsteps approaching down the long +passage at the end of which their own cell was situated. + + + +CHAPTER SEVENTEEN. + +IN THE TORTURE-CHAMBER OF VERA CRUZ. + +Both lads felt their hearts stop beating, and a cold chill seized their +bodies as they heard the footsteps pass other cell doors without +pausing, and continue down the passage towards their own. + +Those dreadful cries still rang in their ears, and they felt that if the +approaching person was coming to conduct them also to the torture, they +could not bear it. They were still, it must be remembered, only lads, +and the sound of those cries of agony had racked their nerves--as they +might those of much older men--more than they themselves knew. + +They felt their very hair rising on their scalps, and a sensation of +deadly sickness and faintness swept over them. + +Harry was the first to recover his presence of mind, and he spoke to +Roger. + +"Come, come, Roger, lad," said he; "pull yourself together, my friend. +If they are indeed coming for us, we must make up our minds to endure it +as best we can, even as we have done before. And perchance we are +mistaken, and they do not intend to torture us at all." + +Roger came out of his dismal reverie of foreboding, and his face became +once more immobile. A few heartbeats and he was as well prepared as +Harry for what might happen. + +Once, for a moment, the footsteps paused, and their hearts gave a great +bound of thankfulness. The messenger, then, was not coming for them +after all! + +Their sensation of relief, however, was of but brief duration. + +After a pause, lasting but a few moments, those inexorable footsteps +resumed their approach once more, and nearer and nearer they came toward +the door of the last cell. + +Roger and Harry glanced at one another, rose from their respective +stools, and stood upright facing the door. They had just time to give +each other a firm and reassuring hand-clasp, when the key grated in the +rusty lock outside, the bolts were slipped back with a grinding noise, +and the door creaked open on its hinges, disclosing, against the +semi-darkness of the long corridor, the form of a man, robed from head +to foot in black. Even his head and face were invisible, covered by a +kind of black cloth helmet terminating in a peak, and with two slits cut +in it for the eyes. Through these slits they could discern a pair of +fiery orbs, shining like those of a cat in the darkness, looking full at +them, as though to read their inmost thoughts. + +If the mysterious visitor anticipated seeing any signs of alarm on the +lads' faces, he was disappointed, for the two stood up facing him, and +gave him back glance for glance. + +Just for a single instant the same thought leapt through both their +brains: "Why not make a rush, knock the dark visitant down and stun him, +and attempt to find our way out of the building before aught is +discovered?" Indeed they both exchanged glances at that instant. + +It seemed, however, as though the masked man read their thoughts; for, +stepping to one side of the door, he pointed silently down the corridor, +and there they saw what at first they had not observed, namely, a file +of similarly masked figures on each side of the passage, standing +against the walls, with naked swords in their hands. + +It was of no use. Escape that way was, on the face of it, hopeless. +The masked messenger read the expression on the boys' faces as they +looked, and they could have sworn that a cruel smile lurked behind that +black mask. Then came a voice from the figure, in pure English, without +a trace of any foreign accent: + +"You are both required to attend a scene of punishment. It is the order +of the Grand Inquisitor, and you are required to witness it as earnest +of what you yourselves will undergo here should you be foolish enough to +disobey, or in any way attempt to thwart, the wishes or designs of the +Holy Inquisition." Here he crossed himself. "A warning is but seldom +given to heretics; so accept this one as it is meant; for your own good +I tell you this. Now follow me, and be careful that you make no attempt +at escape, for it is absolutely impossible for you to succeed, and you +would but bring a heavy punishment on yourselves. And, above all, +whatever you see or hear, keep a still tongue in your heads; do not +presume to speak to anyone where you are going. If you obey implicitly +it may be that you will be leniently dealt with." + +The masked man turned, beckoning over his shoulder for them to follow, +and then preceded them up the passage. + +They were a great deal relieved to find that they were not to be this +time tortured; but they knew only too well what punishment it was that +they were to witness, and they felt their hearts sicken within them. +They both knew that the advice they had just received was good, and +resolved, if possible, to abide by it. They therefore followed their +leader along the corridor in silence, while the masked men with swords +fell in behind them as soon as they had passed, effectually preventing +any attempt on their part at escape. + +Up the passage they went, reached the end of it, and then turned to the +right, afterwards climbing up a long flight of steps. This brought them +to another long passage, but much wider than the one leading to their +own cell. It was also covered with some kind of matting, and several +doors opened into the corridor. + +Along this corridor they went, and came presently to another large door, +through which they passed, finding themselves in a large and lofty room. + +This was somewhat dark, and, after the light through which they had just +passed, they could not for a few moments discern the objects contained +therein. Then, as their eyes became more accustomed to the half-light, +they perceived, hanging on the wall, strange instruments of iron and +wood, and in different places in the apartment were standing +curious-looking machines, the use of which they could only imagine with +a shudder. + +The door through which they had just entered was closed and locked, and, +turning round, the two friends saw that the masked guards had vanished, +as also had the guide who had conducted them thither. But the chamber +was tenanted by several funereal figures in black, all with their faces +hidden, and whose movements even seemed to suggest something horrible +and repulsive. + +In silence one of the masked figures took down an instrument from the +wall, and walked to the opposite end of the room, where stood another +group of men in black, with cowled heads. + +The lads watched, as if fascinated, and with an inward feeling that +something dreadful was about to occur. They could perceive a certain +dim outline of something that looked like a framework of timber, but its +complete shape was hidden from them by the figures of those who were +standing in between. + +All the masked men appeared to the boys to be waiting for something or +someone before they proceeded with whatever they were preparing to do. + +As they stood there, frozen into rigidity and silence by a dreadful and +indefinable sensation of horror, they heard a fluttering sigh coming +from the opposite end of the room, apparently from somewhere near the +mysterious framework. + +This sigh, faint at first, suddenly changed into a most fearful sound-- +something between a moan and the noise a man makes when the breath is +suddenly driven from his body. The sound was so full of horror that +they felt their blood literally curdle within them. It was all the more +terrifying because they could not tell who or what it was that produced +it. In spite of themselves they moved a few steps nearer, and then a +sight met their eyes which turned them sick. + +What they had taken for a wooden framework was indeed a framework, but +one for a terrible use. + +It consisted of four pieces of timber merely, two long and two short. +These were fastened together in the form of a rectangle, thus producing +an article somewhat resembling a bed-frame, only rather narrower; and +the wood-work was much more massive. Two iron rings were fixed in the +centre of each of the short pieces, and to each of these were attached +stout straps of raw hide. + +And there, stretched upon this framework, and supported in position +solely by his hands and ankles, around which were fastened the raw hide +strips attached to the rings, lay the figure of a man! + +The body was perfectly naked; and as the boys looked, unable to turn +their eyes away through sheer horror at the sight, which held them as +though fascinated, the groups of cowled men separated and, seizing the +lads, pushed them forward until they stood close to the framework and +had a full view of the whole dreadful scene. A voice behind them +uttered the words: + +"Look! Take warning!" But it is very doubtful whether either Harry or +Roger heard the words; their brains seemed paralysed by the sight that +met their eyes. + +The figure was that of a man, evidently in the prime of life; the legs +were stretched so far apart by the framework that it was extraordinary +that flesh and blood could endure the strain and still hang together. +The arms were also stretched out above the man's head to such an extent +that they seemed to be literally parting from the poor body at the +shoulders. The muscles had started up, and seemed to be bursting +through the skin, and the flesh was stretched so tightly over the bones +that it seemed a skeleton rather than a human living body upon which +they gazed. + +But it was not this sight of a living, breathing, sentient human body +strained and stretched to the point of being torn asunder that excited +the lads' commiseration and horror, and caused them inwardly to register +a solemn and awful vow of vengeance upon the human fiends around them +should the opportunity ever arise. No, terrible as was that sight, +there were others--horrors that only the most debased and cruel +imagination could possibly invent, and to which no pen could possibly do +justice, even were any good purpose to be achieved by the attempted +recital of them--that caused the lads' souls to revolt at once and for +ever against a people that could perpetrate such diabolical cruelties. + +Another deep groan issued from the lips of the hapless sufferer, and he +opened his eyes, which had until now been closed, and then they saw that +a certain suspicion that for some moments had been growing in their +minds was but too well founded. Yes, yes! Oh, horror! it was de Soto, +that noble, brave, and chivalrous Spaniard whom they had last seen +retiring with the rest of their prisoners into the depths of the jungle +of Cuba! + +Harry uttered a little cry, and, swaying for a moment, fell heavily into +the arms of Roger, who laid him gently on the stone floor. + +At this, one of the cowled inquisitors stepped forward; but at that +moment a door opened and a man entered, clad in rich and costly +vestments, his identity unconcealed in any way by cowl or cloak. + +Roger looked up, and could scarcely credit his senses. + +Where--where had he seen that sinister and evil countenance before? As +he looked, so did the man who had just entered look at Roger, a new +light dawning in his evil eyes. + +Then Roger recognised the man; he had seen him before. It was Alvarez! + +The new-comer spoke in Spanish: "Has the man yet confessed?" + +And one of the masked men replied: "No, your excellency; he has not as +yet. But we hope that during the next torture he will speak; he is but +now only just recovering from the last." + +"Continue, then," commanded Alvarez. "But first remove those two boys +to their cell, and I charge you, on your lives, to see that they escape +not; for of all those whom I have ever wished to have in my power I +wanted that one most"--pointing to Roger. "Therefore, keep him safe; +keep both of them safe; for I shall require them soon." + + + +CHAPTER EIGHTEEN. + +THE TRANSLATION OF THE CRYPTOGRAM. + +In obedience to the commands of Alvarez, two of the black-cloaked men +seized Roger, each of them taking him by an arm, and led him back to the +cell, whilst two more followed with the unconscious body of poor Harry. + +When they arrived in the cell, the men who were carrying Harry's body +simply flung it down on the stone table with careless violence, and +then, without glancing back, left the apartment, and, closing the door, +locked and bolted it again on the outside. + +Roger's first thought was for his friend, whose head had been badly cut +owing to the force with which he had been flung on the stone table. + +He instinctively glanced round the cell, and his eyes fell upon the jug +of water, which, with their food, had been placed there during their +visit to the torture-chamber. With an exclamation of thankfulness he +seized upon the jug, and, stripping off his doublet, tore away the +sleeve of his undershirt; then, dipping that in the water, he bound it +round the head of his friend over the jagged gash. + +The sensation of cold produced by the soaking bandage restored Harry to +consciousness, and, heaving a sigh, he opened his eyes; then memory +returned, and he gave a great shudder as he remembered the awful scene +upon which he had gazed but a short time since. His wandering eye +caught sight of Roger's familiar form; he called his friend to him, and +Roger assisted him to his feet. Harry quickly recovered, but said that +he felt rather sick and faint after what he had seen, and his head was +aching rather badly. + +"Oh, Roger, what fiends in human shape are those men!" he exclaimed. +"They cut and slash and burn the living bodies of their fellow-men until +they lose all semblance of human beings. Surely some judgment from +heaven will some day fall upon them for committing such awful deeds!" + +"Ay, doubtless it will; though not, perhaps, in this world," answered +Roger. "Now, if we could but find Mr Cavendish, let him know what is +going on here, and march up with a hundred or two of our lads from the +fleet, we would ourselves visit such a judgment upon them as would leave +room for no other. But, Harry, I have somewhat to tell you, dear lad. +After you had fainted at sight of poor de Soto, a man came in, +recognised us both, and ordered us to be taken back here, as he would +`require us both in the future'. That man was Alvarez! I see it all +now. He suspects de Soto of possessing the cryptogram, and has tortured +him to make him confess its whereabouts. De Soto, not having it, cannot +say where it is. Now, you and I were on the _Gloria del Mundo_ before +she sank. I don't know whether Alvarez saw you, but he did me the +honour of desiring to slay me as I lay helpless before he left the ship. +He was frustrated in his humane desire, however; but, knowing that I +escaped after all from the _Gloria_, his suspicious mind will almost +certainly jump to the conclusion that I have that paper, seeing that de +Soto has persistently, and despite the most frightful tortures, +evidently denied all knowledge of it. I can see that something of the +kind is in his thoughts, because of his stringent commands for us to be +`kept safe', as he will `require us in the future'. So we know what to +look forward to, my friend, if we cannot make our escape. The same sort +of torture as that through which poor de Soto has just passed will be +ours, God help us! Now, what counsel have you to offer under the +circumstances?" + +"Well, my friend," answered Harry, "I should say that our best plan +would be to endeavour to translate that cryptogram, commit its meaning +to memory, and then destroy the paper. Then, if we are asked for it, we +can say that we have it not, and allow them to search us as proof that +what we say is true. + +"Also, if Alvarez finds that the paper is really not in our hands, and +if, in addition to that, we tell him that we know not where it is, +perhaps we may avoid being tortured to make us confess its hiding-place; +for I am sure that poor de Soto was tortured for no other reason than +that Alvarez thought he had the cryptogram, and wished to make him +confess where it is. That's my advice to you, Roger; and the sooner we +set about trying to translate that cipher the sooner we shall finish and +be able to destroy it, and the safer we shall be. How fortunate it is +that they have not decided to bore out that spy-hole again! We shall +now be able to work at the paper without danger of being seen." + +"Let us, then, start on the matter at once," replied Roger, "and, as our +food has only recently been brought to us, we shall not be interrupted +again for some hours, unless, of course, Alvarez should send for us; but +I do not think he will want to question us to-day; he has not yet +finished with that poor wretch de Soto. Now, Harry, just rip up the +seam of my jerkin, and get that paper out, and let us start the business +at once." + +Harry took out his knife, which, strangely enough, he had been permitted +to retain, and, carefully cutting the stitches, removed the paper, +unfolded it, and laid it open upon the stone table. Then both lads +leant over the document and concentrated all their energies on the task +before them. + +"First of all," said Roger, "what language is it most likely to be +written in? Jose Leirya was himself a Spaniard, it is true; but from +what I could gather from that man William Evans, about whom I told you, +his crew was invariably made up for the most part of Englishmen; so it +is reasonable to assume that English would be the language he would have +to employ on board his ship. He had been sailing the high seas as a +pirate for a good many years; so one would imagine that at the time when +he wrote that cipher he would know probably more English than Spanish. +What, therefore, more natural than that he should write his secret in +English? At any rate, I think we should not be far wrong in assuming +that it is written in English; and so we will take it for granted that +such is the case. And if we find that we are wrong, we will try some +other language--say Spanish. + +"But the language is not all-important; it is the finding what signs or +letters those figures stand for that will be the difficulty. Now let us +have a look at the paper. There is the first line of figures. + +"1581. 2227 1819 1919 2622 1820 1335 1138 1918. + +"Let us take that first, and see what we can make of it. I should say +that the first number, standing, as it is, by itself, is the year in +which it was written, that is to say, the year 1581. Now, you observe +that these figures are all in groups of four. We will say that each +figure represents a letter, which is not very likely, as not all the +words could possibly consist of four letters each; but they might be the +initial letters of certain words, giving sufficient of the word to +enable one to guess the rest. Now there are 26 letters in the alphabet. +Taking A as being 1, B as 2, C as 3, and so on up to Z as 26, let us +apply this to the cipher. + +"By doing this with the first group, we get B B B G, or, if we take the +figures in groups of two--V--something else; but there is no letter +corresponding to the number 27, so that hypothesis fails. Again, B B B +G is no whole word, nor even the beginning of one; evidently, therefore, +we are not right in that surmise. + +"Now let us add together the first and second pair of figures in every +group; for it is only by testing every possible combination of these +exasperating figures that we shall arrive at their meaning. By doing +this we get 4 and 9, which correspond to D and I. Now that looks more +promising, so let us take the next group 1819. These, added, make 9 and +10, corresponding to I and J. This gives us D I I J. That again, +Harry, does not seem to mean very much, does it?" + +"No," replied Harry, "it certainly does not. Still, let us go on; we +may make something out of it yet. The next group is 1919, which makes +10 and 10 or J J; and the next group makes 8 and 4, or H and D. + +"Now let us put all these together. By doing so, we get D I I J J H D, +which certainly does not look like any language. We can make no words +out of those letters, whichever way we arrange them, so it seems that we +are wrong again in our method." + +"Never mind, my friend," said Roger, "let us still go on; it will not do +to be discouraged so soon. There certainly is some translation to that +mass of figures, I feel certain, and I am determined to find it. Now, +how can we go about it next? I have it! Let us take each group as +representing one letter instead of two or four, as we did before. What +shall we then get? + +"We now have 13, 19, 20, 12, 11, 12, 13, 19 for our first line, +representing, in letters, M S T L K L M S. + +"This, again, conveys no meaning; nor can any words be formed whichever +way we arrange the letters. + +"Now, instead of adding each figure separately, let us add each set of +two, that is, 22 and 27 and 18 and 19, then 19 and 19, and so on, and +see what we get then." + +"But," objected Harry, "if we do that, we shall get numbers which have +no corresponding letters. I mean that by doing as you suggest we should +have 49, 37, 38, and our numbers corresponding to letters only go up as +far as 26, which stands for Z, so that method cannot be right. It seems +to me that this thing is beyond us, Roger; I do not see what we can make +of such an awful jumble of figures." + +"Gently, my lad, gently," remonstrated Roger, "we will not give it up; +we may as well be worrying over this cryptogram as doing nothing, and +better, because it helps to pass the time, and keeps our thoughts from-- +from--other things," he ended rather lamely. + +For a few moments they remained silent and cogitating. Do what they +would to distract their minds from dwelling upon that ghastly scene in +the torture-chamber, the picture was constantly intruding itself upon +their imaginations; nor could they forget the ominous words of Alvarez +when he instructed the guard to keep them safely, as he would "require +them in the future." + +But, after some little time spent in this dreary form of reverie, Roger +started up once more. + +"Come, Harry," said he, "it is of no use for us to give way to these +miserable forebodings; let us get back to the cipher again. It will +keep us from thinking; and, besides, we may not have another such +favourable opportunity in the future." + +Harry did not reply, but dismissed his gloomy thoughts, though evidently +with an effort, and once again the two leant over their precious paper +and cudgelled their brains in the effort to find the proper translation. + +"Now," resumed Roger, "it seems to me that we may possibly be on the +correct track after all with our last grouping of the figures; that is +to say, adding the first two and last two figures in each group to one +another, and getting a certain number. It looks to me more likely than +any of the other methods we tried." + +"I confess that I am unable to see it," answered Harry. "We have +already ascertained that by that method we get, first of all, the +numbers 49, 37, and 38, and, as I remarked, we have no letters +corresponding to those numbers." + +"No, I agree with you there," replied Roger. "But how are we to know +that Jose selected the number 1 for his letter A, 2 for the letter B, +and so on? It is not very likely that he would, as that method of +procedure would make the solving of the cipher a fairly easy matter, and +we should have translated it by now. It is much more likely that he +took some other number for his letter A, say 15, or 40, or any number +rather than 1." + +Harry retorted: "Well, in that case we are just as far off the solution +as at first, for how can we possibly tell, except by experiment, what +numbers correspond to the right letters? And it would take us weeks to +discover it by that method." + +"I agree with you that we certainly should be a very considerable time +in arriving at the solution if we tried to do it simply by experiment," +said Roger. "But I do not propose to set about it in that way. Now +think, Harry, what letter occurs most frequently in the English tongue." + +"Well," replied his friend, "I have never given any thought to the +matter, so I couldn't say immediately; but I should say that the letter +A occurs as often as any." + +"It certainly does often occur, as you say," agreed Roger; "but the +letter E occurs more often than any other letter, and, knowing that, I +am going to look for the number that occurs most often in the cipher, +and I feel sure that that number will be found to correspond to the +letter E, provided always, of course, that this cryptogram is written in +English." + +"Bravo, Roger," shouted Harry; "well thought of! Now, I should never +have hit upon that method if I had been worrying at this thing for +ever." + +"S-s-sh--!" Roger whispered. "Be quiet, man; do you want to bring +those spies and jailers upon us? For you assuredly will, if you make +much of that row." + +"I am sorry," said Harry. "For the moment I had forgotten where we +were, and I felt so sure that you had hit upon the right method of +translating the cipher that I shouted without thinking." + +Roger interrupted his friend: "Do not speak for a few moments. Even +then I thought I caught the sound of some person outside the door; I +pray Heaven that they may not come into the cell!" + +The two listened most intently for some minutes, with their ears pressed +up against the wall and door, but caught no sound from outside. So, +after waiting a little time longer, to make perfectly certain, they both +returned to the task in hand. + +"Now let us go on where we left off just now," Harry suggested. "You +say that we want to find out the number that occurs most often in the +cryptogram, and allow that to represent E." + +"That is so," replied Roger. "Now, let us have a look through it +again." + +They both counted up, and presently Harry, who had finished first, +exclaimed--this time in a carefully lowered voice: + +"Well, the number 34 occurs oftener than any other; that is, if you are +adding the first two and last two figures of each group together." + +"Wait a moment," said Roger, still busily counting. Then, after a +pause, he added: + +"Yes, you are right, Harry; the number 34 does occur most frequently; +and we can, I am sure, take it as representing the letter E. Now, going +upon that assumption, A will be represented by 30, B by 31, C by 32, D +by 33, and so on. Now I believe that we have the translation in our own +hands. Let us make the experiment--but we ought to write it down as we +go along, or else we shall forget part of it perhaps." + +"Ay, there is the difficulty," said Harry; "we have no writing materials +and nothing which we can use instead of them." + +"Not so fast, not so fast, lad," his friend replied. "That is a +difficulty which we must find means to overcome. Let us have a look +round, and first see if there is anything that we can use for a pen. If +we can find such a thing, the ink will be an easy matter afterwards." + +"Indeed?" exclaimed Harry incredulously. "I pray you explain how in the +world you are going to get a supply of ink?" + +"Never mind," retorted Roger with a quiet smile; "you leave that to me. +Get me something that will serve for a pen, and I will find the ink +quickly enough." + +Seeing that Roger was not going to divulge the secret of the ink, Harry +joined him in a search of the cell, looking for something that would +answer the purpose. + +Just at that moment there was a "click", and, turning quickly round, +they perceived that another meal had been pushed in through the +trap-door. + +"We will leave that for a time," said Roger, intent upon his search. +"The food can wait; but we cannot delay with what we are now doing; for +we can never know when we may be interrupted." + +Harry agreed, and the search proceeded without very conspicuous success. +A few fragments of straw, a quantity of woolly dust, a few tiny +splinters of wood, and a small and extremely rusty nail were all that +rewarded them. + +"Ah!" ejaculated Harry, "I had forgotten that window-sill; there is more +likely to be something in that accumulation of stuff up there than in +the cell itself. Come and stand below it, so that I can mount on your +shoulders, Roger; and then I can rake about there and see if I can find +anything for our purpose. + +"And, now that I come to think of it, we have never yet had a look out +of that window. We can only see those high walls; there may be +something to interest us below there, in the courtyard, or whatever it +may be." + +Roger moved quickly to the other end of the cell, and, standing below +the grated opening, allowed Harry to clamber up his body and finally to +stand upon his shoulders. + +Harry then grasped the bars of the grating, to take some of the pressure +off his friend's back, and began to burrow in the heap of dust and +rubbish that had accumulated for years upon years on the sill. Suddenly +Roger heard his name whispered softly--"Roger, Roger, Roger", and became +aware of the fact that Harry was hurriedly preparing to descend from his +perch. Roger eased his friend to the floor, and then asked what was the +matter. + +"Why," said Harry, "there is a man below who appears to be waiting there +for some definite purpose; and when he saw me at the window he began to +make signs, which, unfortunately, I could not understand; and then held +out his hands, as though to catch something he expected me to throw out. +I cannot make out at all what it is he wants; you had better have a +look, Roger." + +"Yes," answered Roger, "let me get on your shoulders at once, Harry; +this may be an important matter. Perchance it may be someone who is +willing to help us to escape, and wishes to communicate with us." + +Harry immediately helped his chum up to his own former position. Roger +stood there for some considerable time, looking out, and then whispered +to Harry to let him descend. + +"Well, did you see him?" enquired Harry, when Roger had got down. + +"Yes," replied Roger. "I just caught a glimpse of him as he vanished. +He seemed to be a ragged sort of fellow, so far as I could make out. I +wish he had remained a little longer; but I suspect that something must +have alarmed him, and so caused him to move away. I wonder what it is +he wanted! Are you certain that it was to you he was making those +signs?" + +"Quite certain," Harry answered. "He was looking directly at me; and +when he saw that I had noticed him, he, as I said, held out his hands-- +so--as though to catch something that I was to throw out. But what +could he have wanted us to give him? There is nothing in this cell +which we could fling to him, except our meal, which, by the way, we have +not yet touched. I wonder if he expected us to write anything, and +throw it out to him!" + +"I don't see how he could expect that," said Roger. "If we had not +chanced to look out, we should never have been aware that he was there; +so why should we have anything to write to an individual of whose +existence we were unaware until a few moments ago?" + +"True," responded Harry. "I cannot make it out at all. Did you notice +which way he went?" + +"Yes," answered Roger, "I did notice that. You know that the court +below is enclosed by those four walls of the building? Well, there is a +small gateway on the right-hand side looking from here, in the wall +directly opposite, and I was just in time to see him vanish through +that. It may be that he will return again, however. If it is really +some person who is anxious to assist us to escape--and I cannot imagine +that it would be any other--he will be sure to come back as soon as it +is safe for him to do so. But I must confess that I cannot understand +why he seemed to be waiting for a message. If he had been trying to get +a paper or message to us it would have been a different matter; for the +first arrangements for escape must come from outside, and not from us. +We could do nothing without first learning what arrangements can be made +by our supposititious friend outside. Left to ourselves, we can +contrive no plan of escape. But the man has disappeared for the time +being, and we can do naught until we get into communication with him, so +let us get on with that cipher. I have found something that will do +nicely for a pen. While I was standing on your shoulders, and after the +mysterious man had gone, I had a look among that stuff on the +window-sill, and was lucky enough to find this feather. It has been a +long time there, judging by its appearance, and must have been dropped +by some bird which by this time is doubtless dead. I should say that +some other prisoner was once in the habit of feeding birds from this +grating; and probably it was one of them that dropped this feather, +which will be of so much service to us. We can cut it into a pen, and I +will now tell you where we can find our ink. Just take this knife of +yours, make a small cut in my arm, and--there is plenty of ink for us, +although it is red; but that does not matter." + +With the knife Roger then carefully trimmed the quill of the small +feather down into a fairly effective pen, and then turned his attention +once more to the cipher. + +Harry, who for some time past had been feeling the pangs of hunger +rather severely, remonstrated with his friend. + +"Look here, Roger," said he, "let us eat our dinner before going on with +that translation. I am feeling very hungry." + +"No, my friend," replied Roger, "there is no time like the present. For +aught we know we may never have another opportunity to work on this +cryptogram. Our food can wait, and we shall relish it the more when we +have time to eat it; but let us get finished with this matter first." + +Harry saw the wisdom of his chum's remark, and, casting one more longing +glance at the food, rejoined Roger at the stone table, and both lads +began to pore over the paper again. + +"Now," remarked Roger, "you will notice that the lines of figures are +far enough apart to allow us to write the letters corresponding to each +group of them directly underneath, and that will be a great help to us; +but we will write nothing until we are quite certain that we have hit +upon the correct method of solving this cryptogram. + +"You will remember, Harry, that by going over all the figures, we +deduced that the number 34 represented the letter E. You will notice +that this number, 34, is made up of many different groups of two +figures, such as 17 and 17, 14 and 20, 12 and 22, 16 and 18, 15 and 19, +13 and 21, and so forth; but that, I fancy, is only done to make the +solving of the cipher more difficult. Now, assuming the letter A to be +30, B to be 31, C to be 32, D to be 33, E, as we have reckoned, 34, let +us apply this method to the figures and see what we get. + +"We have already surmised that the number 1581 stands for no particular +letter, but is really what it seems most likely to be, that is, the year +in which this cryptogram was invented and written. Besides which, 15 +and 81 added, according to the system we are now employing, would make +96, a number which has no letter corresponding to it. + +"Now take the first group of figures, which is 2227. Divided into two +groups of two figures each, and added to one another, as we intend to +proceed, this makes 49. Now what letter corresponds to the number 49? +We find that the letter I does. Take the next group, which is 1819. +This resolves itself into 37, and H is the letter belonging to that +figure. From 1919 we get 38, and the letter I; and from 2622 comes 48, +and the letter S. Now you see, Harry, that by this method we have +already got the English word `This'; and from that it would seem that we +are at last on the right track for translating the cryptogram. From the +next two groups we get the word `is', and from the following three the +word `the'. I think now, Harry, that we may begin and write down the +translation as we go along; for I feel sure that we are right at last. +It would be more than mere coincidence if the words `This is the' were +not part of a connected and intelligible whole. So just hand me that +knife, Harry, boy, and I will produce the necessary ink." + +Harry did as he was requested; and, taking the weapon, Roger made a +small but sufficiently deep incision in his left arm to produce the +necessary amount of blood for their "ink". Dipping the improvised pen +in his own blood, Roger began to write under the groups of figures the +letters which corresponded to them; and, prompted by Harry, it was not +long ere he had the whole translation written down. And when this was +completed he wiped the blood off his arm, and hid the pen in the lining +of his jerkin. Then with much satisfaction he read out the true meaning +of the cryptogram which he had held for so long a time in his +possession, and which Alvarez would have sold his soul to secure. It +ran as follows:-- + +1581. + +This is the key to the Treasure of me, Jose Leirya. This Treasure which +is--"`of' is here understood, I suppose," put in Roger--great worth is +of jewels most part of much price, taken by me in the South Seas. Many +emeralds I took from a Prince of Mejico. Much gold also, buried deep +hole under stone. Iron ring cave lonely inlet 75 degrees west. 20 +degrees north. North-East end island Cuba. Stone 14 paces mouth 5 +paces right wall entering. + +"There!" said Roger in tones of exultation; "what do you say to my +method now, Harry? We now have the treasure in our power, or rather +when we get free once more." + +"Yes," agreed Harry, "always providing that someone else has not got +there before us." + +"Which is not at all likely," answered Roger. "We are almost certain +that this and the other are the only two copies of the cryptogram now in +existence, and, as soon as we have learned by heart its translation, we +will destroy the papers; and then nobody will ever come at it except by +accident, which is most unlikely. Why, Harry!" he continued in excited +tones; "lonely inlet must mean that very identical bay where we careened +the ships, and where the savages attacked us. Just imagine, we may +actually have walked over the spot where the treasure lies buried; you +see it says `hole under stone iron ring cave'. It may have been the +very cave that we were in when the natives besieged us, and we were +rescued by the sailors. But I saw no iron ring anywhere in it; did you, +Harry?" + +"No," answered Harry, "I did not. But that stands for nothing, for +there might have been a hundred stones and iron rings in that very cave +on that occasion, and we should never have noticed them; we were +otherwise much too fully occupied," he concluded with a smile. + +"I remember now," continued Roger, "that old Cary told me a yarn about +Jose Leirya--you, too, were present by the way--that night after we +reached the bay; and he said that the pirate was known to have +frequented those parts, and was supposed to have hidden some of his +treasure somewhere about there. I thought it was only an old sailor's +yarn at the time, I remember; but it seems to have been perfectly true." + +"Yes," agreed Harry; "but I should not reckon on this treasure too much +if I were you, Roger; remember we are in prison--it may be for the rest +of our lives, unless that mysterious man we saw just now should really +be a friend who wishes to assist us to escape. Besides, I am sure that +Alvarez has a suspicion that we know something about the paper, and I +cannot forget the sinister meaning of his words when he said that he +would require us later. I know only too well what will happen when that +time comes; and if he should treat us as he did poor de Soto--well, we +should never touch that hoard, Roger." + +"Heaven preserve us both from a fate like that!" Roger ejaculated. "I +would give up every hope of securing that wealth to avoid being tortured +as he was. But I would not let Alvarez know where it is, even to save +myself from all the agonies he could inflict upon me. I would endure +even death rather than tell that villain, that cruel, inhuman scoundrel, +where the treasure is; for I know quite well how he would use any money +he might be able to lay his hands upon. But I won't talk about it. No, +whatever may happen, Alvarez shall never know through me. What say you, +Harry?" + +"I am with you there, Roger," the lad replied. "I, too, swear that I +will never divulge the secret to Alvarez, whatever he may do. But +excuse me, my friend; you said that, after the business with the paper +had been got through with, we would have our dinner; and, as I said once +before, I am hungry, so come let us fall to." + +"Wait one moment," said Roger. "Do you think you know that translation +by heart thoroughly; for I have committed it to memory, and if you have +done the same we will destroy it, as it is much too dangerous a document +to keep about us, now that we have incurred the suspicion of that fiend, +Alvarez." + +"Yes," answered Harry, "I know it perfectly;" and he repeated it to his +friend. The paper was then at once torn up into the most minute +particles. They were on the point of throwing them out of the window, +but refrained, not so much because of the danger that they might be +pieced together again, as that they might attract the attention of +anybody who chanced to be about at the time. After a while, however, +they found a deep crack between the cell wall and the floor, partly +concealed by slime and dirt; and into this crack they pushed the +remnants of the cryptogram, and then hid the small aperture again by +covering it with more dirt scraped from the cell floor. Thus hidden it +was exceedingly unlikely that anybody would ever find the pieces unless +the exact spot was pointed out to him. + +The two lads then turned with much lightened hearts to their meal. It +was placed upon the stone table, and they began to share it between +them. There was a bunch of bananas this time, a delicacy they had +received but once before. Roger took them up to count and divide the +fruit, when he exclaimed: "Why, whatever is this?" + +"What?" asked Harry. + +"Look at this," rejoined Roger, holding something in his fingers. It +was a piece of paper which had been skilfully hidden in the fruit, and +on it a few lines of writing were to be seen. + + + +CHAPTER NINETEEN. + +HELP FROM AN UNEXPECTED QUARTER--PLANS MADE FOR ESCAPE. + +With wildly beating hearts, and with no further thoughts for their food, +which was tumbled unceremoniously on to the floor, the lads tore open +the folded paper, and eagerly scanned its contents. It ran as +follows:-- + + "To the two Englishmen at present imprisoned in the Inquisition at + Vera Cruz. It is known all through the city here that the man + Alvarez, who calls himself governor of the town and viceroy of the + province, intends to have you both burnt alive at an auto-da-fe in the + plaza five days from now. It was intended that you should be + exhibited and tortured in public here, and sent back to La Guayra for + final execution; but the news has come that your countryman, + Cavendish, has captured a plate fleet of nineteen ships near Acapulco, + and the populace demand that you should both be sacrificed in revenge, + to which Alvarez has consented. Unless you can escape before the + expiry of the five days you are doomed. There is one chance for you, + if you can take it, and I am here to assist you. You can trust me + implicitly. I am an English sailor who was made to renounce my + religion through torture, and I am now in service here; but I have not + forgotten my country. To escape, you must contrive to lower a thin + cord from the window, the thinner the better, so that I can + communicate with and send small articles to you. Leave this cord + hanging from your window, at midnight on the third night from now, + without fail; I can do nothing until then. I have contrived to get + this message concealed in your food on this one occasion, but I shall + never be able to do so again. So you must somehow or another manage + to lower to the ground the thin cord of which I told you. Without + that I cannot aid you. + + "I shall wait here for a time, so that you can throw down a note + saying you have received my message; but say no more besides that. If + I do not hear from you now, I shall return on the third night, and the + cord must be in its place by then. For the present, farewell! + + "From a true friend." + +This was a long message; but the man who wrote it had done so in such +small letters that it occupied but little space. So small, indeed, was +the writing that it was as much as they could do to decipher it. + +When they had finishing reading this remarkable communication, the lads +looked at each other for a moment in utter amazement. + +Suddenly Roger ejaculated: "Ah, of course! Now I have it, Harry! The +man that we saw waiting below the window--he was the person who wrote +this; and he was waiting for the answer, as he said in the note. That +is why he seemed to expect us to throw him something. Oh, why, why did +we not think of looking sooner? But, of course, we expected nothing of +the kind. Anyhow he says he will return on the third night from now. +But where, Harry, are we going to get that cord that he wants us to hang +from the window? Our escape hinges upon our getting it; and yet--where +is it to come from? It is utterly impossible for us to get hold of a +cord or line of any sort, so far as I can see. I wonder who the fellow +is; and can we trust him?" + +"Well," replied Harry, "you saw what he wrote in that message. In five +days from now, unless we can meanwhile escape, we are doomed to die an +awful death. The man would, I should say, have no object in betraying +us; because, if we are already sentenced to death, they do not need any +excuse for executing us. And I do not see what the man has to gain by +deceiving us. No, Roger, I think the man is genuine enough; and in any +case, if we are to suffer death, we may as well die in the attempt to +escape as wait here for death to come to us. Is it not so, my friend? + +"But perhaps we had better put off the further discussion of this until +we have eaten the food. If, when they come to put in our next supply, +they find this still uneaten, they may suspect that something is amiss, +and remove us to another cell, or even separate us; either of which +happenings would put an end for good and all to our chances of escape. +Besides, we can talk as we are eating. Come, Roger, wake up, man, and +fall to! Eat as much as you can, for we shall need all our strength to +go through with what is before us." + +Roger saw the wisdom of Harry's argument, and, replacing the food on the +table, whence it had fallen in their eagerness to read the message, they +set to, and very soon demolished the whole of it, replacing the platter, +as usual, when they had finished, by the side of the trap, to be removed +when the next meal was put in. + +"Now," remarked Harry, "let us resume our discussion of this strange +business, Roger. So far as I can see, the matter stands--Hullo! what's +that? Did you hear that, Roger?" he suddenly interjected. + +"Yes," replied Roger, "I did. What can it be, I wonder?" + +There had come a slight sound from the direction of the grating, as of +some hard substance striking against the iron bars. + +Both lads hurried to the grating, and glanced up at it; but they could +see nothing to account for the sound. + +"This is most remarkable," said Harry. "I heard the sound quite +plainly. It was just like two pieces of iron striking together; and it +sounded in the cell itself, or just outside the grating. Jump up on my +shoulders again, Roger, and see if you can see anything or anybody +about." + +Harry bent his back, and helped Roger to climb up on his shoulders. And +Roger had just drawn himself upright with his face reaching to the level +of the grating, when he uttered a suppressed exclamation, and half-fell, +half-slid down to the floor from his perch, and started vigorously +rubbing his cheek. + +"Whatever is the matter with you, Roger?" ejaculated Harry somewhat +crossly; "you nearly broke my back coming down like that." Then, as he +saw Roger rubbing his face, his tone changed, and he enquired anxiously, +"What is it, old fellow; are you hurt?" + +"No; not much, that is," rejoined his friend. "Just as I got my head up +level with the grating, and was going to look out, something hit me on +the cheek with considerable force, and, losing my balance, I came +tumbling down. I am sorry if I hurt you, Harry, old lad." + +As he finished speaking, both caught the sound of quick and stealthy +footsteps retreating across the courtyard below, and retiring, so far as +they could judge by the sound, through the gateway by which the writer +of their message had disappeared. + +"Ha!" said Harry; "someone has been below our window again. I wonder +what it is this time? And what was it that struck you, Roger; could you +tell?" + +"No," answered Roger. "I know only that something hit me hard on the +cheek, and I thought for the moment that my eye was struck. No, I have +not the least idea what it could have been." + +"Could it," suggested Harry, "have been that fellow whom we saw this +morning, come back again with another message; and was he trying to +attract our attention, think you?" + +"That I cannot say," answered Roger; "but I certainly heard footsteps +disappearing just now. Did not you?" + +"Yes, I did," answered Harry; "but I did not attach very much +significance to the matter until the individual had gone. Well, we do +not know what it was, and we have no time to waste; so let us give our +whole attention to the matter of that message. Have you got the paper? +Well, when we have finished with it, you had better hide it away +somewhere safely, or, better still, destroy it altogether; for we never +know when we may be searched. They may take it into their heads to do +so at any moment." + +"Ay, we will do so," agreed Roger; "'twill, as you say, be safer. But +go on with what you were about to say before that interruption came." + +"Well," resumed Harry, "as I was saying, it seems to stand like this: +Alvarez, it would appear, has doomed us to die at an auto-da-fe, five +days hence, in order to satisfy the demand of the people of this town +for revenge, their desire for which has been aroused by the capture by +Mr Cavendish of the plate fleet off Acapulco. This fact is known by +everybody in the town, and consequently has come to the ears of this +man, who says he is an English sailor. + +"I should say that he is probably a man--one of the very few that the +Dons have ever taken--captured during some action, and tortured to make +him recant. He apparently did so in order to spare himself further +pain, as men have done on several occasions, and he is now possibly a +serving-man, or something of the kind, in the employ of some Spanish +grandee or another. But he has not forgotten the fact that he is an +Englishman, and, hearing that two of his fellow-countrymen are to be put +to a painful death at an auto-da-fe in the Plaza in five days' time, has +made up his mind to save our lives, if possible. If successful, I +should say that he himself will try to get away with us. + +"At very considerable risk, and doubtless with great difficulty, he has +been able to get one message to us, but will not be able to do so again. +So he wishes us to procure a piece of cord thin enough to escape easy +detection, and hang it from our window, so that he can communicate with +us as may be necessary, and so that he can perhaps send up to us certain +small articles. For some reason he cannot come again until three days' +hence, when he will be waiting below our grating at midnight for us to +lower the line to him, when we may expect another message, and probably +instructions what to do so that we may escape. Why he cannot come until +midnight on the third night I cannot guess, but evidently there is +something very weighty and important to prevent his doing so, otherwise, +knowing that there are but five days altogether before our execution, he +would commence at once to arrange for our escape without losing any +time; for a delay of three days now may make all the difference whether +we are to live or die. + +"All this we learn from his letter; and my opinion is that we must just +trust this man, and hope that he will be able to succeed in his efforts; +for until we hear again from him, as to what he wishes us to do to +assist him, we can do nothing--absolutely nothing. Now, the first +difficulty that confronts us is the matter of that line of which he +speaks, and without which, he tells us, escape is impossible. How in +the world can we secure a rope or cord of any sort? We never even see +our jailer, much less talk to him, so that we have no opportunity of +attempting to bribe him, and it is most unlikely that we could do so, +even if we could speak to him. There is nothing in the cell that we can +possibly turn to account; so I do not see at all what we can do. It +seems very hard to lose our lives just because we are at a loss for a +small thing like a piece of cord or rope." + +"For my own part," said Roger, "I wonder somewhat why the man did not +make some suggestion as to how we might secure such a thing. Surely he +must know that it is utterly impossible for us to procure anything of +the kind in prison. I wonder, now, whether that was he or not whose +footsteps we heard in the yard a little time ago; and what--Why, Harry, +what if that thing that hit me in the face should be another message +wrapped round something to make it carry up to the window?" + +"Roger," exclaimed Harry in great jubilation, "I believe you have hit +upon the very thing. The man said he could not get another message +conveyed for him. The cord is not in position so that he can send +anything up by that. What more likely than that he should try to throw +a note up to us through the bars? In fact it is the only way. Let us +look at once. It must have fallen somewhere in the cell, I should say, +since it struck you in the face. That fact shows that it came between +the bars; and it would hardly rebound outside again." + +And in the now fast-failing light both lads dropped on their hands and +knees and began a feverish search for what might very easily make all +the difference to them between living and dying a horrible and painful +death. Hound and round the fast-darkening cell they crawled, but not a +sign of anything could they find, until Harry, who was searching a +corner where the faint light from the grating could not reach, suddenly +placed his hand upon something hard, which rolled under the pressure. +Clasping it tight in his fist, he rushed to the grating and looked at +the article. Yes, sure enough, it was a piece of paper wrapped round a +pebble. He softly called Roger to his side, and, opening the folded +missive, both began to read. And, as they read, both faces became +several shades paler, and their hearts beat thickly. The note ran as +follows:-- + + "I waited for some time below your window in the hope that you would + drop an answer from it to my first letter; but I found that I was + being watched, and had therefore to leave. How I shall get this + present note to you I do not know, but if nobody is about I shall wrap + it round a stone and try to throw it through your window. This is to + tell you that Alvarez has decided to advance the day for your + execution, which will take place on the day after to-morrow. + Therefore you must act at once. I am myself in great danger through + my attempts to help you, and if the date had not been altered should + not have come until the third night from now. But there is no time to + lose, so I must endeavour to come to you to-night. I may be + discovered, but I must risk that. Now, attend well to what I am going + to write. At midnight to-night, instead of three nights hence, I + shall be here, underneath your window. You must at any cost let down + a thin cord, or all my efforts will be vain. I will then attach to + the cord several small files and a saw of fine temper. If the line is + not strong enough to bear the weight I will tie a light line which I + shall bring with me to yours; you will then haul that up first, and, + making fast the end, you can then pull up the things I shall bring. + If I have any more news then, I will also send up a letter to you. + With the files and saw you must cut away all the bars of your grating + except one. This will leave room for you to climb through. The one + bar must be left to secure a stout rope to, so that you may slide down + it. The work of cutting the bars will take you all to-morrow; so + after my visit to-night I shall not come again until the time arrives + for you to make your escape. Be very careful to work silently, or you + will be discovered, for spies are everywhere. When the bars are cut, + put them back in their places, so that if anyone enters your cell they + shall not notice the change. + + "For your first line to lower down to me, unravel your hose or + under-jerkin, or any garment you can spare without it being noticed. + This will give you a long, thin line, to the end of which you must + secure a light weight to prevent it from blowing about. Now, until + to-night, farewell! I shall be there at midnight exactly, and you + must be quite ready. Make no mistake, for this is your only chance, + and any mistake will mean the loss of my life as well as your own." + +This ended the letter, and Roger immediately took it from Harry's hand, +and concealed it, with the first missive, in the lining of his jerkin. + +"Now, Harry," said he, "we must act at once; for, as the fellow says, +there is no time to lose, and it will take us all the time we have left +before darkness sets in to unravel a garment to form our line. He will +send us up several files, he says in the letter. Now, if we can put +those two stools one on top of the other we shall both be able to stand +on them and work together; which is a fortunate thing, as it will take +us a long time to cut those bars, so thick are they. I hope the noise +will not be heard through the walls, and draw the attention of our +jailers; but we must be as silent as we can, and risk the rest. I am +more glad than ever now that we closed up that spy-hole, for, had we not +done so, we should certainly have been discovered already. Now, Harry, +we had best begin on this under-jerkin of mine; the absence of that will +not be noticed if I keep my doublet buttoned well up and over. You +begin at one end and I will start at the other corner, so that, if we +are pressed for time, we can break the threads off and join yours and +mine together, and have twice the length we should get otherwise." + +Roger stripped his jerkin off, replaced his doublet, and both set to +work. By this time the daylight had nearly gone, but, as fortune would +have it, a full moon rode high in the sky, and one shaft of light +filtered in through the barred window. The court below, however, was in +darkness, as the walls were so high that the moonbeams never struck +lower than about half-way down them. In this small patch of light, +then, the two lads worked for their lives. + +When they began their task they considered that about three hours would +suffice to complete the work. As time passed, however, it seemed to +them as though their fingers were made of lead, so slow did they appear +to move, to the lads' excited imagination. Yard by yard the silk became +unravelled, and was rolled carefully round Roger's finger, so that, when +the time came, there might be no hitch in paying it out. + +Every yard that they unravelled seemed to take them an hour in the +process, and so occupied were they that it was some few moments before +they became aware that at least two small pebbles had been thrown +through the window, and then they only noticed it because one of the +stones happened to fall directly upon the remnant of the garment upon +which they were employed. + +"Roger, Roger, there he is," whispered Harry in great excitement. +"Quick, quick! unwind that silk from your finger, and--Where can we find +anything to tie on the end for a weight?" he added. + +Roger unwound the silk as fast as he knew how, and Harry desperately +searched every nook and cranny of the cell for something to secure to +the end. + +"I have it," said Roger in a low tone, as he finished unwinding the silk +and coiled it carefully on the stone table, so that it might run free +without being entangled. "I have it. We will secure your knife to the +end, Harry; it will bear that weight, I should say, and we can haul it +up again when the stouter line is attached." + +"Very well," answered Harry, producing the article in question, which +was soon tied firmly to the end of the unravelled silk. + +The two stools were then dragged to the window, and on these Roger +mounted, whilst Harry handed up the knife with the silk tied to it. + +"God grant that the line may bear the weight!" said Roger to himself, as +he took the apparatus from Harry. + +Then he leant forward and extended his arm so far that any person +standing below would be able to see it in the moonlight, although the +person himself in the courtyard would be hidden in the shadow cast by +the high walls of the prison. He allowed his hand to remain for a few +moments, shining white in the moonlight, in order to signify to the man +below that he was in readiness, and was prepared to let down the line. +As if in answer, another small pebble came clattering against the wall +just below the grating, and Roger's heart stood still for a moment with +deadly fear, lest any unwelcome listener might be about. + +But there was no sign of such being the case, and the lad lowered +carefully away until he felt the knife touch the ground. + +A few seconds later he felt a gentle vibration of the silk, as the man +below fastened something to it, and then came three light pulls on the +line. Roger rightly took this for a signal to haul up, and immediately +did so. + +He hauled away with the utmost care, for he knew that his very life +depended upon it, and when he had hauled in his own line he found +attached to it a cord of stouter proportions, and capable of sustaining +a very much heavier burden. + +To be on the safe side, he at once secured the end of this second line +to a bar of the grating, in case it should slip through his fingers, and +handed the silken line to Harry, asking him to re-coil it for use again +should it be required. Then he gave three light tugs to the line at his +end, as a signal that he was ready for the next operation. Immediately +he had done so, the gentle movement of the line began again, and was +followed directly afterward by the three signal pulls, but stronger ones +this time. Up came the cord, and this time it was evident that there +was something quite heavy at the other end. Roger pulled up quickly, +and presently a dark bundle made its appearance at the window. He +grasped this carefully and handed it to Harry, who placed it upon the +cell table. + +Then the cord was sent down once more. There was a longer pause this +time, and Roger was on the point of pulling up the cord, thinking that +their unknown friend had finished his part of the business, when the +three pulls came again, and Roger once more hoisted away on the line. + +It was not so heavy on this occasion, and on taking it in through the +window he found that Harry's knife and a piece of paper were the only +articles that were attached. + +He surmised, therefore, that nothing else was to be sent up, and read +the missive before sending down the cord again. It was short and to the +point this time. + +It ran thus:-- + +"I am writing this in the courtyard below. I have sent up all the +necessary tools; so you need not lower the cord again to-night. It +rests with you now to cut the bars, and it must be done by midnight +to-morrow night or all will be in vain. I shall be here again then, and +will send up a rope thick enough to bear your weight. You must climb +down this, and I will be at the bottom to receive and guide you to +safety. Till to-morrow, farewell!" + +When this had been read, it was placed, together with the other two +missives, in the lining of Roger's doublet. + +"Now, Harry, lad," the latter whispered, "quick! let us see what there +is in this bundle, and then set to work at once. No sleep to-night, my +lad. When next we sleep we shall either be out of the clutches of the +Inquisition, or--we shall be sleeping the last long sleep of all!" + + + +CHAPTER TWENTY. + +HOW ROGER EFFECTED HIS ESCAPE. + +On opening the bundle it was found to contain three files, very thin, +extremely sharp, and of wonderful temper. There were also two small +saws, with handles to them, and a bottle of very thick oil, to make the +saws and files cut faster, and also to prevent that harsh, squeaking +sound which usually arises when steel cuts against steel. + +The two lads, in their eagerness, snatched the tools from the leather +bag, and, replacing the stools one above the other, mounted them and +began to work swiftly and silently. + +"We must remember, Roger," whispered Harry, "that we shall have to +listen very carefully for footsteps coming along that passage, and hide +these tools somewhere at the first sound. Of course, if we were seen +working here, or if the tools were discovered, we might just as well +give up at once, for there would be no hope left." + +"You are right, my friend," answered Roger. "But I do not intend that +anybody shall catch us at this work; nor shall they catch sight of the +tools. At the first sound of any person approaching you must jump down +for your life, remove the stools, and sit down and pretend to be asleep. +I will wrap the tools up quickly in their bag, and slip them into my +jerkin. If we are summoned from the cell, and are likely to be +searched, I shall endeavour, as we go, to drop the parcel behind the +door, where it cannot be seen unless someone enters the cell and +deliberately looks behind the door, which is not very likely unless they +suspect us of having got hold of any tools. Now remember what I say. +No more talk now, Harry; we shall require all our breath for working." + +They slaved away with file and saw, never ceasing work for a moment, +until their muscles utterly refused to allow their tired arms to make +another movement, and then they rested for a moment to recover. Harry +and Roger each worked on a separate bar of the grating, and so equal had +been their efforts that each lad's bar was cut through at the same time. + +"There go two nails drawn from our coffins, Roger," said Harry, and he +attacked his second bar with the energy born of deserved success. Roger +uttered no word, but saved all his breath, and put every ounce of his +strength into his arms, cutting away with file and saw like a very +madman. + +As the bars were cut out they were laid carefully on the sill in front +of them, so as to be at hand for replacement directly any suspicious +sound was heard. All night long they worked, and with such a will that +soon after daybreak next morning but two bars remained to be cut +through. As usual, an hour or two after dawn they heard the click of +the trap as their food was placed in the cell; but it startled them only +for a moment, for they had not overlooked the fact that their food was +due to arrive. Moreover, they knew that the aperture was so small that +there was but just room to pass a small platter through it, and that, +even if the jailer should attempt to spy on them, the window was beyond +his range of vision. The sound, however, recalled the fact to their +minds that they were very hungry, and that if they wished to keep up +their strength they must eat. And, as Harry said, they had done good +work during the night, so that they could spare the time. The tools +were therefore packed up and hidden away; the bars already cut were +replaced so that anybody chancing to look in should notice nothing out +of the ordinary; then the stools were removed from below the window, and +both lads sat down to their morning meal with keener appetites than they +had known for some months past. Everything in the cell presented its +usual appearance, and the twain were hastily finishing their meal when +the tramp of feet was heard in the passage. No quiet, stealthy footstep +this time, but a clatter of several approaching men which there was no +mistaking. Roger and Harry looked at one another, dismay written all +over their countenances. What was to happen now? Had the hour for +their execution been advanced again, and were they to be led out to +death at once, or was their cell to be changed and all their labour +rendered useless, and their chance of escape destroyed at the very last +moment? These, and a hundred other surmises, chased each other rapidly +through the lads' minds as they listened with bated breath to the noise +of the approaching footsteps. Each, however, pulled himself together, +and by the time that the cell door was opened the lads presented +absolutely expressionless faces to their enemies. The door clanged +open, disclosing to their sight a number of men in black robes and +cowls. + +"His Excellency the Viceroy requires the attendance of you both," said +one of the masked inquisitors in a deep voice and in remarkably good +English. "Follow me at once." + +The man turned to lead the way. Harry followed close on his heels; but +as Roger prepared to leave the cell he pretended to stumble, and when +picking himself up adroitly deposited the little satchel of tools behind +the open door. His action, he was much relieved to notice, attracted no +attention, and he had the satisfaction of seeing the cell door closed +after them, and of knowing, therefore, that the precious implements were +safe for the time being. + +They were led through the self-same passages and corridors by which they +had walked to the torture-chamber a few days before, and their hearts +sank within them, for this second journey seemed to them ominous of +evil. + +Yes, it was but too true. In a few minutes they reached the door of +that Chamber of Horrors, passed through it, heard it shut after them, +and found themselves once more in the presence of that arch-fiend, +Alvarez, "Viceroy of the Province, Governor of the City, and Chief of +the Holy Inquisition in the town of Vera Cruz". They were not long left +in doubt as to what was in store for them. Alvarez spoke: + +"I understand that you two young men formerly belonged to the squadron +of that most pestilent heretic and pirate, Cavendish; is it not so? +Answer me!" + +"Yes," replied Harry, "we belonged, and consider that we still belong, +to the ship of Mr Cavendish, who is no pirate, but a noble and true +English gentleman." + +"Silence!" snarled Alvarez. "Do not dare to speak in that way to me! +Answer my questions only, and make no remarks of your own. I say that +the man Cavendish is a pirate, and that is sufficient. Now, you are +both heretics, that I know, and I am shortly going to the trouble of +attempting to convert you to the only true faith, through the gentle, +loving, and persuasive methods applied to heretics by the most Holy +Inquisition. You had an example, only the other day, of the way in +which Mother Church deals with those who obey her not. She always uses +the most gentle means to bring about conversion, and would lead heretics +to a knowledge of the true faith by loving-kindness alone, as no doubt +you noticed in the case of the man de Soto, who was undergoing the +process of persuasion when you were last here." And he gave vent to a +most horrible and grating laugh. + +"I am deeply grieved to inform you," he continued, "that de Soto +persisted in denying all knowledge of a certain matter, and--well, he is +dead now, rest his soul!" he added sardonically. + +"Since seeing you two," he resumed, "I have come to the conclusion that +I was perhaps somewhat hasty with de Soto, and imagine it is possible +that he did not possess the knowledge I credited him with, and it may be +that I punished him unjustly. But that little matter is now past +regret, and we have to deal with the present. The matter in hand deals +with the loss of a certain document from the cabin of a Spanish +war-vessel, the _Gloria del Mundo_, which ship you both doubtless +remember. I thought at first that de Soto was responsible for its +disappearance; but, if my memory serves me aright, you two lads left the +vessel after de Soto and myself, and, from what I have gathered, I +imagine that you may know something about the paper. If you know, tell +me where it is, and I will spare you; but if you decide not to speak-- +well, you saw what de Soto suffered the other day, and his treatment was +gentle compared with what yours will be unless you decide to tell me +where that paper is to be found, for I am convinced that you know. Now, +speak; speak--you!" Again Harry acted as spokesman, and replied: + +"Senor Alvarez, we have heard what you say, and we know to what paper +you refer; but we have it not. It is no longer in existence, and +consequently it can never be found. You may do your worst; but though +you should torture us both to death, it is not in our power, or that of +any other mortal, to give you a document which does not now exist." + +"I do not believe you," shouted Alvarez. "It cannot be so. That paper +must be somewhere," he foamed, "and I will have it if I am compelled to +tear you limb from limb to get it. Will you speak, or will you not?" +Alvarez literally foamed at the mouth with rage, for indeed he was +nearly mad with disappointment. In spite of himself, he had an inward +conviction that what Harry said was true, and that, do what he might, he +would never again set eyes on that paper, the possession of which he so +earnestly desired. + +Revenge, however, sweet revenge, still remained, and that he could and +would have. He had worked himself up to a pitch of fury that very +closely approached madness; moreover, his bitter disappointment demanded +alleviation through the suffering of him who had inflicted it. So, +without waiting for a reply, he roared, pointing to Harry: + +"Seize that lad who spoke, and put him to the torture. I will soon see +whether he still refuses to speak when I command! Bind that other one, +and let him see all that happens; for it will be his turn next, and he +may as well know what is in store for him. Ha! ha!" and he laughed +again with sardonic fury. + +Both lads struggled desperately in the grip of the black-cowled +inquisitors; but their struggles were fruitless, and in a few minutes +Harry was lying on the floor bound, while Roger was tied in an upright +position to one of the pillars of the chamber, in such a fashion that, +do as he would, he could not avoid witnessing the tortures that were to +be executed upon the body of his dear friend and bosom companion from +his boyhood upwards. At the last moment Roger would have intervened to +save Harry, actually offering to yield up the coveted secret if Alvarez +would relent. But the latter refused; his lust of blood was aroused, +his passion for witnessing the agony of others must be satiated at any +cost. Moreover, was not Roger in his power? He would compel the lad to +witness his friend's sufferings; give him the night wherein to dwell +upon them; and, next morning, first wring the secret from him under a +threat of torture, and afterwards-- + +It is unnecessary to harrow the feelings of the reader with a +description of what next took place in that ghastly chamber. Suffice it +to say that the torture and examination of Harry lasted until mid-day, +when it was seen that his senses had left him, and that he was no longer +conscious of the dreadful injuries that were being inflicted upon him. +He was then carried back to the cell and laid upon the floor, while +Roger was unbound and allowed to accompany him. The door was closed and +bolted, and Roger was alone with the pitiful, scarred, torn, and +bleeding wreck of his friend. He fetched water from the jug and forced +a few drops down Harry's throat, laved his brow, and bound up his seared +and bleeding wounds as best he could. Presently Harry opened his eyes, +and, seeing Roger bending over him, smiled even amid his pain. + +"Do not weep, Roger, old friend," he said, noticing the tears running +down his chum's face; "they have done their utmost on me, and I shall +not last out long enough to surfer at their hands again. Nay, Roger, +dear lad, it is of no use. You cannot save me, and indeed I do not +desire to live; for of what use would life be to one in my condition? +They have torn the life so nearly from my poor body that there is but +little remaining, and that little you could not save, my dear old +friend. You did your best before they began upon me, and failed. No +man could do more. Just put your doublet under my head to keep it off +the hard stone, dear lad; and oh, Roger, do not weep so bitterly; it +tears my heart to see you. I feel but little pain now, and what still +remains will not be for long. Now, Roger, listen to me, my friend. I +shall be gone very soon; do not, I pray you, stay grieving over my body +after I am dead, for that will avail me nothing, and only involve you in +my fate. Therefore, get those tools and cut away at that grating, so +that you will be ready when that unknown friend of ours comes to assist +you to escape. Promise me, Roger. You will win home safely; I know it; +I feel that you will. And you will take care of Mary, my dear sister +Mary, will you not, Roger? See that she comes to no harm, old friend. +Remember the secret of that cryptogram, Roger, and fetch that treasure +away; my share of it is yours, my friend. I do not tell you to give it +to Mary, for I think you can guess what I mean when I say I do not think +it will be necessary. Roger," he resumed after a short silence, broken +only by the deep sobs of his sorrowing companion, "Roger, dear lad, hold +my hand, for it is getting very dark, and I cannot see. I like to feel +that you are near me, and I have no fear." His breathing now grew +rapidly weaker, until presently only a faint fluttering sigh could be +heard; then his eyes opened again, and he said: "Good-bye, Roger, I am +going, dear lad and faithful comrade; good-bye, and God bless you! +Remember what I said about preparing for to-night; and do not grieve for +me, for indeed I am quite happy. Good-bye!" His head fell back, his +breathing ceased, and Roger knew that he was now alone. Alone in +prison, and still in the hands of the Holy Office. He reverently closed +the eyes of his chum, and covered his face, after which he remained +seated by the side of the body of the beloved dead, lost in bitter +thought and sorrowful retrospection. + +He was aroused by hearing the click of the trap-door in the wall as the +food was thrust in, and this recalled him to himself. + +He remembered Harry's last injunction, that he was to continue the work +of cutting through the bars of the grating in order to be ready to +escape when midnight came. And he also remembered that Harry had given +his sister Mary into his charge, and enjoined him to look after and take +care of her. + +How could he do this if he remained where he was, and lost his life, +even as poor Harry had lost his? No, he must put away his grief and +melancholy thoughts until a more convenient season. If he wished to +fulfil his promises to his dead friend, he must first escape. Actuated +by these reflections, he feverishly seized the tools once more and set +to work on the remaining two bars of the grating. The work took longer, +labouring by himself, but eventually one bar was cut through entirely, +and but one more remained. The night was getting on, however. There +was no means of knowing what hour it was, but he felt that it must be +nearing the appointed time. He seized one of the saws and began work on +the last bar, and at last cut it through also at the top. He had barely +finished that part of his task when a pebble came clattering up against +the wall just below the grating. The man was there already then! He +left the bar for a moment and lowered away the cord, and presently he +felt the now familiar jerking at the end and hauled it up. There was a +missive at the end, and, unfastening it from the cord, Roger took it to +the friendly patch of moonlight and read as follows:-- + + "I have heard the news already, and am sorry. But I have come to save + you, as it is to be your turn to-morrow. Come at once, if you can; + but if you have not quite finished, I can wait a little. When you are + ready, send down the cord, and I will attach the rope. You can haul + that up and fasten it securely. Then climb down as quickly as you + can. + + "We are in luck to-night. Before dark fell I noticed an English + vessel in the offing. She is still there. If we can but seize a boat + we shall be able to reach her, and we shall then be safe, so hasten." + +Roger very quickly glanced through this communication, and prepared to +finish his work on the bar, when he noticed that it was the only one +remaining. In his abstraction he had already cut through one end of the +last bar--the only one to which he could secure the rope. Luckily, he +had cut it at the top end; so he trusted that, if the rope were fastened +securely at the bottom, it would bear his weight. He quickly lowered +away his cord again, and in another minute felt the welcome tug, which +signified that the means of his escape was secured at the end of the +cord. He hauled away slowly, for this time the burden was heavy, but +eventually he saw the end of a good stout rope make its appearance at +the grating. He gathered in a sufficient length, and secured it firmly +to the one remaining bar; and, as he did so, it dawned upon him that, +had his rescue come but a little later, he would himself, in his grief +and abstraction, have destroyed his only chance of ever being able to +escape, by removing the last bar altogether. + +All being now ready, Roger went over to Harry's body, and, tenderly +kissing the poor white lips, said, very softly: "Good-bye, dear lad, +until we meet again. I will amply avenge thee!" Then, with his knife +he cut off a lock of his friend's hair, and placed it securely in his +bosom. He cast one more look round the cell, and then hauled himself up +into the embrasure, and, forcing his body through the opening, seized +the rope, with a fervent prayer in his heart for deliverance, and began +the descent. After what seemed an eternity he felt a pair of strong +arms flung round him, and he was eased to the ground. + +"Come along, sir," exclaimed the unknown man in a whisper; "we have no +time to lose. They seem more wakeful than usual to-night, aloft there," +pointing upward at the building with his thumb, "and they may find out +your absence at any moment. Then we should both be lost, unless we were +well clear of this accursed building. Now, speak no more, on your life, +but do as I do, and follow me. If anybody accosts us, leave the +answering to me. Cover your face as well as you can, and come along." + +He grasped Roger's hand, and together they set off through the darkness. +The rope they were obliged to leave as it was, having no means of +removing it. Through the little gateway--which Roger had seen this same +man pass on one occasion--they went, and found themselves in another and +much larger courtyard, planted with all kinds of flowering shrubs and +trees. These could only be dimly seen in the darkness, but Roger +judged, from their presence, that they were now going through that part +of the building where the quarters of the occupants were situated. +After a short time, occupied in fast walking, they came to an alleyway, +or small avenue, down which they hastened, and at the end of this was a +closed door of exceptionally stout and strong construction. Roger +believed, seeing it closed, that their attempt at escape had met with a +premature end; but no, the guide pressed a handle gently, and the door +swung open, and as Roger stepped out he felt the cool salt breeze +blowing on his face, and he knew that he was free at last. Free, after +months of weary imprisonment, torture, and suffering; yes, free! His +whole body seemed to expand to the grateful influence of the gentle +sea-breeze; but his heart was very, very sad for the loss of his friend. + +The two fugitives plunged onward, across streets, down alleys, and up +steps, until they come to a huge open square, at the rear of which an +enormous building towered high. In the middle of the square was to be +made out, dimly, a pile or heap of some sort, with what looked liked a +short, thick pole, standing upright above it. Roger asked his guide in +a whisper what it was. The man replied: + +"This big square is the Plaza of Vera Cruz, and the large building +yonder is the cathedral. That peculiar-shaped object you see there is a +heap of wood and straw surrounding a stake, and on that heap, bound to +that stake, you and your friend were doomed to die to-morrow!" + +Roger felt his flesh creep, and hurried forward at an increased rate of +speed. Presently, after going down a very narrow and steep street, +Roger perceived that they had reached the beach, and he heard the dull +"boom" of the surf as it rolled in and broke on the sand. + +The guide now spoke to him. "Do you see a small light out there, well +away in the offing?" + +"I think I can see something of the kind," replied Roger. + +"Well," explained the man, "that vessel is my old ship, the _Elizabeth_. +I was aboard her last time she came out here, and I was captured during +one of her actions. She is one of Mr Cavendish's vessels. I hear that +he left her in these seas to harry the Spaniards, whilst he took the +rest of the fleet round the other side, where he has just captured their +plate fleet. I shall be right glad to get back aboard her again." + +"What!" exclaimed Roger in astonishment; "is that the dear old +_Elizabeth_? Why, I know her captain and crew well. Many is the time I +have been aboard her." + +"Is that so, sir?" queried the man. "Then you will know old Cary, +perhaps, who used to be aboard her." + +"Ay," replied Roger, "I know him well; but he was on the flag-ship, the +_Stag Royal_, and not the _Elizabeth_, when I saw him last." + +"Well," said the sailor, "in any case we must not waste time--hark, +hark, there go the bells! They have discovered your escape. Now we +must be moving, for our very lives. This way." + +And he hurried along a quay wall, which formed one of the arms of a +little harbour where small craft might lie. + +The bells were indeed clanging wildly, and the noise was deafening. +Voices were to be heard now--snouts and cries; though whether the people +were yet on their track or not they could not tell. Along the wall they +hastened at a run, until they came to a small lateen-rigged vessel, +secured to the farthest end of the mole, and with her one huge sail +roughly furled round the yard. They dashed on board, cut the ropes +through, and the sailor, swarming up the rigging, cut the lashings, and +the foot of the lateen sail dropped down on deck. Roger hauled the +sheet aft and made it fast, then sprang to the tiller, and the little +craft began to move away from the mole under the influence of the +breeze. + +"Lucky we found no one aboard," gasped the sailor, whose name was +Mathews; "but then I did not expect that there would be anybody about; +they never leave a watch on these little craft." + +Roger still grasped the helm, and steered through the harbour's mouth +for the tiny point of light, which was the beacon of their safety, while +Mathews busied himself with the sail, and with making all snug on deck. + +Although the town of Vera Cruz itself was still in darkness, away to the +eastward the first streaks of day were already showing, and the light on +the English man-of-war lying in the offing was growing fainter. Away +behind them, from the direction of the mole, the two fugitives could +hear a sound as of many people in pursuit, and presently a dark patch +detached itself from the darkness, and appeared to be following them; +and soon they made it out to be the sail of a vessel very similar to the +one they had so unceremoniously captured. She was a much larger craft, +and after a while there could be no doubt that she was overhauling them. +But they were now drawing well out toward the English vessel, although +the latter had not yet sighted them, and the issue, so far, hung on the +race between the two feluccas. The pursuing vessel crept up closer and +ever closer, and Roger and Mathews began to picture themselves as +adorning that bonfire in the plaza after all. + +But now the English ship seemed to awake to what was going forward, and +to take in the situation at once. That one felucca was flying and the +other pursuing they could see at a glance. There was a puff of white +smoke from her side, and a shot flew screaming over their heads and +plunged into the water just in front of the pursuing felucca. Still she +held on, gaining remorselessly. Her crew began to fire at the +fugitives, compelling them to steer in a crouching position below the +bulwarks. By an occasional backward glance Roger saw her gradually +creeping up, and wondered why the English ship did not fire again; then +he discovered that his own vessel was in the line of fire. The +Spaniards had cleverly managed to get exactly behind him, so that the +English could not fire without hitting the foremost vessel. Therefore +Roger risked his life and liberty in a desperate manoeuvre. With a +sweep of the tiller he put the helm hard over, and the little vessel +bounded away on the opposite tack, leaving her pursuer without shelter. +The English ship--the crew of which were evidently waiting for something +of the sort to happen--took immediate advantage of her opportunity, and +let fly her whole broadside, luckily bringing down the pursuer's mast. +After that the fugitives were safe, and half an hour later were on board +the old _Elizabeth_, Roger talking to the captain and his +fellow-officers, and Mathews below, relating marvellous adventures to +his former mess-mates. Roger gave a full and graphic account of all +that had happened to himself and Harry, and told of his poor friend's +death. + +Luckily it turned out that the _Elizabeth_ was on her way from the +Indies to England, and had only anchored during the night in the hope of +sighting one more prize; so it was by the merest chance that Roger +escaped after all. The captain now made sail, and pointed his vessel's +bows for home. The voyage lasted just three months, and they met with +no single enemy on the whole way. + +The ship sailed into Plymouth Sound one bright summer's morning, and, +after his long absence, Roger looked once more on the country of his +birth. Taking leave of the captain and officers the moment that the +ship was moored and he was at liberty, he made his way up the river, as +once before, to his home. + +He found all his people alive and well, and great and long-continued +were the rejoicings at his safe return; but poor Mary Edgwyth remained +for a long time quite inconsolable at the loss of her dearly-loved +brother. + +But time heals all wounds, and when at length Roger asked her a certain +question, her sorrow had sufficiently abated to admit of her saying +"Yes" by way of answer. + +Prior to this, however, Roger fitted out a small expedition on his own +account, and sailed for Lonely Inlet, in order to secure the treasure of +Jose Leirya. + +He found it, strangely enough, in the identical cave where Harry and he +had kept the savages at bay, and its value proved to be vastly greater +than even he had imagined, despite all that he had heard regarding it. + +Roger remained in those seas only long enough to secure the treasure, +upon successfully accomplishing which he turned his bows once again for +home, arriving in the summer, even as he had done before. Meanwhile the +lapse of time had so far ameliorated Mary's sorrow for the loss of her +brother that there was nothing now to prevent the marriage taking place, +and on a certain lovely summer's morning Roger and Mary were united in +Plympton Church; and their married life was all that their best friends +could desire for them. + +With part of the treasure Roger fitted out a few small ships of his own, +which he sent to the Indies to harry the Dons and avenge the death of +his friend; but he did not himself go with the expeditions, saying that, +unless his country required his services, he would remain at home and +take care of Mary. + +In due course a little son came to them, whom they named Harry, in +remembrance of the one who was gone; and with the arrival of the little +new-comer all sorrowful memory of the past was finally wiped out, +leaving only the future to be looked forward to, bright and +rose-coloured. + +Thus, after all the deeds of horror and bloodshed by which the treasure +of Jose Leirya had been accumulated, that same treasure was productive +of good at last; for by Roger's judicious use of it, and his generous +yet discriminative charity, he healed as many hurts perhaps as had been +inflicted in the accumulation of it. + +The story of those expeditions fitted out by Roger against his hated +enemies the Spaniards, and of the dire and terrible vengeance that they +wrought upon Alvarez, constitute in themselves a very complete history, +teeming with adventure, which the present chronicler hopes some day to +place upon record. + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Across the Spanish Main, by Harry Collingwood + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ACROSS THE SPANISH MAIN *** + +***** This file should be named 24454.txt or 24454.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/4/5/24454/ + +Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |